Home

User Manual TFP2A FiberMaster Optical Time

Contents

1. 3 56 Hemole Mentis t e a b es edat 3 59 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 4 1 Ix iuc co 4 3 Front Panel Controls Preview Mode sse 4 4 Preview Mode 4 7 Two Point Mode eere eese 4 9 Front Panel Controls Two Point Mode 4 12 Two Point Measurements kExamples eene 4 16 Splice Loss Mode 1 uale inier eo cue la tru ee oar ea pun hano uua 4 22 Front Panel Controls Splice Loss 4 24 Splice Loss Measurements Examples 4 27 Link Return Loss 4 29 Front Panel Controls Link Return Loss Mode 4 32 Link Return Loss 4 35 Event Return Loss Mode 4 38 Front Panel Controls Event Return Loss Mode 4 41 Event Return Loss 4 44 Event Marking ioi
2. 3 20 Dual Trace Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu 3 22 Event Threshold Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu cessere enin neni tn nnn nn 3 23 Event Marking Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings 3 25 Masking Type Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings 3 27 Unmasked Reflection eese 3 28 QUICK MASK m P 3 28 Acculask EEE A E T Sespcevsed 3 29 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual List of Illustrations Figure 3 16 Filtering Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu cessere eres enean nint nn 3 30 Figure 3 17 Operator Settings 3 32 Figure 3 18 Language Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 35 Figure 3 19 Display Intensity Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 37 Figure 3 20 Display Color Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 38 Figure 3 21 Sound Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu eee esee esee en enean itn nana 3 39 Figure 3 22 System Time Po
3. Expansion window centered at intersect point Expansion window not visible on display Display clips expansion window and waveform ESSERE Cursor past end of waveform Expansion window centered around last data point display clips expansion window Expansion window on edge of display Display clips expansion window Figure 6 2 Moving the Expansion Window 6 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Horizontal SIZE Knob Turning this knob causes the expansion window to expand and shrink horizontally Turn the knob clockwise to increase the width of the rectangle and counterclockwise to decrease it You cannot expand the window larger than the overview horizontal dimension or reduce it to include fewer than 100 data points or 10 pixels whichever is reached first In expanded view the frame of reference for this control is the waveform itself and not the expansion window which now fills the display You can reduce the expansion window to 10 pixels on the display but in expanded view you may be able to expand the waveform further until 100 data points are left on the display In this case the 100 data points may span a smaller distance than the 10 pixel width of the expansion window in overview Note that expanding the waveform horizontally in expanded view has the same effect as shrinking the expansion window ho
4. 8 69 Table 8 31 Mass Storage Commands and Queries 8 70 Table 8 32 Hardcopy Commands and Queries sss 8 71 Table 8 33 Display Related Commands and 8 71 Table 8 34 Identification Query 1 cccseeccssecccssenesnenccsseenssnensessneenenensenseernsseesenane 8 71 Table 8 35 Learn Settings Queries 8 71 Table 8 36 Reset and Stop 8 72 Table 8 37 Status and Error Reporting Commands and Queries 8 72 Table 8 38 Device Synchronization Commands and Query 8 72 Table 8 39 Selftest Queries 1 reae e esie eere esee einen anna anna na 8 72 Table 1 Mainframe Options A 1 Table A 2 Standard Accessories A 1 Table A 3 Optional Accessories A 2 Table 4 System 5 2 Table 5 System Multimode Options ecce ee enitn nnn A 2 Table 6 System Singlemode Options cessere A 3 Table 7 Option Accessories A 3 Ta
5. IDN 8 149 IEEE 488 1 8 1 8 3 8 5 IEEE 488 2 8 1 8 3 8 6 8 36 inspection procedures 1 38 1 41 installation 1 14 1 20 intensity 3 37 internal RAM 1 23 7 1 7 18 IPRNEVENTS 8 107 IPRNSCREEN 8 142 IPRNTEXT 8 143 J join cursors function in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in Preview Mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 13 4 33 K keyboard 1 22 KEYBOARD connector 2 3 keyboard functions B 1 B 3 keyboard translation 3 44 L language 3 35 3 36 laser output 1 20 3 2 laser source how to select 2 4 Link Return Loss mode 4 29 4 37 Link Return Loss softkey in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 4 LINKRTNLOSS 8 103 Load from Disk menu 7 3 7 6 Load softkey 7 4 LOADCUR 8 135 loading a file 7 3 7 6 settings file 7 5 waveform file 7 4 LOADREF 8 135 LOADHRFS 8 135 LOADSET 8 135 LOCAL 8 73 LOCAL 8 73 LOSS knob slope 2 7 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in Link Return Loss mode 4 33 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 13 LOSS knob vertical 2 6 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in Link Return Loss mode 4 33 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 13 LRN 8 150 mainframes 1 maintenance 1 38 1 41 manual change information 1 13 manual event return loss measurements 4 40 4 42 manual link return loss measurements 4 31 4 33 manual splice loss measurements 4 23 4 25 manual two point measurements 4 11 4 13 mapping
6. 4 37 Event Return Loss Mode eee 4 39 Automatic Event Return Loss Measurement 4 44 User Adjusted Event Return Loss Measurement 4 45 Event Marking p X 5 2 Event Table above and Event Notes below 5 3 Turning on Event Marking neuere eene nene nnno than 5 5 The Event Table 5 7 I2 nHIDI CIERRE 5 11 Editing Event tn nana nnn 5 12 The Place Event Markers Screen Cursor on Event Marker eee eese esee senes nennen 5 14 The Place Event Markers Screen Cursor off Event 5 16 The Place Event Markers Screen Moving Event Marker 5 16 Event Marking and Grouped Reflective Events 5 19 Event Marking and Grouped Non Reflective Events 5 20 Xii TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual List of Illustrations Figure 5 12 Event Marking and Unmasked Grouped Events 5 21 Figure 5 13 Event Marking and Masked Grouped Events 5 21 Figure 5 14 Event Marking and Nonreflective Gain Produced by Waveform Reconstruction 5 22 Figure 5 15 Event Marking and Incorrect Mask Pl
7. m LODODDODUDDOUDAOLDLULD6L L Display mode Measurement mode Wavelength Expansion window size Pulse width Maximum range Maximum no of averages Refractive index Slope calculation Scattering coefficient Dual trace Event threshold Event marking Masking type Filtering Fiber ID Operator Fiber notes Language Display intensity Display color Sound Date format Units Keyboard translation File format Hardcopy device GPIB status GPIB address RS232 baud rate RS232 parity RS232 stop bits RS232 data bits RS232 flow control Overview Preview Top laser in bottom module 20 of screen width limited by waveform length and 50 of screen height 850 MM 2 m 1300 MM 50 m 1310 SM 200 m 1550 SM 200 m 850 MM 4 km 1300 MM 10 km FS FG series 1310 SM 50 km 1550 SM 50 km FL series 1310 and 1550 SM 100 km 20 480 850 MM 62 5 um core diameter 1 4776 1300 MM 62 5 um core diameter 1 4719 1310 SM 1 4680 1550 SM 1 4685 Two point 850 MM 62 5 um core diameter 62 3 1300 MM 62 5 um core diameter 69 7 1310 SM 80 3 1550 SM 82 3 Off 0 20 dB Auto Off applicable only to FS series 1310 nm SM and 1550 nm SM modules On applicable only to FL series modules Blank Blank Blank English Medium Color On M D Y Metric USA TFP2 Internal if printer option installed If not R
8. 8 173 Internal Warnings ee 8 173 A Accessories and Options eese A 1 Mainifram es ier ote th ee Le dolce E lh eh lds A 1 ACCOSSOlBS i oc bte ramp deut UE A 1 OPONSE 3 B Keyboard 5 eene nnne nnn 1 C FiberMaster Data Format C 1 D Diagnostics Mentis Ri cuni Saee bkn EN EXH D 1 E Firmware Features 1 E 1 F COGdBS iiie F 1 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual ix List of Illustrations Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 General Waveform Analysis 1 5 Features on the Acquisition 1 8 Acquisition Screen Expansion Overview top and Expanded View bottom eos 1 9 Installing Optical Modules
9. crees eere eene trennt 1 15 Interconnect Circuit Board 1 16 Installing the Module Spacer Two Module Configuration ecce 1 17 Front Panel Option COVers 1 18 Loading Paper into the Internal Printer 1 19 Cleaning and Changing the Universal Connector 1 40 FiberMaster Front Panel Controls Indicators and Connectors rod usse oto e Sod acu 2 1 FiberMaster Rear Panel eene 2 12 FiberMaster Start Up Screen esee eres seen 3 2 Sample Help Screen esee eese ese esee nee tn nana tn anita rna a nana 3 6 Pulse Width Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu 3 10 Maximum Range Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu 3 12 Maximum Averages Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu eese 3 14 Refractive Index Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu esee 3 16 Slope Calculation Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu 3 18 Scattering Coefficient Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings
10. 8 62 GPIB Only and RS 232 Only Commands and Queries 8 62 Remote Local Commands and sss 8 73 Module Independent Settings 8 75 Module Independent Settings Queries 8 79 Module Dependent Settings Commands 8 82 Module Dependent Settings 8 85 Module Information 8 88 Serial Port Settings Commands and Queries 8 91 RS 232 Remote Control Command essen 8 93 Acquisition Commands sisse ee nennen innen nnne nnn 8 94 Cursor Command Query sss eiie enne 8 97 Expansion Commands and Queries esses 8 98 Measurement Command and Queries sse 8 101 Event Marking and Event Table Commands and Queries 8 106 Event Marker Commands and 8 111 Waveform Selection and Storage Commands and Queries 8 114 Waveform Data Command and 8 116 Response Formatting Commands sse 8 121 Response Formatting Queries sse 8 122 Wavefor
11. 1 37 Inspection Cleaning and 1 38 Exterior Inspection SRS 1 38 Ext rior Cleaning nen eee d e er ea 1 39 Optical Fiber Cleaning esses sss 1 39 Fuses Filters and eene nnne 1 41 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors 2 1 General Controls Indicators and 2 2 Optical Output Controls e eeen esses esee nennen natnra nia nn nana nasa anna a nana 2 4 Cursor COMIOIS mM 2 6 Window Controls and Indicators ceres eeeen eee 2 8 Waveform Controls and Indicators 2 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual v Table of Contents 3 Getting 3 1 Power On Defaults eese ees ei essei einen nani inna anna naa an nasa nasa sanas sana 3 4 Using FiberMaster s Online Help eene esee seien enne inania rnnt 3 6 Setting up the System ui dieere pane Da opare Si ipeo daanin 3 7 Selecting Waveform Settings seen 3 9 Entering Operator Settings sees 3 32 Selecting System Settings sene 3 34 Setting User
12. O Lift the door of the optical connector assembly 2 Using the flat blade screwdriver rotate the FREE LOCK screw in either direction until it is aligned vertically with the FREE position then rotate it back to the LOCK position This releases the connector from the universal interface assembly TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 39 Chapter 1 Introduction 10 11 Unscrew the connector by holding it around the connector knurling and turning it counterclockwise until it rotates freely Remove the connector Dampen the pipe cleaner with alcohol and draw it through the connector barrel Dampen a lint free swab with alcohol and swab the ferrule The ferrule must be clean otherwise it can deposit dirt into the optical connector Blow dry the connector barrel and the ferrule with canned air Dampen a second lint free swab with alcohol and gently roll it over the end of the fiber Do not scrub this can scratch the polished end Gently blow dry the fiber end with canned air Replace the connector over the universal interface Applying light pressure rotate the connector barrel the end of the connector until it locks in the keyed position Screw the connector back in by holding it around the connector knurling and turning it clockwise until finger tight Using the screwdriver turn the FREE LOCK screw to align it vertically with the FREE position Push the connector assembly into th
13. Change Settings Figure 5 14 Event Marking and Nonreflective Gain Produced by Waveform Reconstruction In this case gain is not high enough to be treated as a reflection so the gain and the reflection following are measured together as a nonreflective event When incorrect mask placement causes undershoot before the reflection In this case the event is considered nonreflective Normal Density Averages 10240 Time 00 00 57 8 224 km 26 24 0 33 22 20 T T T T T 8 000 8 100 8 200 8 300 8 400 Event Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass T Storage Event 5 Dist 8 224 km Loss 0 33 dB Event Ret Loss Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Maximum Range 25 0 km Max Avgs 10 240 59 9 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 00 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Auto AccuMask Module F51315 13108M File FIG7 WEM Settings Change Figure 5 15 Event Marking and Incorrect Mask Placement 5 22 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Event Marking Examples The following examples show how to use event marking along with some of FiberMaster s other operating capabilities to locate and measure events on a fiber Example 1 Figure 5 16 shows a waveform with a fusion splice between two other marked
14. XINCR Return the distance between data points in kilometers or kilofeet units selected by the UNITS command Refer to the WFMPRE query description Remote only Query Syntax XINCR Response Syntax XINCR lt gt Response Data lt xincr gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the distance between data points on the waveform 8 116 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control XZERO Return the x coordinate of the first point on the waveform in kilometers or kilofeet units selected by the UNITS command Refer to the WFMPRE query description Remote only Query Syntax XZERO Response Syntax XZERO xzero Response Data xzero lt NR2 gt and specifies the x coordinate of the first point on the waveform YMULT Return the y value scale factor used to convert CURVE query y values to dBs Refer to the WFMPRE query description Remote only Query Syntax YMULT Response Syntax YMULT lt ymult gt Response Data lt ymult gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the y value scale factor YOFF Return the y value offset value always 0 0 Refer to the WFMPRE query description Remote only Query Syntax YOFF Response Syntax YOFF lt yoff gt Response Data lt yoff gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the y value offset value always 0 0 YZERO Return the y coordinate of the first point on the waveform always 0 0 Refer to the WFMPRE query description Remote only
15. f 6 AK 3 WFM MIBLAKO4 WEM Delete Char Exit Enter filename and press the Save softkey Figure 7 4 Save Menu Dual Drive Instrument For dual drive instruments if there is a disk in the floppy disk drive when you turn on the instrument that drive is the active drive If there is no floppy disk present the internal RAM is the default drive type After power on each time you enter the mass storage menus the active drive type is the one last used 7 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage File Name The file name is the name that identifies the waveform or settings file on the disk This name appears on the disk directory You can specify a file name up to eight characters in length with an additional optional three character extension If you enter more than eight characters a period is shown as the only legal ninth character and must be entered as part of the file name You can then go on to specify up to three more characters as the optional filename extension If you enter eight or fewer characters in the file name WFM is automatically appended to waveform files and SET is automatically appended to settings files during the save operation The file name can include any combination of numbers and letters In addition the following characters are allowed in the file name amp _ Enter the file name as follows 1 When you first
16. Two Point Mass Storage Change Settings Event Table 2 4 Spl Loss 1 45 dB 6 458 km Event Ret Loss 26 6 dB 9 287 km Two Point Splice Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Maximum Range 10 0 km Max Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 30 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Module F351315 13105M File LSJU78 WFM Change Settings Figure 5 3 Turning on Event Marking TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking When you move the active distance cursor onto an event marker the distance from the front panel to the event the splice loss of the event and the event return loss are displayed in a field under the waveform above the parameter area of the acquisition screen When the distance cursor is not on an event marker this field is blank After turning on event marking you can move between measurement modes and the event markers stay visible on the acquisition screen and on the Waveform Settings menu In any measurement mode pressing the Event Table softkey to display the event table then exiting back to the acquisition screen is another way to turn on event marking You can turn event marking off by pressing and holding the Event Table softkey for two seconds Turning event markers on a
17. lt coeff gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the scattering coefficient of the fiber under test in dB 8 78 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control TIME Return the system time Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data TRACE TIME TIME time time SRD in the format HH MM SS where HH hours MM minutes and SS seconds Return whether dual or single trace mode is selected Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data UNITS TRACE TRACE mode mode lt CRD gt and specifies the current display mode Possible responses are SINGLE DUAL Return the currently selected distance measurement unit Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data UNITS UNITS units units lt CRD gt and specifies the units used for distance measurement along the horizontal axis Possible responses are METRIC ENGLISH kilometers or kilofeet TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 79 Chapter 8 Remote Control Module Dependent Settings Commands NOTE GPIB commands that change instrument settings do not save the new settings as power on defaults To save instrument settings use the SET or LRN query These queries both generate response data in the form of resendable GPIB commands that you can use to set the instrument back to its current configuration Acceptable parameters for these commands depend on which optics module is currently s
18. ALPHA A WFM 07 07 89 11326 ALPHA B WFM 07 06 89 20342 ALPHA C WFM 06 10 89 15826 giving the names creation dates and sizes of the files TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 159 Chapter 8 Remote Control SEND LOADREF ALPHA TRACE DUAL WFMSELECT REF Load waveform and associated settings from the file ALPHA C WFM into reference memory enable dual trace mode and select the reference waveform as the active one SEND CALCSLOPE LSA TWOPOINT 5 1 5 2 Change the method of slope calculation to LSA and perform two point calculations between 5 1 and 5 2 km on the active waveform RECEIVE response Sample response 5 1 5 2 0 101 9 3E 1 5 1 and 5 2 km are the data points at which the two point measurements were made 0 101 dB is the loss and 93 is the waveform slope SEND WFMSELECT CUR SAVECUR ALPHA D GPLTSCREEN Make the current waveform the active one and save the waveform data to disk in the file ALPHA D WFM Send a waveform plot to an external GPIB plotter 8 160 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Remote Control Event Codes and Messages Queue Status Codes 0 No events to report queue empty The Event Queue is empty 1 No events to report new events pending ESR The Event Queue contains events but an ESR query must be issued to enable them for reading The ESR response summarizes which types of events in the queue 350 Too many event
19. Anew acquisition is started If the file being loaded is a waveform file the file is loaded into both current and reference memories before starting the new acquisition This way the file s settings are used for the new acquisition in current memory and you can also view the original waveform data in reference memory Press the Exit softkey to cancel the Quick Load operation and return to the acquisition screen Load ME Format Delete From Disk To Disk HARRISO1 FILE SPECIFICATION SET Drive Type Removable File Type TFP2 File HARRISO1 WFM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes be SET Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT AVE JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED 4ARRISO1 Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL WFM Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 44 Removable Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRISOZ SET HARRISOZ WFM HARRISO3 WFM HARRISO4 WFM HARRISOS WFM M HARRISO7 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIDLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKO3 WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM Exit Press key to load file and start an acquisition Figure 7 3 Quick Load Exiting the Load from Disk Menu To go to the Save to Disk menu press the Next Menu softkey To return to the acquisition screen press Exit 7 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Save to Disk NOTE File Format NOTE Use the Save to Disk menu to save
20. When the instrument returns to local control programmable softkey definitions are retained When the instrument returns to remote control again the previously programmed softkeys are redisplayed and re enabled Refer to the Commands and Queries section in this chapter for full descriptions of the SOFTKEY GSTATUS and MESSAGE commands The use of programmable softkeys is not available in RWLS remote with local lockout state Error and Event Detection Summary The power on setting of the DESER to 255 causes all errors and events detected by FiberMaster to set a bit in the SESR and generate an entry in the Event Queue Errors are summarized on bits 3 through 5 of the SESR The SESR is read and cleared using the ESR query Further detail about errors summarized in the SESR can be obtained by sending the EVENT or EVMSG query after sending the ESR query Refer to the Commands and Queries section later in this chapter for complete descriptions of remote commands TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 41 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 System Errors Events and Warnings Certain categories of errors and events detected by the instrument are recorded in the Standard Event Status Register and the Event Queue as described in the previous section on status reporting and error handling Logged events are categorized by their numeric codes as shown in the following table Table 8 14 RS 232 Event Code Categories Code Rang
21. whitespace exponent where lt mantissa gt lt floatnum gt lt integer gt lt floatnum gt lt integer gt lt integer gt lt integer gt lt integer gt integer sequence of one or ASCII digits 0 9 lt exponent gt Ele lt whitespace gt lt integer gt lt whitespace gt sequence of one or more ASCII characters in the range 0 9 hex or OB 20 hex The mantissa may not contain more than 255 characters excluding leading zeros The exponent must be in the range from 32 000 through 32 000 lt DNPD gt specifies that the argument is an integer or floating point number with or without an exponent such as 755 755 755 1 1 0 1 755E5 and 0 1E 3 lt SPD gt String Program Data Specifies a quoted string defined as follows lt character_sequence gt lt character_sequence gt where character sequence is any sequence of ASCII characters To include the delimiting quote character within the string enter it twice as shown in the examples below SPD Entered As String Interpreted As FIBER X 1 A FIBER X 1 A FIBER X 1 A FIBER X I A FIBER X 1 A FIBER X 1 A FIBER X 1 A FIBER X 1 A FIBER 1 FIBER X 1 A FIBER 1 FIBER X 1 A lt ABPD gt lt Arbitrary Block Program Data Used for the FILNORM FILHIGH FILSET PUT WFM and PUT SET commands and defined in the descriptions
22. Exterior Inspection Inspect the outside of the OTDR for damage wear and missing parts using table 1 19 as a guide OTDRs that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and performance Table 1 21 External Inspection Checklist Item Cabinet front panel cover handle Front panel knobs Connectors Accessories Inspect For Cracks scratches deformations damaged hardware or gaskets proper operation of handle Missing damaged or loose knobs Broken shells cracked insulation deformed contacts Dirt in connectors Missing items or parts of items bent pins broken or frayed cables and damaged connectors Repair Action Replace defective module Repair or replace missing or damaged knobs Replace defective modules Clear or wash out dirt Replace damaged or missing items frayed cables and defective modules 1 38 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Exterior Cleaning CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the OTDR during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator 1 Remove dust from the outside of the instrument by wiping with a lint free cloth or brushing the surface with a small brush Use the brush to remove dust from around the front panel controls 2 Clean remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose detergent and water solutio
23. FiBERMASTER Copyright 1990 1995 Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Please select a module and a pulsewidth and connect a fiber m Press START STOP to begin an acquisition Optics Modules The internal printer is installed There is a floppy disk drive installed u1 u2 lt L1 gt FL1315 1310SM V8 02 lt L2 gt FL1315 15505SM V8 02 Instrument Settings Pulse Width 2000 ns 200 m Dual Trace Off Maximum Range 100 0 km Event Threshold 0 20 dB Max Avgs 20 480 1 1 min Event Marking Auto Ref Index 1 4680 Filtering On Slope Calc Two Point Module FL1315 1310SM Settings Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Source Empty Figure E 1 Firmware Version Number on the Start Up Screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix E Firmware Features The table below lists the major firmware version releases and the significant features added with each release If your firmware is not the most current version your instrument does not include the features listed in the table as having been added with later versions The sections of the user manual that cover the features added in firmware versions later than the one installed in your instrument do not apply to the operation of your instrument Table E 1 Firmware Versions and Features Firmware Major Features Added Version 2 00 Initial TFP2 release 3 00 Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss mea
24. Place holder for serial number not used Tek Codes amp Formats 89 1 Flat header structure no colons adapted Tek Codes and Formats 1981 waveform handling lt v68020 gt version number of 68020 firmware ROM lt v34010 gt version number of 34010 ROM vplugin1 gt version number of plug in 1 ROM vplugin2 version number of plug in 2 ROM lt vacqsys gt acquisition system version number Note that each element of the fourth field is separated by an ASCII space If the instrument contains no plug in modules the response includes the string A0 00A instead of plug in ROM version numbers Discussion The response to the IDN query is terminated by asserting the END line concurrently with sending the newline character The query must be sent as the only or last query in a program message or event 440 is generated 8 146 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Learn Settings Queries NOTE GPIB commands that change instrument settings do not save the new settings as power on defaults To save instrument settings use the SET or LRN query These queries both generate response data in the form of resendable GPIB commands that you can use to set the instrument back to its current configuration LRN Learn instrument setup query Query Syntax LRN Response Syntax See SET query SET Learn instrument settings Query Syntax SET Response Syntax lt instrument se
25. Query Syntax YZERO Response Syntax YZERO lt yzero gt Response Data lt yzero gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the y coordinate of the first point on the waveform always 0 0 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 117 Chapter 8 Remote Control Response Formatting Commands ENCDG Specify the encoding format ASCII or BINARY used by the following commands and queries CURVE FILE GET SET GET WFM FILNORM FILHIGH FILSET PUT SET PUT WFM Command Syntax ENCDG format Command Data format CPD and specifies the data format used for waveform data Possible values are ASCII BINARY Power On Value BINARY HEADER Enable or disable the headers returned with query responses Refer to the GPIB Data Formats section Command Syntax HEADER option Command Data option lt DNPD gt lt CPD gt 0 OFF disable query response headers 1 ON enable query response headers Example s HEADER OFF Power On Value ON Discussion HDR can be used as a synonym for HEADER 8 118 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Response Formatting Queries ENCDG Return the encoding format ASCII or BINARY used for the following commands and queries CURVE FILE GET SET GET WFM FILNORM FILHIGH FILSET PUT SET PUT WFM Query Syntax ENCDG Response Syntax ENCDG format Response Data format CRD and specifies the data format used for
26. Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu Event Threshold Next Param Tum the CURSOR knob to change the highlighted number pong Pulse Width 500 ns 50 Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 3 10 Event Threshold Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Event Threshold window to set the threshold for events that are marked when Event Marking mode is on Only those events with splice loss measurements that meet or exceed the threshold are included both on the acquisition screen and on the event table The factory default event threshold is 0 20 dB You can set a different power on event threshold using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Turn the CURSOR knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the event threshold The value changes in increments of one one hundredth of a dB between 0 03 and 0 20 dB then by five one hundredths to a maximum value of 5 00 dB TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 23 Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE Event threshold minimums depend on the currently selected pulse width as follows Pulse Width Event Threshold meters Minimum dB 2400 07 200 to 400 05 200 03
27. TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 3 Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Addressing Each GPIB device has at least one talk or listen address Device addresses are sent by the controller to specify who talks and who listens FiberMaster s address is set by pressing the Change Settings softkey on the front panel to enter the menu system The GPIB address menu is found on the System Settings menu screen You can set the GPIB address to any value from 0 to 30 inclusive The factory default setting is 7 The power on default is the value last used Refer to Chapter 3 Getting Started for details on using the menu system You can make changes to the GPIB address only while the instrument is in local state LOCS or local with lockout state LWLS User initiated address changes are recognized immediately by the instrument If a GPIB address change is requested while the instrument is exchanging messages with the controller the instrument stops scanning an incoming message or stops sending a response message and becomes ready to receive a new message whenever it receives its new listen address from the controller In addition to a GPIB address setting the System Settings menu includes a GPIB status setting The instrument can be set online or offline When online FiberMaster accepts commands and generates data in response to queries from a GPIB controller When offline the instrument does not participate in message transfer over the bus
28. You can shorten the power on process using the quick start feature Quick start your instrument by holding down the START STOP button while you press the POWER button This makes the instrument to bypass power on diagnostics causing the start up screen to come up faster When quick starting your instrument release the START STOP button as soon as you see the message Starting operating system If you are still holding down START STOP at the time the start up screen appears an acquisition is started and the laser starts firing 3 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Do not quick start your instrument every time it is powered on Allow the instrument to run the power on diagnostics periodically to detect any malfunctions that might have occurred Mass Storage A Mass Storage softkey displays on the start up screen Press this key to go into the mass storage menu system if you want to load waveform and settings files into the instrument from floppy disk or the optional internal RAM You can also perform save delete and format operations in the mass storage system Refer to chapter 7 Mass Storage for instructions on how to use this system If you enter the mass storage system from the start up screen the acquisition screen displays when you exit TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 3 Chapter 3 Getting Started Power On Defaults FiberMaster s factory set power on settings are as follows
29. 8 163 remote local state transitions 8 37 reset 8 48 Return to Local softkey 8 41 signal lines 8 28 standard event status register SESR 8 40 status reporting 8 39 8 42 synchronization 8 46 system events 8 44 system setup 8 29 8 35 RS 232 remote control command 8 93 RS 232 system 8 27 8 48 RS 232 only commands and queries 8 62 selftest queries 8 157 serial port settings commands and queries 8 91 8 92 settings commands module dependent 8 82 8 84 settings commands module independent 8 758 78 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index 7 settings queries module dependent 8 85 8 87 settings queries module independent 8 79 8 81 status and error reporting commands 8 153 status and error reporting queries 8 154 8 155 System events 8 172 waveform data command and queries 8 116 8 120 waveform selection and storage commands and queries 8 114 8 115 waveform transfer commands and queries 8 123 8 131 REMOTE indicator 2 3 Remote menu 3 59 3 60 REMOTE 8 74 Return Loss softkey in Preview mode 4 4 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 in Two Point mode 4 12 RS 232 8 1 8 173 RS232 baud rate 3 51 RS232 connector 2 12 RS232 data bits 3 54 RS232 flow control 3 55 RS232 parity 3 52 RS232 plotter 2 2 3 47 RS232 stop bits 3 53 RS 232 system 8 27 8 48 RST 8 152 S sampling acquisition 3 10 3 14 Save softkey 7 11 Save to Disk menu 7 7 7 12 SAVECUR 8 136 SAVEREF 8 136 SAVESET 8 136 saving
30. An execution error occurs when a program data element is invalid or out of legal range or when the current state of the instrument prevents the execution of a command or query Execution errors in the range from 2000 to 2999 are specific to FiberMaster An internal error is logged when a serious system or hardware failure occurs either during the power on sequence or during the execution of a command or query Internal errors in the range from 3000 to 3999 indicate errors specific to FiberMaster Event 350 which indicates an Event Queue overflow does not set the DDE bit in the SESR 8 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control System Events There are four types of system events 1 The power on event PON 2 The operation complete event OPC Refer to the description of the OPC command in the Commands and Queries section later in this chapter 3 The user request event URQ which occurs when you press a softkey programmed by the SOFTKEY command while the instrument is in REMS 4 Query errors QYE Refer to the following section on message exchange protocol Execution Warnings An execution warning occurs when 1 a command or query parameter is adjusted to the nearest legal value or 2 a command refers to data that is not currently stored in the instrument Internal Warnings An internal warning is caused by a command or query execution failure but does not indicate as serious a failure a
31. DIRECTORY NL The recommended form for sending a mass storage query is as follows lt query gt 4NL TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 37 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Status Reporting and Error Handling The RS 232 controller has access to two FiberMaster status and status enable registers These registers control status and error reporting for all device events as illustrated in figure 8 5 The functions of each register are explained in the following pages Table 8 13 summarizes the status registers and their corresponding commands and queries Table 8 13 RS 232 Status Register Summary Write Clear Read Register Queue with with with Device Event Status Enable Register DESER DESE DESE DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR none CLS ESR ESR DEVICE EVENTS Device Event Status Enable Register Set with DESE Read with DESE ron ura ove Tee poe Te SESR Read Sync Standard Event Status Register Read with Read and clear with ESR EVENT or Clear with CLS EVMSG Clear with A RES rox uno ove ee ove Toro Gs ama code msg code msg Figure 8 5 RS 232 Status Reporting and Error Handling Device Event Status Enable Register The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER is an eight bit register with bit definitions corresponding to the IEEE 488 2 defined Standard Event Status Register SESR The purpose of the DESER is to enable the r
32. FiberMaster 1 responds to controller requests to stop the flow of data to the controller when the controller is not ready and 2 requests the controller to stop the flow of data from the controller when FiberMaster is not ready Three methods of flow control are available for selection via FiberMaster s System Settings menu XON XOFF XON XOFF flow control is not recommended since it cannot be used with binary data transfers The flow control character could occur as part of the data itself TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 33 Chapter 8 Remote Control When XON SOFF flow control is selected and FiberMaster receives an XOFF character 13 hex from the controller it does not transmit data to the controller until it receives an XON character 11 hex FiberMaster sends an XOFF character to the controller when its input buffer reaches the high water mark It sends an XON character to the controller when its input buffer drops to the low water mark RTS CTS RTS CTS is the recommended method of flow control since it can be used with binary data and is supported by V 42 compliant modems When RTS CTS flow control is selected and the controller drops the RTS signal FiberMaster does not transmit data to the controller until RTS is reasserted FiberMaster drops the CTS signal when its input buffer reaches the high water mark It reasserts CTS when its input buffer drops to the low water mark DTR DSR DTR DSR flow control should on
33. SRE STB OPC WAI OPC TST 8 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Device Dependent Messages and Program Messages Device dependent messages transfer information directly between FiberMaster and the controller They include commands that cause an action to take place in the instrument queries requesting information from the instrument command and query data elements and query responses Some commands and queries start device operations such as acquisitions measurements and disk drive operations Other commands perform interface related functions such as setting status registers and allowing controller and instrument synchronization Queries also read instrument settings status and configuration information Device dependent commands and queries are listed in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter A sequence of one or more device dependent commands and queries is called a program message The FiberMaster is programmed by sending it one or more program messages from the controller A program message that contains a query is called a query message For explanations of the formats of commands queries and program messages refer to the Commands and Queries section of this chapter Modes of Operation Front panel controls allow you to set GPIB status online or offline When online the instrument accepts commands and generates data in response to a GPIB controller When offline the
34. When you are making manual link return loss measurements this allows you to match the slope of the cursor with the backscatter before the link The cursor elongates to make accurate positioning easier This adjustment does not affect measurement values Any manual adjustment to the automatically placed loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear at the top left of the display EXPAND Switch between overview and expanded view Unless expanded view includes high button density data there is no difference in measurement values except that expanded view measurements may be at higher resolution With high density data there may be slight variations in loss measurements Using the expansion window and working with high density data are explained in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Vertical SIZE In overview expand and contract the expansion window vertically In expanded view knob vertical SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself vertically When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the vertical SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor Horizontal In overview expand and contract the expansion window horizontally In expanded SIZE knob view the horizontal SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself horizontally This does not affect distance measurements unless you expand
35. adjustable elements distance and loss cursors and the User Adjusted Measurement message are displayed in red Measurement values such as the two point distance and loss splice loss fiber loss and return loss figures are shown in yellow Event markers are also displayed in yellow 1 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 11 All waveform settings used for the acquisition are displayed at the bottom of the screen These user defined settings are selected on the Waveform Settings menu reached by pressing the Change Settings softkey on the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for information on configuring your instrument and setting parameters A Module parameter in the list of settings indicates which laser source is currently selected The type of module is shown plus the currently selected wavelength For example FS1315 1310SM indicates that the 1310 nm wavelength of a dual wavelength singlemode FS type optical module is currently selected If the active module is different from the one that was used to acquire the current waveform the module parameter is highlighted The module parameter may include alphabetical characters to indicate the modification level of the module and whether the module has an internal fiber with a non standard core diameter This information is appended to the wavelength Lower case letters indicate the modification level of the module and upper case letters
36. drive CRD and specifies which device is currently selected FIXED Internal RAM drive REMOVABLE Floppy disk drive Return the fiber ID stored in a waveform file on the drive currently selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion FETCHNOTE FETCHID lt tilename gt filename SPD and specifies the waveform file from which to read the fiber ID If no extension is specified in filename a WFM extension is assumed FETCHID lt fiberid gt lt fiberid gt lt SRD gt Use the FIBERID command to specify a fiber ID for the fiber under test Return the fiber notes stored in a waveform file on the device currently selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion FETCHNOTE lt tfilename gt lt filename gt lt SPD gt and specifies the waveform file from which to read the notes If no extension is specified in lt filename gt a WFM extension is assumed FETCHNOTE lt fibernotes gt lt fibernotes gt lt SRD gt Use the FIBERNOTES command to specify fiber notes before saving the waveform file 8 136 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control FETCHOPER Return the operator string stored in a waveform file on the drive currently selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Query Syntax Query
37. Backscattered Distance scale meters or feet Noise light floor Figure 1 1 General Waveform Analysis TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Overview of FiberMaster Operation Start data acquisition on a fiber optic cable under test by simply connecting the cable to the appropriate front panel connector and pressing the START STOP button An averaged waveform appears on the screen and you can make measurements immediately The FiberMaster OTDR provides five measurement modes for viewing faults and measuring transmission loss fusion splice loss connection loss return loss and other characteristics of fiber optic cable These are Preview Two Point Splice Loss and two Return Loss modes Preview mode gives a clear overview of the fiber Scan fiber features and measure distances in Preview mode Two Point mode allows you to measure loss between any two points on the fiber Splice Loss mode gives loss measurements at splice points along the fiber Link Return Loss mode lets you measure the return loss of a fiber link C L O vu Event Return Loss shows the return loss for a particular event on the fiber Enter each measurement mode by pressing a front panel softkey Two point splice loss and return loss measurements can be made automatically Front panel controls permit manual adjustment to automatic measurements Automatic and manual event marking modes locate and perform measurements on all
38. EVNTNOTES N 8 107 EVNTTHRESH N 8 107 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 65 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 26 Event Marker Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page ADDMARKER Y 8 108 DELMARKDIST Y 8 108 DELMARKNUM Y 8 108 SHOWMARKERS Y 8 109 Queries MARKERDIST N 8 109 NUMMARKERS N 8 109 SHOWMARKERS N 8 110 Table 8 27 Waveform Selection and Storage Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page STORE Y 8 111 WFMSELECT Y 8 111 Queries WFMSELECT N 8 111 WFMSOURCE N 8 112 Table 8 28 Waveform Data Command and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page WFMINT Y 8 113 Queries CURVE Y 8 114 NR PT Y 8 115 PT OFF Y 8 115 WFID Y 8 115 WFMINT Y 8 115 WFMPRE Y 8 116 XINCR Y 8 116 XZERO Y 8 117 YMULT Y 8 117 YOFF Y 8 117 YZERO Y 8 117 8 66 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 29 Response Formatting Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page ENCDG N 8 118 HEADER N 8 118 Queries ENCDG N 8 119 HEADER N 8 119 Table 8 30 Waveform Transfer Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page PUT SET binary Y 8 120 binary 8 120 PUT SET ASCII Y 8 121 PUT WFM ASCII Y 8 121 FILHIGH Y 8 122 FILNORM Y 8 122 FILSET Y 8 122 Queries FILE Y 8 124 GET SET binary Y 8 126 binary 8 126 SET ASCII Y 8 127 GET WFM ASCII Y 8 127 GPIB only for binary enco
39. FiberMaster is intended to be operated from a power source that does not apply more than 250V RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation The AC power connector is a three wide polarized plug with the ground earth lead connected directly to the instrument frame to provide electrical shock protection If the unit is connected to any other power source the unit frame must be connected to an earth ground To avoid electric shock the power cord protective grounding conductor must be connected to ground 1 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Power and voltage requirements are printed on the back panel With the DC power option option 17 FiberMaster can be operated from 11 to 16 VDC or from 90 to 250 VAC nominal line voltage at 47 to 73 Hz AC only instruments can be operated from 90 to 250 VAC 47 to 73 Hz or from 90 to 180 VAC 47 to 440 Hz In AC only instruments power source selection is made automatically when the unit is plugged In Installing the Optical Module s Your TFP2A mainframe may be shipped with optical module s installed If you order modules separately you may have to install them at your site Install one or two optical modules into the mainframe as follows 1 Detach the left hand side of the mainframe back panel by unscrewing
40. Horizontal POSITION knob WFM SELECT button STORE button MODULE SELECT button START STOP button Move the waveform right and left on the display In both overview and expanded view horizontal movement is limited to half the maximum range in either direction When dual trace mode is on the horizontal POSITION knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Pick whether the current waveform or the reference waveform is active The indicator next to the WFM SELECT button lights to show which waveform is active In single trace mode the active waveform is the only one displayed When dual trace is on and both the current and reference waveforms are displayed the dB scale is that of the active waveform which is displayed at a higher intensity You can make measurements on the active waveform The difference between the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is shown at the top of the vertical scale To align the two waveforms vertically press and hold the WFM SELECT button The inactive waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB When dual trace is off and the view is in overview pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button zeros the waveform s position it is moved so that 0 dB is at the bottom of the vertical scale and 0 kilometers or kilofeet is at the left of the horizontal scale Store the current waveform into reference memory Any prior contents o
41. If the waveform is expanded to display only 100 data points you are prompted to press the START STOP button to obtain high density data Refer to chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions for details on using the expansion window with high density data acquisition In expanded view dual trace mode the horizontal SIZE knob operates on both the current and the reference waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor 2 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors EXPAND Pressing this button switches between expanded view and overview display modes Overview displays the complete waveform as defined by the maximum range setting which is set on the Waveform Settings menu The amount of expansion displayed in expanded view is defined by the dimensions of the expansion window which is adjusted using the SIZE knobs as described above The indicator next to the EXPAND button lights when the display is in expanded view If the waveform is expanded to display only 100 data points you are prompted to press the START STOP button to obtain a higher sample density Refer to chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions for details on using the expansion window with high density data acquisition Note in expanded view expanding the waveform using the SIZE knobs has the effect of shrinking the expansion window Shrinking the waveform
42. Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 11 44 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 25 Units Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Units window to select metric or English units of measure for distance measurements and range settings Metric units are kilometers English units are kilofeet The factory default is Metric but you can set the power on default to English using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Select metric or English by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new units setting takes effect when you exit this parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 43 Chapter 3 Getting Started Keyboard Translation To display the Keyboard Translation pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the keyboard translation parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Remote Settings Settings Defaults Next SYSTEM enu La
43. Pressing the Switch Drives softkey lets you view the directory of the other drive The Drive Type field in the file specification area of the screen indicates which drive is active You can then select the file to load from the active drive s directory For dual drive instruments if there is a disk in the floppy disk drive when you turn on the instrument that drive is the active drive If there is no floppy disk present the internal RAM is the default drive type After power on each time you enter the mass storage menus the active drive type is the one last used After choosing the file to load press the Load softkey to load the waveform or settings data Only waveform and settings files may be loaded If you select a file to load that is another type of file the file type is displayed as Non OTDR and the following message displays Only Waveform or Settings files may be loaded Loading a Waveform File When you press the Load softkey to load a waveform file the softkeys are redrawn to show the following options Load Save From Disk To Disk Format Delete FILE SPECIFICATION Drive Type Removable File TFP2 Switch Drives File Name HARRISU1 WFM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 44 Removabl
44. Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto View Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Change Max Avgs 20 480 214s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU76 WEM Figure 6 1 The Expansion Window TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions display When you press the EXPAND button the area of the waveform defined by the expansion window expands to fill the display In overview you can move the expansion window along the waveform by moving the active distance cursor The expansion window stays centered around the intersection of the cursor and the waveform If you move the cursor off either the beginning or the end of the waveform the expansion window remains centered around the vertical position of the last data point the cursor was on The only exception to this positioning occurs when re entering overview from expanded view after moving the cursor or the waveform in expanded view In this case the expansion window may no longer be centered around the cursor waveform intersection However when you turn the CURSOR knob the window moves to center around the distance cursor and the waveform again You can also change the size of the window the smaller the window the more magnification results when you enter expanded view Refer to the following sections in this ch
45. The controller sends the query message ACQUIRE 10 0 START NORMAL OPC 2 FiberMaster starts an acquisition When the acquisition is complete the instrument detects the OPC query and sends the response 1 lt NL gt 3 Upon reading the response message from the controller knows the acquisition is complete TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 45 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Device Initialization In addition to power on initialization FiberMaster has three types of reset via RS 232 control accomplished through the BREAK signal the RST command and the CLS command Power On Initialization BREAK Signal Instrument parameters with factory set power on defaults are reset to their factory set values at power on Parameters with user definable power on defaults are reset to the user programmed values at power on The RS 232 factory power on defaults are as follows Baud rate 9600 Parity none Stop bits 1 Data bits 8 Flow control XON XOFF Standard Event Status Register SESR the power on value is 128 decimal which indicates the power on event Event Queue power on value is to queue a single event power on event 401 Response header enabling power on value is ON Waveform encoding power on value is BINARY The sequence of events at power on is illustrated in the following diagram Power On SESR Event Queue cleared SESR set to 128 bit 7 Event 401 logged in
46. USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Exit Figure 3 23 System Date Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Date window to set the system date This date is used to date stamp all disk files and acquisitions Use the CURSOR knob to increase and decrease the day month and year The highlighted portion of the date is affected when you turn the CURSOR knob Turning the knob clockwise increases the highlighted number turning the knob counterclockwise decreases it Pressing the Next Digit softkey causes the next portion of the date to be highlighted Pressing the Prev Digit softkey highlights the previous portion of the date You can use the optional keyboard to type in the date Enter two digits each for the day month and year Use the slash key in place of the Next Digit softkey The new date setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 41 Chapter 3 Getting Started Date Format To display the Date Format pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the date format parameter is highlighted
47. Waveform Operator User Remote Settings Settings Defaults Next SYSTEM Menu Language English Intensity Medium Next Param Prev Param Sound On BE Sound On change the selection Time 18 14 16 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 us HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 27 File Format Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the File Format window to select the file format used for mass storage save operations when you save waveform data The two available file formats are TFP2 and CFF common file format TFP2 format is the one used by previous versions of the FiberMaster OTDR It allows TFP2A waveforms to be backward compatible with the TFP2 CFF is the common file format used by the TFP2A and other newer Tektronix OTDR related products produced in 1995 and after CFF waveform files can be loaded viewed and measured using the TFP2A or other Tektronix OTDR related products that read and write CFF data regardless of which instrument was used to acquire the data Select the file format by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The file format setting is saved when you exit the parameter by
48. and specifies a wavelength as returned by the MODUPPER or MODLOWER query MODS UPPER MM1300 Uppermost available front panel wavelength The new module selection takes effect immediately and is used for the next acquisition The command is executed even if the reference waveform is currently selected TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 81 Chapter 8 Remote Control PULSRNG Set both pulse width and range for the currently selected optics module Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion PULSRNG lt pulse width gt lt range gt lt pulse width gt lt DNPD gt and specifies an available pulse width returned by the PULSELIST query lt range gt lt DNPD gt and specifies an available range returned by the RANGELIST query PULSR 100 10 pulse width 100 ns range 10 km Specify the pulse width in nanoseconds and the range in units specified by the last UNITS command kilometers or kilofeet To select a high resolution pulse width 10 ns 20 ns and 50 ns only enter a negative pulse width value For example to select a 10 ns HR pulse width use the command PULSRNG 10 4 This selects the 10 ns HR pulse width and a 4 km range If you select a high resolution pulse width when none is available for a given pulse width i e PULSRNG 2000 100 FiberMaster sets the pulse width to the same width but at the normal resolution setting i e as if you had sent the c
49. and the instrument returns to Preview mode This softkey is available only when return loss is on Pressing Exit Return Loss turns the return loss modes off The Link Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Two Point softkey and the Event Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Splice Loss softkey Exit Return Loss reverts to Return Loss TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Mass Storage Softkey Change Settings Softkey CURSOR knob CURSOR SELECT knob EXPAND button Vertical SIZE knob Horizontal SIZE knob Vertical POSITION knob Enter the mass storage system allowing you to store waveform and settings data on floppy disk or internal RAM if installed Refer to chapter 7 Mass Storage for details on how to use this system Enter the Waveform Settings menu allowing you to change instrument settings and giving access to additional configuration menus Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on how to use these menus Move the active distance cursor along the waveform Distance measurements are the only type of measurement you can make in Preview mode Pick which distance cursor is controlled by the CURSOR knob The active cursor is displayed at a brighter intensity to differentiate it from the inactive cursor The CURSOR SELECT button also offers a join cursors function useful when the inactive cursor is not on the screen Press and hold the CURSOR SELEC
50. button or remote control by sending the ACQUIRE command Sending 100 16 bit data words in binary encoding CURVE 3201 lt byte1 gt lt byte200 gt lt checksum gt 8 114 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control NR PT Return number of points in waveform Remote only Query Syntax NR PT Response Syntax NR PT points Response Data points lt NR1 gt and specifies the number of data points in the entire waveform PT OFF Return point offset for waveform Hemote only Query Syntax PT OFF Response Syntax PT OFF ptoff Response Data lt ptoff gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the point offset for the waveform always 0 WFID Return fiber ID for waveform Remote only Query Syntax WFID Response Syntax WFID lt fiberid gt Response Data lt fiberid gt lt SRD gt and specifies the fiber ID string as set by the FIBERID command WFMINT Return the interval of data points on the stored waveform to be returned by CURVE set by the last WFMINT command or power on default Remote only Query Syntax WFMINT Response Syntax WFMINT lt start gt lt end gt Response Data lt start gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the index of first point in the interval lt end gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the index of the last point in the interval TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 115 Chapter 8 Remote Control NOTE WFMPRE Return size and scale i
51. change bd Coa 20 480 214s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File 15 078 WFM posli TION M KEYBORRD REMOTE I4 ON CURRENT POWER OFF OREFEREN HELP 15 42 14 nN Figure 2 1 FiberMaster Front Panel Controls Indicators and Connectors TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors General Controls Indicators and Connectors POWER Pushing this button in turns on FiberMaster and starts the power on sequence of self tests and displays The power on sequence is described in chapter 3 Getting Started Pushing the POWER button a second time turns off power to the FiberMaster To quick start the instrument push the POWER button while holding down the START STOP button Release the START STOP button after you see the message Starting operating system on the instrument screen Quick start makes the instrument bypass the power on diagnostics causing the start up screen to appear faster Do not quick start your instrument every time it is powered on Allow the instrument to run the power on diagnostics periodically to detect any malfunctions that might have occurred HARD COPY When you push this button the current contents of the display are printed on the printer selected on Fib
52. events The fusion splice is shown as a slight nonreflective loss between events 5 and 6 Event marking is being done automatically the event marking parameter is set to Auto and the fusion splice was not marked Normal Density Averages 1024 Event Time 00 00 08 Table 9 709 km Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss E Ti A 6 Mass T T T T Storage 9 600 9 800 10 000 10 200 10 400 Event 5 Dist 9 709 km Spl Loss 1 275 dB Event Ret Loss Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 50 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change 1 024 6 9 s Dual Trace Off Module F81315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB File PW 1 WFM Figure 5 16 Unmarked Fusion Splice FiberMaster grouped events 5 and 6 together and did not mark the fusion splice because the 1000 ns pulse width did not produce enough resolution Since the fusion splice was not marked no measurements were performed at that event There are two ways to mark and measure the fusion splice One possibility is to set event marking to Manual and mark the fusion splice manually on the Place Event Markers screen Measurements are then made at the location of the new marker the event is added to the event table and the adjacent events are adjusted accordingly Normal Density Averages
53. option A5 161 0167 00 1 Power cord option 17 161 0280 01 1 A 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix A Accessories and Options Opt 20 Multimode Opt 30 Singlemode Opt 25 Multimode Opt 35 Singlemode Opt 21 Multimode Opt 31 Singlemode Opt 41 Singlemode Opt 26 Multimode Opt 36 Singlemode Opt 22 Multimode Opt 27 Multimode Opt 32 Singlemode Opt 37 Singlemode Opt 28 Multimode Opt 38 Singlemode Opt 42 Singlemode Opt 23 Multimode Opt 33 Singlemode Opt 24 Multimode Opt 29 Multimode Opt 34 Singlemode Opt 39 Singlemode Figure A 1 Connector Options TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual A 5 Appendix A Accessories and Options A 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual B Keyboard Definitions The functions of FiberMaster s controls can be duplicated using an IBM AT compatible keyboard connected to the front panel Defined key sequences are as follows Global Functions The following functions are available regardless of the instrument s current operating mode Table B 1 Global Keyboard Functions Key F1 through F6 Alt F1 Shift Prt Scr Alt and Alt Num Lock Function Performs the same function as the corresponding front panel softkey as currently labeled F1 corresponds to the top softkey F2 to the second Softkey etc Display the diagnostics menus available only from the startup screen Hard copy Help Change the keyp
54. queue is written and read on a first in first out basis and has a capacity of eight events The Event Queue can be read using the EVENT or EVMSG queries Clear the Event Queue using the CLS command The reading of the Event Queue is synchronized with the reading of the SESR The ESR query reads and clears the SESR Each time an ESR query is issued the contents of the Event Queue that were logged up to the time the query is issued are enabled for reading If the data is not read it remains in the queue until the next time the ESR query is received At that time events logged prior to the last ESR query are deleted and events logged since the last query and before the current query are enabled to be read EVENT returns only the code for the oldest enabled event in the queue and removes the event from the queue EVMSG returns the code and message for the oldest enabled event in the queue and removes the event from the queue In three cases EVENT and EVMSG do not return and remove an item from the queue but indicate the current state of the queue 1 event 0 is returned when the queue is empty 2 event 1 is returned when ESR must be sent to enable events in the queue for reading and 3 event 350 is returned when the queue has overflowed Remote Softkeys Return to Local As described previously when FiberMaster is in REMS the Return to Local softkey appears on the display In addition the remaining five softkeys can be
55. send waveform file data to reference memory and set the acquisition source to the file test wfm The first byte of actual waveform data has the hex value FE the second byte has the hex value A7 and the last byte has the hex value 2C The command PUT SET test set 0A355 C2 NL TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 121 Chapter 8 Remote Control sends setting data to current memory The first byte of actual settings data has the hex value A3 the second byte has the hex value 55 and the last byte has the hex value C2 Note that it is not necessary to use the name of the file in the filename data element from which the data was read on the controller The filename data element is supplied for documentation purposes only but must always be specified filename can be set to if not needed FILHIGH FILNORM FILSET Download a waveform file FILNORM FILHIGH or settings file FILSET that is in TFP2A mass storage format from the controller to the instrument Waveform files are loaded into current or reference memory depending on which waveform is active Settings files are loaded into current memory Hemote only Command Syntax FILNORM file data FILHIGH file data FILSET file data Command Data file data lt len gt lt count gt lt data_byte gt lt checksum gt The command data is in 488 2 Arbitrary Block Program Data format len is a single digit 0 9 that specifies the
56. the operation of the two mainframes is identical This manual is also compatible with TFP2 TFP2M instruments Refer to appendix E for a list of the firmware features that apply to earlier FiberMaster models TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Modular Plug In Laser Sources The FiberMaster was designed using a modular approach that allows you to choose options that answer your specific test and measurement applications You can easily upgrade your instrument configuration as your system requirements change FiberMaster can accommodate 850 nanometer nm multimode 1300 nm multimode 1310 nm singlemode and 1550 nm singlemode laser sources in one or two plug in modules The modules can contain either two singlemode or two multimode lasers or any single laser allowing the instrument to be configured with from one to all four wavelengths Temperature controlled laser light sources ensure stable wavelength and optical output for highly accurate measurements Accurate High Speed Data Acquisition and Measurement The internal 32 bit microprocessor performs to 16 million high speed averages per acquisition maximizing the signal to noise ratio giving a clear display of fiber events FiberMaster measures a specific fiber feature with single keystroke convenience In addition manual adjustments provide extended flexibility in interpreting the fiber data An expand function allow
57. the two waveforms vertically press and hold the WFM SELECT button The inactive waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB When dual trace is off and the view is in overview pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button zeros the waveform s position it is moved so that 0 dB is at the bottom of the vertical scale and 0 kilometers or kilofeet is at the left of the horizontal scale STORE Store the current waveform into reference memory Any previous contents of reference button memory are erased MODULE Select the next available laser source Changing the laser source requires a new SELECT acquisition When you press the MODULE SELECT button a message displays instructing button you to press START STOP to acquire new data using the new laser In addition any waveform parameters that change when you change laser sources are highlighted indicating that these parameters no longer match the displayed waveform data The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired START STOP Start a new acquisition Any manually adjusted measurements are retained until you button press the Event Return Loss softkey to restart measurements If an acquisition is currently in progress pressing the START STOP button stops it Holding the START STOP button down for two seconds starts a real time acquisition During a real time acquisition the return loss modes are not available and the instru
58. you change from a long to a short pulse width the range of the new acquisition may not extend from the start of the current range to the location of the active distance cursor In this case the new acquisition is centered around the active distance cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 11 Chapter 3 Getting Started Maximum Range NOTE To display the Maximum Range pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the maximum range parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Settings Settings Settings Defaults Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection Maximum Range Remote Pulse Width 10 ns 1 m HR 20 ns 2 m HR 50 ns 5 m HR 10 0 km 50 ns 5 m 100 ns 10 200 ns 20 m 40 30 20 1000 ns 100 m 2000 ns 200 m 4000 ns 400 m 10000 ns 1 0 km 10 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU76 WEM Figure 3 4 Maximum Range Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Maximum Range selection window to specify the maximum distance over which data may be acquired The maximum rang
59. 1 7 Chapter 1 Introduction The Acquisition Screen Vertical scale dB Inactive distance cursor Waveform settings The acquisition screen displays fiber test data and measurement information and is used for all fiber evaluation activity Other than instrument setup event marking and mass storage operations most of your work with FiberMaster will be on the acquisition screen The acquisition screen displays either data acquisition in progress or a completed acquisition including all measurements on the fiber under test Distance and loss cursors display on this screen depending on the measurement mode and can be manipulated to perform manual measurements on the fiber The acquisition screen includes horizontal distance scale and a vertical loss scale One or two distance cursors and one or two loss cursors depending on the measurement mode Expansion Active window distance cursor Normal Density Time 00 00 31 dB 0 081 km Two 40 Point 30 Splice Loss 20 Return Loss Mass i Storage i b T alc Two Point Kvent Marking Auto oefficient 80 3 askinq Off race Off Mitdule F51315 1310SM Change Settings Max Avgs 20 480 21M Ref Index 1 4680 Ecent Threshold 0 30 dB Solrce Acquisition Loss Horizontal scale Softkey labels cursors kilometers or kilofeet Figure 1 2 Features on the Acquis
60. 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE depends on the laser source selected 2 meters for 850 nm MM 50 meters for 1300 nm MM and 200 meters for the singlemode lasers For the FM and FS series optical modules the 1300 MM 1310 SM and 1550 SM modules have three high resolution pulse widths available They are 10 ns 20 ns and 50 ns pulse widths denoted as high resolution on the menu by HR These pulse widths offer increased distance measurement accuracy at short ranges Change the pulse width by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The selection of a new pulse width requires a new acquisition in order to take effect When you press the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkey to exit the Pulse Width parameter the pulse width setting at the bottom of the screen is highlighted to indicate that the current setting does not match acquisition data When you exit the menu system the following message displays Press START STOP to acquire new data Press START STOP to start an acquisition using the new pulse width The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired because the pulse width setting now corresponds to the displayed waveform data You can press START STOP to start a new acquisition without exiting the menu system You may notice that the acquisition range shifts when you change pulse widths If
61. 2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 1000 4 3 RF Radiated IEC 1000 4 4 Fast Transients IEC 1000 4 5 Surge IEC 1000 4 11 Dropout 1 26 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FS1300 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 10 FS1300 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 10 us 1000 m 29 5 38 0 1080 1050 4000 ns 400 m 27 5 38 0 480 420 2000 ns 200 m 23 5 38 0 240 220 1000 ns 100 m 22 0 38 0 140 110 500 ns 50 m 20 5 38 0 70 55 200 ns 20 m 18 5 38 0 40 25 100 ns 10 m 17 0 38 0 25 12 50 ns 5 m 15 5 38 0 20 7 50 ns 5 m HR 12 0 34 0 15 7 20 ns 2 m HR 10 5 34 0 NA 5 10 ns 1 m HR 9 0 34 0 NA 3 Operating wavelength 1310 nm 20 nm Masking menu selectable Auto QuickMask Auto AccuMask Manual QuickMask LJ Manual AccuMask Full screen display range 50 m to 200 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs lt 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start
62. 32 3 33 Remote 3 59 3 60 System Settings 3 34 3 55 User Defaults 3 56 Waveform Settings 3 9 3 29 MESSAGE 8 147 MODINFO 8 86 MODLOWER 8 88 MODSELECT 8 83 MODSELECT 8 87 module parameter 1 11 2 4 MODULE SELECT button 2 4 in Event Return Loss mode 4 43 in Link Return Loss mode 4 34 in Preview mode 4 6 in Splice Loss mode 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 15 MODUPPER 8 89 MSFORMAT 8 135 MSFORMAT 8 140 N NCHARBITS 8 91 NCHARBITS 8 92 NLTRANS 8 93 noise 3 14 5 25 notes 7 10 NR_PT 8 118 NSTOPBITS 8 91 NSTOPBITS 8 92 NUMMARKERS 8 112 O OPC 8 156 OPC 8 156 OPERATOR 8 77 operator 3 32 7 10 Operator Settings menu 2 2 3 32 3 33 OPERATOR 8 80 optical fiber cleaning 1 39 1 40 connecting to FiberMaster 3 1 optical modules FG1300 1 30 FG1315 1 31 FL1300 1 32 FL1315 1 34 FL1500 1 33 FM1300 1 36 FM8500 1 35 FS1300 1 27 FS1315 1 29 FS1500 1 28 installation 1 15 1 17 specifications 1 27 1 31 option accessories 3 options 3 4 System 2 System multimode 2 System singlemode 3 P PARITY 8 91 PARITY 8 92 Place Event Markers screen 3 24 3 25 5 4 5 14 5 17 B 4 Place Manual Masks screen 6 15 6 20 B 4 Place Markers softkey 3 25 5 15 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index 5 Place Masks softkey 3 27 6 16 plotter 2 2 3 47 3 48 POSITION knob horizontal 2 10 in Event Return Loss mode 4 43 in Link Return Loss mode 4 34 in Preview
63. 5 Save Menu Single Drive Instrument eere ee 7 9 Figure 7 6 Format Menu Single Drive Instrument 2s 7 13 Figure 7 7 Format Menu Dual Drive Instrument ecce 7 14 Figure 7 8 Delete Menu Single Drive Instrument 7 15 Figure 7 9 Delete Menu Dual Drive Instrument eere 7 16 Figure 7 10 Copy Menu Dual Drive 7 17 Figure 8 1 Standard and Linear Bus Configurations 8 1 Figure 8 2 Sample GPIB IEEE 488 System sees eere 8 2 Figure 8 3 GPIB Status Reporting and Error Handling 8 13 Figure 8 4 RS 232 Direct Connection and Connection over Telephone Line ee eeerr eee eee ee nennen niin nana nnne nnn 8 27 Figure 8 5 RS 232 Status Reporting and Error Handling 8 39 Figure A 1 Connector Options eeessie esses eee en nnn nn nhanh nana ann A 4 Figure D 1 Run Diagnostics Menu eese D 1 Figure D 2 Set Options D 2 Figure E 1 Firmware Version Number on the Start Up Screen E 1 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual xiii List of Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Tabl
64. 5 Secure the second module to the back panel assembly by tightening the two quick release screws into the module s screwholes 1 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 6 If you are installing two modules snap the spacer between the modules as shown in figure 1 6 into the holes provided 7 Place the modules inside the mainframe lining up the fiber connectors with the openings in the front panel and reconnecting the control and module support boards to the interconnect board NOTE Align the connectors on the interconnect board correctly to ensure complete connections with the module support board optical module s and control board If connections are not made properly the instrument will not work 8 Reattach the back panel assembly to the mainframe by tightening the four black quick release screws All the screws in the back panel assembly can be tightened further using a screwdriver if necessary To take the modules out of the TFP2A mainframe reverse this procedure Figure 1 6 Installing the Module Spacer Two Module Configuration TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 17 Chapter 1 Introduction Front Panel Covers If your instrument includes one optical module the top module slot on the front panel is unused If your instrument is not configured with a floppy disk drive the drive slot is unused Unused option slots are covered before the instrument is ship
65. 5 1 5 11 MARKERDIST 8 112 masking type 3 27 3 29 6 15 with high density data 6 10 masking manual 3 27 3 29 6 15 6 20 MASKOPTION 8 88 MASKSET 8 82 MASKSET 8 85 mass storage 3 3 7 1 7 18 batch copy 7 18 Copy menu 7 17 7 18 Copy softkey 7 17 date 7 10 Delete menu 7 15 7 16 Delete softkey 7 16 drive type 7 8 fiber ID 7 10 file name 7 9 file specifications 7 7 7 10 file types 7 2 Format Fixed softkey 7 14 Format menu 7 13 7 14 Format Removable softkey 7 14 Format softkey 7 13 Load from Disk menu 7 3 7 6 Load softkey 7 4 media capacity 7 2 Index 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual notes 7 10 7 10 Quick Copy softkey 7 18 Quick Load 7 5 Quick Save 7 11 Save softkey 7 11 Save to Disk menu 7 7 7 12 Start Batch copy softkey 7 18 Stop Batch Copy softkey 7 18 Switch Drives softkey 7 4 7 8 7 16 7 17 time 7 10 Mass Storage softkey 7 1 in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 in Two Point mode 4 12 maximum averages 3 14 5 24 maximum range 3 12 3 13 MEASMODE 8 101 MEASMODE 8 104 MEASURE 8 104 measurement modes 1 6 4 1 4 45 measurements 4 1 4 45 high density data 6 9 in dual trace mode 6 11 in Event Return Loss mode 4 38 4 45 in Link Return Loss mode 4 29 4 37 in Preview mode 4 3 4 8 in Splice Loss mode 4 22 4 28 in Two Point mode 4 9 4 21 menu system 3 1 3 7 3 60 Operator Settings 3
66. 725 km away 4 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Two Point Mode Enter Two Point mode by pressing the Two Point softkey on the acquisition screen The softkey is highlighted to show the current measurement mode Use Two Point mode to make measurements between two points on a fiber including end to end distance and loss and fiber loss measurements NOTE If return loss is on the Two Point softkey is replaced by the Link Return Loss softkey In this case you must first press the Exit Return Loss softkey to turn off return loss and redisplay the Two Point softkey Automatic Two Point Measurements Two distance cursors and two loss cursors define two point measurements When you enter Two Point mode the distance cursors are in the same locations as they were in the previous measurement mode You can then move the distance cursors to make additional two point measurements at other locations along the waveform New automatic two point measurements are made at each new position of the active distance cursor if you have not made any manual adjustments Active Inactive Two point distance Two point Slope distance loss cursor distance loss km cursor Normal Density Lo s 1230dB Am Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m A Maximum Range 10 0 km i f inc Change Max Avgs 20 480 21 4 s j Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Expansion L wi
67. 8 167 Chapter 8 Remote Control Internal Errors Internal error codes are in the ranges from 300 to 399 and 3000 to 3999 and set bit DDE in the Standard Event Status Register 310 System error memory allocation failure 310 System error operating system error These errors indicate a firmware failure within FiberMaster s multitasking system 3200 Display hardware failure A 34010 display processor error has been detected by the 68020 CPU 3901 Power on selftest failure The instrument has failed at least one power up diagnostic The event message will contain additional information on which component has failed 3902 Power on selftest failure result buffer overflow The instrument has failed enough power on diagnostics to overflow the buffer holding test result descriptions The event message will contain information on which components have failed although some results will be lost Diagnostics should be run under local control to determine the cause of the failure System Events System event codes are in the ranges from 400 to 499 and 4000 to 4999 and set bits PON OPC URQ and QYE in the Standard Event Status Register 401 Power on The instrument has been powered on 402 Operation complete The instrument has received and executed the DPC command 410 488 2 query INTERRUPTED error 420 488 2 query UNTERMINATED error 430 488 2 query DEADLOCKED error The controller has violated 488 2 pr
68. 92 CALCSLOPE 8 75 CALCSLOPE 8 79 CFF common file format 3 45 7 7 Change Settings softkey 3 1 3 8 3 9 in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 in Two Point mode 4 12 cleaning procedures 1 38 1 41 CLS 8 153 color on the acquisition screen 1 10 setting the display color 3 38 commands and queries remote control 8 62 8 157 common file format 3 45 7 7 connector options 4 connector front panel cleaning 1 39 1 40 connectors back panel 2 12 controls 2 1 2 12 Copy menu 7 17 7 18 Copy softkey 7 17 COPYFILE 8 133 copying a 7 17 7 18 COPYSET 8 133 COPYWFM 68 133 current memory 1 3 2 10 C 2 CURSOR 8 97 CURSOR knob 2 6 in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in expanded view 6 5 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 12 CURSOR SELECT button 2 7 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in expanded view 6 6 in Link Return Loss mode 4 33 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 13 CURSOR 8 97 cursors distance 1 22 2 5 2 6 4 3 4 9 4 11 4 22 4 30 4 31 4 39 6 3 joining 4 5 4 13 4 25 4 33 4 42 loss 1 21 2 6 4 9 4 11 4 22 4 30 4 31 4 39 CURVE 8 117 D data format 1 2 data point spacing 3 13 DATE 8 76 date 3 41 7 10 date format 3 42 DATE 8 79 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index 1 DC power 1 15 1 24 2 12 dea
69. ALPHA D WFM Send a waveform plot to an external serial plotter TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 157 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Programming Example A hypothetical controller language is used in the following RS 232 programming example It includes the following statements SEND program message Send program message enclosed in quotes plus a program message terminator NL to FiberMaster RECEIVE response Read response message from device at bus address addr The text of the response is placed in the variable response excluding the response message terminator lt NL gt The example is as follows SEND HEADER OFF Disable response headers SEND AVERAGE 1024 REFINDEX 1 4560 FIBERID ALPHA D Set number of averages and refractive index for the fiber to be tested and store fiber ID SEND MODSELECT UPPER MM850 Select 850 nm multimode laser from module in upper front panel slot SEND PULSELIST 20 0 Determine pulse widths available when a maximum range of 20 0 km is used with the currently selected module RECEIVE response Sample response 1 0 3 0 8 0 20 0 50 0 Response data elements are available pulse widths in nanoseconds SEND PULSRNG 8 20 Set pulse width to 8 ns and maximum range to 20 km SEND DENSITYLIST Request available sampling densities for currently selected module and with the current pulse width and maximum range settings 8 158 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter
70. AccuMask Auto QuickMask Manual AccuMask Manual QuickMask Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection 30 Prev Param 20 pong Pulse Width 500 ns 50 Range 10 0 km Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 30 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Module F51315 13105M File LSJLI78 WFM Exit Use the Masking Type window to specify whether the reflections detected along a fiber under test are automatically masked The factory default masking type setting is Off You can use the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter to choose a different power on default Figure 3 12 Masking Type Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu With Auto masking the system calculates mask locations automatically The Manual masking setting allows you to set and adjust masks using the Manual Masking screen When one of the manual settings is selected an additional softkey displays on the Waveform Settings menu Place Masks This softkey allows you direct access to the 7Place Manual Masks screen In manual masking mode any existing masks remain unchanged from acquisition to acquisition unless adjusted or removed manually including any automatically calculated masks from a previous Auto setting Refer to chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions for instructions on how t
71. Although the event threshold can be set to 03 dB for pulse widths 200 meters or longer the minimum threshold used is actually 05 or 07 dB The new setting is saved when you exit the Event Threshold window by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys All events with splice losses that meet or exceed the new threshold are displayed including both automatically and manually marked events If the new threshold is lower than the previous setting additional event markers may be displayed on the acquisition screen and on the event table If the new threshold is higher than the previous setting event markers may be deleted from the acquisition screen and the event table when the new setting takes effect In these cases the displayed events are also renumbered All marked events are displayed on the Place Event Markers screen regardless of the event threshold setting The Place Event Markers screen is accessible from the Event Marking parameter window when event marking is set to Manual In addition all manually placed event markers are displayed regardless of the event threshold setting both on the acquisition screen and in the event table For information on using event marking and the Place Event Markers screen refer to chapter 5 Event Marking 3 24 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Event Marking To display the Event Marking pop up window from the acquisition screen p
72. D E F F E Figure 8 1 Standard and Linear Bus Configurations TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 1 Chapter 8 Remote Control A typical system see figure 8 2 could include a controller a talker such as a counter or digital multimeter and a listener such as a plotter or signal generator More than one function can be combined in a single instrument For example FiberMaster has both a listener talker function and a talker only function Other FiberMaster Controller OTDR Plotter Talk and Listen Talk Listen Listen and Control Devices DIO1 DIO2 DIO3 DIO4 DIO5 0106 0107 DIO8 Data Byte DAV Data Handshake Control NRFD L NDAC IFC ATN General Interface Management REN EOI Figure 8 2 Sample GPIB IEEE 488 System GPIB Signal Lines The GPIB contains three groups of signal lines data handshake and control Eight lines DIO1 through DIO8 are used to carry data message bytes on the bus The asynchronous three wire handshake is controlled by these lines DAV Data Valid asserted by the transmitting device NRFD Not Ready For Data asserted by the receiving device NDAC Not Data Accepted asserted by the receiving device Five interface lines are used for the control functions ATN Attention specifies how data on the DIO lines is to be interpreted as interface messages when ATN is ass
73. DNPD gt and specifies the index of the last point in the interval If the waveform contains 10 000 total points the command WFMINT 1000 2500 causes the CURVE query to return waveform points 1000 through 2500 inclusive rather than the default of points 0 through 9999 Specifying 1 for both parameters WFMINT 1 1 resets the CURVE query interval to the entire waveform The WFMPRE and NR PT queries return the total number of points in the waveform The WFMINT query returns the current WFMINT interval selection The ACQUIRE REALTIME and RST commands cause the waveform interval to be reset to the entire waveform An execution error is generated if no waveform data is currently stored or if the interval specified does not lie entirely within O through the last point on the waveform If a WFMINT command is not issued the CURVE query returns the entire waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 113 Chapter 8 Remote Control CURVE Return data for the active waveform See WFMPRE query ACQUIRE and REALTIME commands Remote only Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Discussion Example s CURVE CURVE curve data curve data can be encoded in ASCII or binary depending on ENCDG command selection default binary ASCII encoding lt point gt lt point gt where lt point gt lt NR1 gt Points are given in order of increasing x value A single point of 0 is
74. Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion MSFORMAT FETCHOPER filename filename SPD and specifies the waveform file from which to read the operator string If no extension is specified in filename a WFM extension is assumed FETCHOPER operator operator lt SRD gt Use the OPERATOR command to specify operator string for the fiber under test Return the data format used for waveform files returned by the FILE and GET_WFM queries Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data TYPEFILE MSFORMAT MSFORMAT lt msformat gt lt msformat gt lt CRD gt and specifies the file format TFP2 TFP2 native format CFF Common file format Determine if a mass storage file is a waveform or settings file Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Example s Discussion TYPEFILE lt file gt lt file gt SPD and specifies the name of the file TYPEFILE lt type gt type lt NR1 gt and specifies the file type 1 settings file 2 waveform file 0 neither waveform or settings file The following query is sent to determine which type file unknown xyz is TYPEFILE unknown xyz The response indicates a waveform file TYPEFILE 2 If the currently selected mass storage device is unreadable for any reason 0 is returned TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 137 Chapter 8 Remote Control Hardcopy Commands and
75. Declaration of Conformity Tektronix Holland N V Marktweg 73A 8444 AB Heerenveen The Netherlands declare under sole responsibility that the TFP2A FiberMaster meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demon strated to the following specifications as listed in the official Journal of the European Communities EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 55022 Radiated Class B IEC 1000 3 2 Mains Current Harmonics EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 1000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 1000 4 3 RF Radiated IEC 1000 4 4 Fast Transients IEC 1000 4 5 Surge IEC 1000 4 11 Dropout Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC Complies with EMC provision of Radiocommunications per the following standard s AN NZS 2064 1 2 Industrial Scientific and Medical Equipment 1992 2 FiberMaster User Manual Table of Contents Salely p xvii 1 Introduction the FiberMaster OTDRH 1 1 Product Description eese eee reir rennen enn nnn nnn uana aan nh 1 1 General Waveform Analysis cerne esee seien nean nn nna nn nana 1 4 Overview of FiberMaster 1 6 The Acquisition Screen sessi sse 1 8 About this Manual eerie eiie eene tnr ne
76. Event Queue A second type of initialization is performed by the RS 232 BREAK signal Sending a BREAK signal forces the instrument s message handler into an idle state ready to receive and execute program messages but does not affect any device operation in progress A BREAK signal causes the instrument to 1 Clear the Input Buffer and the Output Queue 8 46 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Abort any query response currently being sent Assert CTS Assert DSR 9v i OO If XON XOFF flow control is in effect and FiberMaster has sent a prior XOFF character to the controller indicating it is not ready to receive data FiberMaster sends an XON character to the controller to indicate it is now ready to receive A BREAK signal does not 1 Change instrument settings or stored waveform data 2 Affect instrument front panel operation or change the remote local state 3 Affect status or status enable registers 4 Cause FiberMaster to assume the controller is ready to receive data If transmission to the controller has been suspended because the controller used flow control to stop transmission prior to the BREAK the controller must use flow control to indicate it is again ready to receive data For XON XOFF flow control the controller must send an XON character For RTS CTS flow control the controller must assert RTS For DTR DSR flow control the controller must assert DTR Reset The
77. Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 34 RS232 Data Bits Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the RS232 Data Bits window to specify the number of data bits used per character during serial plotter and serial printer hardcopy During XModem data transfers data bits per character is temporarily set to 8 automatically regardless of the menu setting The number of data bits does not include the parity bit The factory default data bits setting is 8 You can specify a different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Select 7 or 8 bits per character by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The selected setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys 3 54 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started RS232 Flow Control To display the RS232 Flow Control pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the flow control parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Remote Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English
78. GET_SET 0 lt data gt lt NL gt 0 is the header for the IEEE 488 2 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data element It indicates that all data up to but not including the lt NL gt is waveform or settings file data 0 and lt NL gt newline character are not parts of the data and should not be stored in the destination file by the controller There is no white space between 0 and lt data gt and between lt data gt and lt NL gt newline character Each eight bit byte of waveform data in lt data gt is encoded as two hexadecimal digits For example the data sent to FiberMaster when an actual waveform data byte has value 2E hex is the digit 2 82 hex followed by the digit E 45 hex The most significant digit 32 hex is sent first The FILE query ASCII or binary encoding can also be used to upload a waveform or settings file from the TFP2A The difference between the FILE query and the GET_WFM and GET SET queries is that the FILE query response has a header containing a byte count and also transmits a checksum to be used for detecting transmission errors TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 127 Chapter 8 Remote Control Example s The following sequence of messages WFMSEL CUR GET WFM returns the response GET WFM 0FEA7 2C lt NL gt The first byte of actual waveform data has the hex value FE the second byte has the hex value A7 and the last byte has the hex value 2C 8 128 TF
79. If you select a GPIB device as the hardcopy device GPIB status is temporarily set to talk only when the HARD COPY button is pressed When the plotter or printer finishes the hard copy the setting reverts to its original value online or offline 3 48 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started GPIB Status To display the GPIB Status pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the GPIB status parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator Settings Settings SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 18 33 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF User Defaults Figure 3 29 GPIB Status Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the GPIB status setting to place the instrument online or offline When the instrument is online it accepts commands and generates data in response to a GPIB controller When the instrument is offline it does not accept commands on the bus but can be used to drive a GPIB plotter or printer in talk only mode The default GPIB status setting is Online
80. Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 26 23 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control Figure 3 35 RS232 Flow Control Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the RS232 Flow Control window to set the type of flow control used during serial plotter and serial printer hardcopy Flow control is used to prevent data loss if the receiving device cannot accept data as fast as it is sent The factory default flow control setting is XON XOFF You can specify a different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Select the flow control by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The flow control setting is saved when you exit the parameter by pressing Next Menu Next Param Prev Param or Exit It takes effect with the next data transfer and does not affect any print operation or XModem transfer in progress TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 55 Chapter 3 Getting Started Setting User Defaults The User Defaults menu is the fourth configuration menu available on FiberMaster Go to this menu from the acquisition screen by pressing the Change Settings
81. Loss Return Loss 16 Mass Storage T T 0 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc LSA Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 214s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 1310SM Settings Ref Index 1 4680 6 326 Figure 4 12 Automatic Fiber Loss Measurement Placing the Second Cursor 5 You can make adjustments to the automatic measurement if necessary by using the vertical and slope Loss knobs to adjust the LSA cursor The vertical LOSS knob moves the cursor up and down and the slope Loss knob rotates the cursor around the active distance cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 21 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Splice Loss Mode NOTE Enter Splice Loss mode by pressing the Splice Loss softkey on the acquisition screen The softkey is highlighted to show the current measurement mode Use Splice Loss mode to measure loss caused by a particular fiber feature for example a connector or splice If return loss is on the Splice Loss softkey is replaced by the Event Return Loss softkey In this case you must first press the Return Loss softkey to turn off return loss and redisplay the Splice Loss softkey Automatic Splice Loss Measurements In Splice Loss mode there is only one distance cursor There are two loss cursors matched to the waveform on either side of th
82. Lt ode aua debetis aui eet 5 1 OVOFVIOW hide eS E Ses ES os ah Se 5 2 Turning on Event Marking 5 5 The Event Table 44 ere ele erue ed Ire dana ou erae n 5 7 Reverting to Automatic 5 10 Printing the Event 5 10 Event Nole n 5 11 Entering and Editing Event 5 12 Manual Event Marking eee eeee erinnere nien nnne ni innu n natn nhanh natn nhanh 5 14 Entering the Place Event Markers Screen 5 15 Placing Event Markers 5 15 EXaImple8 t ero EROR HH Billet m 5 17 Automatic Measurements with Manually Placed Markers 5 17 Storing and Retrieving Event Markers 5 18 Operational Details of Automatic Event Marking 5 19 Event Marking 5 23 vi TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Table of Contents 6 Advanced Operating Functions eese 6 1 The Expansion 6 2 Vertical SIZE Knobz iet nm e e al e e B Hem ets 6 3 Horizontal
83. Manual 1 19 Chapter 1 Introduction Laser Output WARNING FiberMaster is equipped with low energy lasers and does not output continuous energy unless you have started data acquisition by pressing the START STOP button The TFP2A FiberMaster has been classified as a Class 1 laser product under the Radiation Control and Health Safety Act of 1968 Although output from a Class 1 laser is not considered hazardous it is good practice not to allow eye exposure from direct or reflected laser light This can be avoided by covering the end of the fiber or directing the output at a non reflective surface It is important to set up and operate the instrument as instructed in this manual Use of controls or adjustments for performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Repacking for Shipment When packing an instrument for shipping to a Tektronix Service Center for service or repair attach a tag showing the name and address of the owner name of the individual at your firm to contact complete serial number and a description of the service required If the original packaging is not available repackage the instrument as follows 1 Install the front cover on the OTDR 2 Position the handle over the front cover and wrap the instrument in polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish 3 Cushion the instrument on all sides with packing material or urethane foam between the carton
84. Queries GPLTSCREEN Sends printer or plotter commands to draw a representation of the acquisition screen to a GPIB printer or plotter Remote only RS 232 only Command Syntax Discussion GPLTTEXT GPLTSCREEN The HCTYPE command specifies the format of the data sent to the GPIB port HPGL plotters only the display is scaled to A size 8 5 by 11 inches on the plotter The printer or plotter connected to FiberMaster s GPIB port must be configured for listen only mode Sends printer or plotter commands to draw a text string on a GPIB printer or plotter Remote only RS 232 only Command Syntax Command Data Discussion GPLTTEXT lt test gt lt x gt lt y gt text SPD specifying the text string to print or plot 80 character maximum The escape characters n and r can be used in lt text gt to send a newline character or a carriage return to the printer or plotter The escape character f can be used in lt text gt to send a formfeed character to a printer HPGL plotter x and y lt DPND gt specifying in plotter coordinates the desired location of the text string The text string is left justified at this location The x and y coordinates are relative to the minimum x and y hard clip limits of the plotter ThinkJet printer lt x gt and lt y gt are required arguments but their values are ignored The text string is printed at the current paper position The HCTYPE command sp
85. Query Syntax DATE Response Syntax DATE lt date gt Response Data date SRD and specifies the current date setting of the instruments real time clock in the form YYYY MM DD where YYYY year MM month DD day TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 77 Chapter 8 Remote Control FIBERID Return the fiber ID for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data FIBERNOTE FIBERID FIBERID lt idstring gt lt idstring gt lt SRD gt and specifies the fiber ID string up to 20 characters Return the fiber notes for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data OPERATOR FIBERNOTE FIBERNOTE lt fibernote gt lt fibernote gt lt SRD gt and consists of a quoted string up to 150 characters long Return the operator name for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data REFINDEX OPERATOR OPERATOR lt operator gt lt operator gt lt SRD gt and specifies the name of the instrument operator up to 25 characters Return the refractive index for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data SCATTERCOEFF REFINDEX REFINDEX lt index gt index lt NR2 gt and specifies the refractive index of the fiber under test Return the scattering coefficient for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data SCATTERCOEFF SCATTERCOEFF lt coeff gt
86. REALTIME lt distance gt lt distspec gt Command Data distance lt DNPD gt and specifies either the starting distance or centering distance for the acquisition as determined by the lt distspec gt parameter lt distspec gt CPD and specifies whether the distance supplied by the lt distance gt parameter will be used as a starting distance or centering distance for the acquisition Values for lt distspec gt are START and CENTER START causes the acquisition to start at the point specified by the lt distance gt parameter CENTER causes it to be centered around that point Example s REA 10 0 START Discussion Places the instrument in a mode in which data is acquired and new acquisitions are displayed continually with minimal averaging Useful for adjusting fiber connections and making splices Only commands and queries that do not affect the current acquisition and do not start other operations are allowed in real time mode The only measurement query allowed in real time mode is TWOPOINT Exit real time acquisition mode by issuing the STOP command The commands and queries that are allowed when the instrument is under remote control and in real time acquisition mode are listed below Any other command or query will generate one of the following two errors 2003 Instrument state error command not accepted in real time mode 2004 Instrument state error query not accepted in real time mode CLS BAUD
87. RST command resets all instrument settings except RS 232 settings to factory defaults and clears any acquired waveforms from data memory and instrument display refer to the description of the RST command in the following section If the RST command is preceded by a BREAK signal it also aborts any current device operation started by the execution of a command or query with the exception of mass storage operations which are allowed to complete Clear Status Registers The CLS command clears the SESR and the Event Queue TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 47 Chapter 8 Remote Control Similarities and Differences between GPIB and RS 232 Remote Control Aside from the differences necessitated by the different physical interfaces GPIB and RS 232 operate much the same at the command and query level Under both forms of remote control the controller sends commands to select options change settings values and start device operations The controller also sends queries to the instrument to obtain settings waveform and settings files and other information With some minor exceptions the command language command and query argument types and the effect of commands or queries issuable through either interface are the same Under both interfaces the controller must initiate control of FiberMaster by sending appropriate commands to put the instrument into remote state FiberMaster itself does not act as a controller under either physical
88. STOP START button starts a high density acquisition Pushing and holding the START STOP button for two seconds starts a real time acquisition In real time the maximum averages parameter is ignored and waveforms are acquired and displayed as rapidly as possible To stop a real time acquisition press the START STOP button again In real time the instrument automatically enters Two Point mode Refer to chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions for more information on high density and real time acquisitions TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 2 5 Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors Cursor Controls m CURSOR CURSOR SELECT CURSOR Turn the CURSOR knob to move the active distance cursor along the displayed waveform to any point where you want a measurement One distance cursor is displayed in Splice Loss and Event Return Loss modes and two in Preview Two Point and Link Return Loss modes The distance from FiberMaster s front panel is shown at the top of each cursor When two distance cursors are displayed the CURSOR SELECT button allows you to choose which one is active In the menu system use the CURSOR knob to select parameter values and to enter alphanumeric characters Vertical LOSS This knob the left hand Loss knob is active in Two Point Splice Loss Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss modes and allows you to adjust loss measurements manually Turning the vertical Loss knob moves
89. Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto IMaximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Module F51315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 E File LSJU78 WFM Figure 3 9 Dual Trace Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Dual Trace window to turn dual trace mode on and off When dual trace is on both the current waveform and the reference waveform are displayed at the same time The active waveform is displayed at a brighter intensity than the inactive waveform When dual trace is off the active waveform selected using the WFM SELECT button on the front panel is the only trace displayed The default dual trace setting is off Turn dual trace on or off by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new display mode takes effect when you exit the dual trace parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys Using dual trace mode is discussed in more detail in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions 3 22 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Event Threshold To display the Event Threshold pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the event threshold parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User
90. The mask is removed and the distance cursors advance to the next mask If you remove the last mask the distance cursors remain at their current positions and the mask between them is blanked appearing as an outlined rectangle The blank mask is not enabled TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 19 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Implementing Manual Masks Any manual changes to masks require a new acquisition to see the effects of the changes You can start a new acquisition while on the Place Manual Masks screen by pressing the START STOP button When working with high density data on the Place Manual Masks screen you can reacquire high density data without affecting the corresponding normal density data If you change the masking type or adjust manual masks for high density data when you return to overview the Masking Type parameter is highlighted to indicate that current masking parameters do not match the overview waveform data A prompt appears informing you to press START STOP to reacquire normal density data using the new masking parameters When you reacquire normal density data the high density data is discarded For more information on changing parameters for high density data refer to the section in this chapter High Density Data Acquisition Clearing and Replacing Manual Masks You can clear the Place Manual Masks screen simply by removing each mask manually Otherwise all masks are cleared when the masking
91. Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 10 33 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 24 Date Format Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Date Format window to select the system date format The choices are the U S month day year format M D Y or the non U S day month year format D M Y The factory default setting is M D Y You can set D M Y as the power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter To select the date format turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have the optional keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new date format setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys 3 42 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Units To display the Units pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the units parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM
92. a valid query but the query causes a command execution or device dependent error the response contains the single lt Character Response Data gt element NULL 8 58 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control to indicate that the requested response could not be generated For example the query AVETIME 0 0 returns the response AVETIME NULL since the AVETIME query expects a lt CPD gt argument NORMAL or HD1 Note that if response headers were not enabled the response would be only NULL If a query is received that is not in FiberMaster s command set no response at all is generated In this case the controller may time out waiting for a response In either case above the controller should issue status queries to determine the cause of the error TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 59 Chapter 8 Remote Control Commands and Queries The remote control commands and queries defined for FiberMaster are listed in this section The following tables list the commands and queries according to function The page numbers in the tables indicate the page on which each command description can be found Any commands or queries that change instrument settings affect data memory or start device operations are not executable when the instrument is under front panel control LOCS or LWLS and are identified as remote only If one is received while the instrument is under local control an error message is
93. and lt distance2 gt need not specify locations of actual data points on the waveform The measurement is made using the waveform point closest to lt distance1 gt and the waveform point closest to lt distance2 gt lt dist1 gt and lt dist2 gt in the query response give the actual locations of the two points used Response Syntax LINKRTNLOSS lt dist1 gt lt dist2 gt lt loss gt Response Data lt dist1 gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the distance to the starting waveform point from the instrument s front panel dist2 lt NR2 gt and specifies the distance to the ending waveform point from the front panel loss lt NR2 gt and specifies the return loss at dist lt height gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the link return loss between lt dist1 gt and lt dist2 gt in dB Discussion If the distance given lies within the bounds of the active waveform the instrument enters Link Return Loss mode unless already in that mode The cursors are placed at dist and lt dist2 gt Event 2260 is generated if the loss value reported in the query response is not accurate due to clipping of the waveform 8 100 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control MEASMODE Return the current measurement mode Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data MEASURE MEASMODE MEASMODE mode mode lt CRD gt and specifies the instruments current measurement mode Possibl
94. and the CURSOR knob If you are using a keyboard refer to appendix B Keyboard Definitions for a list of key sequences that duplicate front panel controls The keyboard also offers more editing functions than those available via front panel controls The softkeys function as follows Event Notes save the current note and return to the previous Event Notes screen Next Event save the current note and highlight the next event If a note has already been entered for the next event this note appears in the Event Notes window for editing Prev Event save the current note and highlight the previous event If a note has already been entered for the previous event this note appears in the Event Notes window for editing 5 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Next Char used for character entry as described below Delete Char used to correct characters as described below Exit save the current note and return to the acquisition screen Enter notes for each event using softkeys and the CURSOR knob as follows 1 When you select the note to enter or edit the cursor is on the next available character position To enter a character turn the CURSOR knob until the desired character is highlighted in the character set shown The letter under the cursor in the Event Notes window changes to correspond with the highlighted letter in the character set 2 Press the Next Char softkey to accept the select
95. and the sides of the instrument 4 Sealthe carton using shipping tape No special handling is required to prepare the floppy disk drive for shipping A shipping carton and packing material can be obtained through your local Tektronix field office or representative if necessary If you have any questions contact your local Tektronix field office or representative or in the U S and Canada call toll free 1 800 TEK WIDE ext 2400 G 1 20 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Specifications Electrical Characteristics The following characteristics and features apply to the FiberMaster OTDR after a warmup period of at least 20 minutes All loss numbers reflect one way measurements unless otherwise specified Table 1 1 Display Range Vertical System Vertical range 1 dB to 50 dB overview 1 dB to 100 dB expanded view Loss measurements Loss readout resolution 0 001 dB to 0 01 dB Accuracy Two point splice loss and LSA fiber loss FM FS FG series 0 05 dB dB from 7 dB above the RMS noise floor SNR 1 to 30 dB on the screen Maximum error of 0 2 dB from 7 dB above the RMS noise floor to top of backscatter FL series 0 02 dB dB from 15 dB to 35 dB on the screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 21 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 2 Display Range Horizontal System Distance range Distance measurements Cursor resolution min FM FS FG series 850 nm
96. be asynchronously notified of the actuation of a softkey by programming the instrument to request service when the corresponding URQ event occurs Use of the SOFTKEY command with the MESSAGE command allows an interactive dialog to be used between the instrument operator and the controller during remote operation Upon return to local control programmable softkey definitions are retained but not enabled When the instrument returns to remote control without local lockout the previously programmed softkeys are displayed and enabled Determine if GPIB interface status is currently shown on the instrument display Remote only Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data GSTATUS GSTATUS option option NR1 Possible values are 0 1 not shown or shown TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 145 Chapter 8 Remote Control Identification Query IDN Allows unique identification of devices over the system interface Query Syntax IDN Response Syntax Returns four fields separated by commas in the lt Arbitrary ASCII Response Data gt format TEKTRONIX TFP2A TFP2AM 0 CF 89 1ST lt v68020 gt lt v34010 gt lt vplugin1 gt lt vplugin2 gt lt vacqsys gt Response Data The response elements are defined as follows TEKTRONIX Manufacturer TFP2A Model number 0 CF 89 1ST lt SP gt lt v68020 gt lt SP gt lt v34010 gt lt SP gt vplugin12 SP lt vplugin2 gt lt SP gt vacqsys
97. bit indicates that the instrument has been turned off and then turned on since the last time the SESR was read Bit 6 User Request URQ When the URQ bit is set to 1 it indicates that the user has pressed a softkey programmed using the SOFTKEY command Read the Event Queue entry for this event to determine which key was pressed Bit 5 Command Error CME The CME bit is turned on when the instrument detects a command error Command errors can be caused by 1 command or query syntax errors and 2 semantic errors For example an unimplemented or incorrectly spelled command or query will generate a command error Bit 4 Execution Error EXE The EXE bit is turned on when FiberMaster detects an error during the execution of a command Execution errors can occur when command parameters are outside the legal range for the instrument or are inconsistent with a current instrument mode or operation Bit 3 Device Dependent Error DDE A device dependent error occurs when a device operation does not complete due to some internal condition of the instrument Bit 2 Not Used Bit 1 Not Used Bit 0 Operation Complete OPC This bit is generated in response to the Operation Complete OPC command TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 39 Chapter 8 Remote Control Event Queue Device events that are enabled by the DESER are logged in the SESR At the same time a code and message identifying the event are written to the Event Queue The
98. commands and queries 8 62 hardcopy commands and queries 8 141 8 145 identification query 8 149 internal errors 8 172 internal warnings 8 173 learn settings queries 8 150 mass storage commands 8 132 8 136 mass storage queries 8 137 8 140 measurement queries 8 101 8 105 module information queries 8 88 8 90 program messages 8 56 query abbreviations 8 57 query argument formats 8 57 query headers 8 57 query response argument formats 8 59 8 61 queue status codes 8 164 remote local commands and queries 8 73 8 74 reset and stop commands 8 152 response formatting commands and queries 8 121 8 122 RS 232 BREAK signal 8 47 cabling 8 29 clear status registers 8 48 command errors 8 43 common commands 8 36 communications 8 36 8 38 controller instrument synchronization 8 46 data bit settings 8 34 Device Event Status Enable Register DE SER 8 39 device initialization 8 47 8 48 device dependent messages 8 36 emulation of IEEE 488 1 interface messag es 8 53 8 54 error handling 8 39 8 42 event code and message formats 8 44 event code categories 8 43 Event Queue 8 41 execution errors 8 43 execution warnings 8 44 flow control 8 34 GPIB plotter 8 38 GPIB printer 8 38 input buffer 8 34 internal errors 8 43 internal warnings 8 44 modem configuration 8 31 8 33 modes of operation 8 36 8 38 port select sequence 8 33 power on initialization 8 47 program messages 8 36 programmable softkeys 8 41 programming example 8 161
99. control 2101 Density parameter error not available for active laser The specified density level is not available for the active laser 2102 Module selection error no module detected in plug in or no plug in 2103 Module selection error requested module not present in plug in The MODSELECT command was issued with parameters that do not match the instrument s optics module configuration 2152 Module setting error masking unavailable for current module The currently selected optics module does not support masking 2153 Module setting error unavailable pulse width The currently selected optics module does not support the requested pulse width 2154 Module setting error unavailable range The currently selected optics module does not support the requested maximum range 2155 Module setting error unavailable pulse width and range The currently selected optics module does not support the requested pulse width and range 2156 Module setting error unavailable combination of pulse width and range An invalid combination of pulse width and range was selected for the current optics module 2251 Measurement start error unavailable in real time mode Splice loss measurements were attempted while the instrument was in real time mode 2252 Measurement start error distance not in acquisition range Invalid distance specified for splice loss measurement 2253 Measurement start error distance 1 not in acquisit
100. current memory the waveform data is not overwritten but the acquisition does not resume The settings shown at the bottom of the acquisition screen are those just loaded from disk and may not match the settings used to acquire the waveform displayed Any settings that do not match acquisition data are highlighted You must then press the START STOP button to start a new acquisition using the settings just loaded When waveform data is acquired using the new settings the highlighting is cleared Quick Load The Quick Load function allows you to load waveform and settings files with a minimum of button pressing From the acquisition screen access the Quick Load function as follows 1 Press the Mass Storage softkey The Load from Disk menu displays 2 For dual drive instruments select the drive to use for the load operation by press ing the Switch Drives softkey 3 Press the WFM SELECT button The softkeys are redrawn with file names from mass storage The first five settings file names appear on the top five softkeys If five settings files are not found on the active drive the remaining keys show the first available waveform file names TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 5 Chapter 7 Mass Storage To load one of the files press the corresponding softkey When you press a softkey the following operations happen automatically The file is loaded into current memory You are returned to the acquisition screen
101. current or reference memory the fiber ID notes and operator information for that waveform display on the Operator Settings menu when the waveform is active When you acquire new data any operator settings for the Next Menu Next Param Prev Param Next Char Delete Char Exit 3 32 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual User Defaults Waveform Operator System Settings Settings Settings Remote Fiber Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT AVE JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Operator JORDAN HILL Tum the CURSOR knob to pick a character in the list Press CURSOR SELECT to choose which character to edit Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 RBCDEFGHUKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcde fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234567894 MOE SHARON lt gt Figure 3 17 Operator Settings Menu Chapter 3 Getting Started previous current waveform are saved with the new data unless you change the fields on the Operator Settings menu Each of these parameters is a character string Enter each the same way using a combination of the CURSOR knob and softkeys The following softkeys appear on the Operator Settings menu Next Menu save the current operator settings parameter and go to the next menu Pressing this softkey from the Operator Settings menu displays the System Settings menu Next Param save the current parameter and display the pop up window for
102. cursors the inactive loss cursor is placed at the same vertical position and extends along the same slope as the active cursor In both overview and expanded view if the inactive cursor is off the screen when you press CURSOR SELECT the view switches to show both cursors on the screen if possible If the cursors are not close enough to each other to display both the view is centered around the new active cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 2 7 Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors Window Controls and Indicators r WINDOW 4 O O 2 Vertical SIZE In overview turn this knob to expand and contract the expansion window vertically In expanded view the area defined by the expansion window fills the waveform viewing area in this mode turning the vertical SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself vertically gt In expanded view dual trace mode the vertical SIZE knob operates on both the current and the reference waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor 43 Horizontal SIZE In overview turn this knob to expand and contract the expansion window horizontally In expanded view the area defined by the expansion window fills the waveform viewing area in this mode turning the horizontal 512 knob expands and contracts the waveform itself horizontally
103. display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 33 Chapter 1 Introduction FL1315 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 17 FL1315 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 20 us 2000 m 37 5 37 0 46 0 46 5 2375 2100 10 us 1000 m 36 0 35 0 46 0 46 0 1270 1050 4000 ns 400 m 33 5 33 0 45 5 46 0 670 440 2000 ns 200 m 31 0 30 5 44 5 45 0 395 220 1000 ns 100 m 29 5 29 0 44 5 45 0 280 120 500 ns 50 m 27 5 27 0 44 0 44 5 150 60 200 ns 20 m 25 5 25 0 44 0 44 5 125 195 35 100 ns 10 m 24 0 23 0 44 0 44 0 125 170 25 Operating wavelength 1310 1550 nm 20 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 50 m to 320 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 9096 relative humidity 5 096 Weight 4 4 lbs 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm g Dynamic range specifications are based on 262 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values 2 Dynamic range SNR 1
104. file 7 7 7 12 settings file 7 11 waveform file 7 11 SCATTERCOEFF 8 77 SCATTERCOEFF 8 80 scattering coefficient 3 20 3 21 4 29 4 38 Self Test softkey 3 1 SET 8 150 settings default 3 4 in dual trace mode 6 12 of high density data 6 10 operator 3 32 3 33 system 3 34 3 55 waveform 3 9 3 29 settings file 7 2 C 2 loading from mass storage 7 5 saving to mass storage 7 11 SHOWMARKERS 8 112 SHOWMARKERS 8 113 signal to noise 3 14 5 25 SIZE knob horizontal 2 8 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in expanded view 6 5 in Link Return Loss mode 4 33 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 14 SIZE knob vertical 2 8 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in expanded view 6 3 in Link Return Loss mode 4 33 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 14 slope calculation 3 18 3 19 LSA 3 18 4 10 4 20 two point 3 18 4 10 SOFTKEY 8 148 softkeys also see entry under specific softkey name i e Two Point softkey Save softkey etc 1 11 software filtering 3 30 sound 3 39 source parameter 1 11 specifications electrical characteristics 1 21 1 23 environmental characteristics 1 25 1 26 FG1300 singlemode module 1 30 FG1315 singlemode module 1 31 FL1300 singlemode module 1 32 FL1315 singlemode module 1 34 FL1500 singlemode module 1 33 FM1300 multimode module 1 36 FM8500 multimode module 1 35 FM8513 multimode module 1 37 FS1300 singlemode module 1 27 FS1315 singlemode module 1 29 FS1500
105. four black quick release screws in each corner of the back panel assembly see figure 1 4 Pull the back panel assembly off the mainframe using the handle provided disconnecting the control and module support boards from the interconnect board which is attached to the inside of the back panel Backpanel quick release screws Module quick release screws SS NC MUS E NENNEN P s 5 qe 2 pow NNN NANN b ANANN ANANA NQNSRO ANANN NANNAN NANANA P RRE 5 Backpanel quick release screws Figure 1 4 Installing Optical Modules TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 15 Chapter 1 Introduction 2 Plug one module into the bottom set of module connectors on the interconnect board inserting the module s screwholes through the back panel assembly See figure 1 5 3 Secure the module to the back panel assembly by tightening the two back panel quick release screws into the module s screwholes 4 lf you have a second module plug it into the top set of module connectors on the interconnect board ll EE ENENENENEN edere EN eter EN nee eres ene erem ees n een memes Jte esed een pr onc Module support board connectors Module connectors use for second module Module connectors use for single module Control board connector p Figure 1 5 Interconnect Circuit Board Connectors
106. had saved the active waveform or instrument settings to a mass storage file The format is the same as that of the FILE query response The difference between the FILNORM and FILHIGH commands is that FILNORM does not send the high density part of the waveform to FiberMaster FILHIGH transfers both normal and high density parts of the waveform to FiberMaster Example s Binary encoding FILHIGH 548801 lt byte 1 gt lt byte 2 gt lt byte 48800 gt lt checksum byte gt 5 indicates that the next five digits 48801 are the count of data bytes including the checksum byte Each lt byte n gt is an eight bit waveform data byte ASCII encoding FILHIGH 597602FC55 B7A2 5 indicates that the next five digits 97602 are the count of all bytes to follow including the checksum bytes The first actual byte of waveform data has the hex value FC the second has the hex value 55 and the last byte has the hex value B7 The checksum has the hex value A2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 123 Chapter 8 Remote Control FILE Causes the binary data for the active waveform file or for an instrument settings file to be sent as a response The response data contains the same stream of data contained in a FiberMaster mass storage waveform or settings file and can be used by the controller to write a FiberMaster compatible waveform or settings file to the controller s disk drive Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response S
107. if necessary for precise cursor placement In the example below the cursor is placed just past the front panel connector reflection Normal Density Averages 20480 Event Time 00 00 31 Loss 0 333 dB km Table 127 m 6453 m gt gt gt Two Point Splice Loss 6 326 km 22 ayes Loss 20 Mass 18 Storage T T T T 200 0 200 400 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc LSA Event Markinq Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 214 s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 13108M Settings IRef Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJUT8A WFM Figure 4 11 Automatic Fiber Loss Measurement Placing the First Cursor 3 Press CURSOR SELECT to switch active cursors 4 20 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 4 Move the second distance cursor to the end of the section of fiber being measured In the example below the second cursor is placed where the reflection indicates a connector at the end of this section of fiber Automatic two point measurements are made In the example the fiber loss between the distance cursors is 0 333 dB per km Normal Density Averages 20480 Event Time 00 00 31 Loss 0 333 dB km Table 6 453 km 0 127 km Two Point 11 dB Splice
108. in expanded view is the same as enlarging the expansion window The effect on the size of the expansion window can be seen when you return to overview TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 2 9 Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors Waveform Controls and Indicators m WAVEFORM 4 A POSITION zd Y WFM CURRENT SPEI SELECT REFERENCE a Vertical POSITION Turn the left hand POSITION knob to move the active waveform up and down on the display When dual trace mode is on the vertical POSITION knob operates only on the active waveform Horizontal POSITION Turn the right hand POSITION knob to move the active waveform right and left on the display In both overview and expanded view horizontal movement is limited to half the maximum range in either direction When dual trace mode is on the horizontal POSITION knob operates on both the current and the reference waveforms simultaneously WFM SELECT Press this button to select which of two waveforms displays The two waveforms are the current acquisition from current memory and the reference waveform from reference memory When dual trace is on both waveforms display at once The active waveform is highlighted and can be moved and used for measurements If you turn dual trace off the active waveform is the only one displayed The indicator light next to the WFM SELECT button shows which waveform is currently active For in
109. instrument or to change measurement settings the help screens describe the operation of each parameter Some help screens consist of multiple pages Turn the CURSOR knob to scroll from page to page on mutiple page help screens From any help screen to end the help function and return to the original display press the HELP button again START STOP Button Event Table The START STOP button begins an averaged or real time acquisition into current memory Pressing the START STOP button begins an acquisition in averaged mode and stops after the maximum number of averages is complete If Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage the active distance cursor is on the waveform when a new acquisition is started the acquisition has the same starting point as the previous acquisition If the active Change Settings distance cursor is not on the waveform when the START STOP button is pressed the new acquisition is centered around the active distance cursor If you expand a waveform to 100 data points pressing the START STOP button starts a high density data acquisition Holding the START STOP button in for two seconds puts the instrument into real time mode In real time mode a new acquisition starts as soon as the previous one is complete Waveforms are displayed with minimal averaging and the measurement mode defaults to Two Point mode To stop real time and averaged acquisitions press the START STOP button aga
110. interface and does not initiate remote control or have the ability to control other devices Differences between GPIB and RS 232 Remote Control This section summarizes some differences between GPIB and RS 232 remote control For specific details on setting up for remote control refer to the sections GPIB System Overview and RS 232 System Overview earlier in this chapter Physical Setup For GPIB remote control FiberMaster conforms to both the 488 1 and 488 2 standards and is suitable for use in a GPIB based instrumentation system with a controller and possibly multiple talkers and listeners Under RS 232 remote control FiberMaster operates strictly in a point to point mode with a controller that is typically a host computer No multidrop or addressing schemes are supported Cabling Under GPIB remote control a standard GPIB cable is all that is needed to connect FiberMaster to a controller or to other devices in a linear configuration Under RS 232 remote control there are a variety of cabling schemes that are dictated by different applications For example the same cable cannot be used to connect FiberMaster to a DTE configured host computer and also a DCE configured modem Distance between Controller and FiberMaster GPIB supports a maximum distance of four meters between the controller and the instrument but greater distances can be achieved with RS 232 For direct connections the RS 232C standard provides for up to 15 me
111. into or out of high density data When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 33 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Vertical POSITION knob Horizontal POSITION knob WFM SELECT button STORE button MODULE SELECT button START STOP button Move the active waveform up and down on the display It is possible to move the waveform off the display When dual trace mode is on the vertical POSITION knob operates only on the active waveform Move the waveform right and left on the display In both overview and expanded view horizontal movement is limited to half the maximum range in either direction When dual trace mode is on the horizontal POSITION knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Pick whether the current waveform or the reference waveform is active The active waveform is the only one on which you can make measurements and is displayed at a brighter intensity than the inactive waveform In single trace mode the active waveform is the only one displayed The indicator next to the WFM SELECT button lights to show which waveform is active When dual trace is on and both the current and reference waveforms are displayed the dB scale is that of the active waveform The difference betwe
112. into reference memory Alt M Module select Alt F Turn event markers on and off Alt N Turn off current measurement mode and enter Preview mode Alt R Start a real time acquisition Alt S Start Stop 7 on keypad Move the left side of the active loss cursor up 1 on keypad Move the left side of the active loss cursor down 9 on keypad Move the right side of the active loss cursor up 3 on keypad Move the right side of the active loss cursor down The key sequences marked with an asterisk are also available on the Place Event Markers and the Place Manual Masks screens TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual C FiberMaster Data Format FiberMaster s data transfers take place in six ways Internal printer hardcopy GPIB plotter or printer hardcopy Serial plotter or printer hardcopy Data transfer to and from the instrument via XModem Data transfer from the instrument via remote control Data transfer to and from the instrument via floppy disk or internal RAM LDIODODOCL To maintain consistency all non hardcopy data except GPIB and RS 232 is in the same format This allows the user to use the same data manipulation routines no mat ter how the data is acquired Every waveform file contains the following data Pulse width Maximum range Slope calculation method Refractive index Scattering coefficient Fiber ID Maximum averages Dual trace setting Event thre
113. is stored in current or reference memory 251 Missing mass storage A mass storage command or query was received but no disk or internal RAM is installed 251 Missing mass storage no fixed RAM drive A command or query has requested an operation on a fixed RAM drive but no such drive is installed 251 Missing mass storage no floppy disk drive A command or query has requested an operation on a floppy disk drive but no such drive is installed 252 Missing media A mass storage operation was attempted with a floppy disk drive when the media is removed 253 Corrupt media A bad sector or format error has been detected on the floppy disk TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 163 Chapter 8 Remote Control 254 Media full The floppy disk is full 255 Directory full The MS DOS directory is full 256 Filename not found A read or delete command specified a nonexisting file name 257 Filename error An invalid MS DOS file name was specified 258 Media protected An attempt to write or delete a file or format the floppy disk was made but the media is write protected 2001 Instrument state error command accepted only in remote state A command was received in LOCS or LWLS that can only be executed in REMS or RWLS 2002 Instrument state error query accepted only in remote state A query was received in LOCS or LWLS that can only be executed in REMS or RWLS 2003 Instrument state error comm
114. logged in the Event Queue and an execution error is indicated in the Standard Event Status Register GPIB Only and RS 232 Only Commands and Queries Most FiberMaster commands are valid when received through either the GPIB or RS 232 interfaces However some commands are valid only with a specific interface GPIB only commands include the following BAUD PARITY NCHARBITS NSTOPBITS FLOW SPLTSCREEN SPLTTEXT PUT WFM binary encoding only PUT SET binary encoding only If any of these commands is sent to FiberMaster under RS 232 remote control the following error is generated 2006 Instrument state error command accepted only under 488 remote control GPIB only queries include the following GPLTSCREEN GPLTTEXT GET binary encoding only GET SET binary encoding only If any of these queries is sent to FiberMaster under RS 232 remote control the following error is generated 2007 Instrument state error query accepted only under 488 remote control 8 60 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 only commands include the following GPLTSCREEN GPLTTEXT LOCAL REMOTE REMLOCK If any of these commands is sent to FiberMaster under GPIB remote control the following error is generated 2008 Instrument state error command accepted only under RS 232 remote control NOTE Binary encoded versions of the commands and queries PUT WFM PUT SET GET WFM and G
115. lt param gt 5 message Header header Parameter 1 lt param1 gt Parameter 2 lt param2 gt message specifics Header lt header gt 7 message specifics Header header Parameter lt param gt 8 lt message gt specifics Header header Parameter 1 param Parameter 2 lt param2 gt The message elements are defined as follows message a basic description of the error or event specifics further detail about the error or event TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 43 Chapter 8 Remote Control header the header of the command or query that caused the error and param the text of an invalid parameter or parameters received lt 1 gt with a command or query lt param2 gt Formats 3 through 8 are used when an error can be attributed directly to a particular command or query or to one or more parameters of a particular command or query 8 44 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Controller and Instrument Synchronization FiberMaster executes all commands and queries sequentially which means that any device operation initiated by a command or query must be complete before the next command or query is executed The OPC query can be appended to a command to determine when the operation started by that command is complete The following example illustrates this synchronization technique 1
116. mode 4 6 in Splice Loss mode 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 14 POSITION knob vertical 2 10 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in Link Return Loss mode 4 34 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 14 POWER button 2 2 power on 3 1 3 2 power requirements 1 14 1 24 Preview mode 4 3 4 8 printer 3 47 3 48 loading paper into the internal printer 1 19 printing menu 2 2 3 48 Screen 2 2 3 48 waveform 2 2 3 48 PT OFF 8 118 pulse width 3 10 3 11 5 24 PULSELIST 8 89 PULSRNG 8 84 PULSRNG 8 87 PUT SET ASCII encoding 8 124 PUT SET binary encoding 8 123 PUT WFM ASCII encoding 8 124 PUT WFM binary encoding 8 123 Q Quick Copy softkey 7 18 Quick Load 7 5 Quick Save 7 11 QuickMask 3 28 3 29 quick start 3 2 R rackmount option 1 RAM internal 1 23 7 1 7 18 range 3 12 3 13 RANGELIST 8 90 REALTIME 8 95 real time acquisition 6 14 7 1 reference memory 1 3 2 10 C 2 REFINDEX 8 77 REFINDEX 8 80 refractive index 3 16 3 17 4 2 REMLOCK 8 73 REMLOCK 8 73 REMOTE 8 73 remote control 8 1 8 173 acquisition commands 8 94 8 96 command abbreviations 8 57 command argument formats 8 57 command errors 8 164 8 165 command headers 8 57 commands and queries 8 62 8 157 cursor command and query 8 97 data formats 8 56 8 61 device synchronization commands and query 8 156 differences and similarities between GPIB and RS 232 8 49 8 55 display related commands and query 8 146 8 148 eve
117. newline character 0A hex sent with the GPIB EOI line asserted concurrently The EOI line must be asserted when the newline character is sent because this is the only way to terminate a binary data stream of unknown length An error is generated and stored in the TFP2A Event Queue if the file data data stream does not conform to TFP2A waveform or settings file format An error is also likely to occur as a result of a transmission error due to faulty cabling It is recommended that ESR and EVMSG queries be sent after the PUT WFM and PUT SET commands to determine if an error has occurred The commands WFMSEL REF PUT WFM test wfm 0 file data NL END send waveform file data to reference memory and set the acquisition source to the file test wfm The command PUT SET test set ZO file data NL2 END sends setting data to current memory Note that it is not necessary to use the name of the file in the filename data element from which the data was read on the controller The filename data element is supplied for 8 120 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control documentation purposes only For example either command PUT WFM test wim 0 lt file_data gt lt NL gt lt END gt or PUT WFM 20 file data NL END would download a waveform to the TFP2A regardless of the name of the source file on the controller s hard disk However the file data element is s
118. ns 5 m 25 5 36 0 8 5 5 5 20 ns 2 m 23 5 36 0 6 0 3 0 8 ns 80 cm 20 5 36 0 4 5 1 0 3 ns 30 cm 16 5 35 0 3 5 0 5 1 ns 10 cm 14 0 35 0 2 5 0 2 1300 nm 1000 ns 100 m 26 5 38 0 125 110 500 ns 50 m 23 5 38 0 65 55 200 ns 20 m 21 5 38 0 35 25 100 ns 10 m 20 0 38 0 30 12 50 5 5 m 18 5 38 0 25 7 50 ns 5 m HR 15 0 35 0 20 7 20 ns 2 m HR 13 0 35 0 18 5 10 ns 1 m HR 15 0 35 0 14 3 Operating wavelengths 850 nm 25 nm 1300 nm 30 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 850 nm 5 m to 20 km 1300 nm 50 m to 100 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 0 to 50 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based on 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event
119. number B010008 part number FL1315 and two singlemode wavelengths of 1310 and 1550 nm MODINFO UPPER query MODINFO b010007 FL1500 1550SM response Indicates the optical module in the upper slot of the TFP2A has the serial number B010007 part number FL1500 and one singlemode wavelength of 1550 nm 8 84 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control MODSELECT Determine which front panel module is selected Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Discussion PULSRNG MODSELECT MODSELECT lt slot gt lt module gt slot lt CRD gt and equals UPPER or LOWER depending on whether a wavelength in the upper or lower module slot is selected lt module gt lt CRD gt and is a module type returned by the MODUPPER or MODLOWER query The MODSELECT query returns the module that will be used for the next acquisition if the current waveform is active If the reference waveform is active the response is the module that was used to acquire the reference waveform Determine the current pulse width and range settings Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Example s Discussion PULSRNG PULSRNG pulse width lt gt pulse width lt NR2 gt and specifies the current pulse width in nanoseconds range lt NR2 gt and specifies the current range setting in units selected by the last UNITS command kilometers or kilofeet PULSRNG 10
120. number of digits in the data byte count count count specifies the number of data bytes that follow including the checksum lt checksum gt gives the two s complement of the modulo 256 sum of bytes in the command data excluding the Binary encoding selected by the ENCDG BINARY command lt data_byte gt corresponds to one eight bit byte of waveform data and lt checksum gt is an eight bit checksum ASCII encoding selected by the ENCDG ASCII command This encoding is designed primarily for RS 232 remote control applications in which binary data cannot be handled In this format each eight bit byte of actual waveform data is encoded as two hexadecimal digits For example the data sent to FiberMaster when an actual waveform data byte has value 2E hex is the digit 2 32 hex followed by the digit E 45 hex The most significant digit 82 hex is sent first 8 122 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control In this case each data byte is two hex encoded digits and lt checksum gt is two hex encoded digits count is the count of hex encoded digits in data byte checksum twice the value of count for the binary encoding Discussion For the binary encoding the sequence of bytes data byte not including the checksum should be the contents of a FiberMaster waveform file FILNORM and FILHIGH or settings file FILSET The data should be the same as if the user
121. of these commands 8 56 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Query Response Argument Formats For each valid query message sent to FiberMaster the instrument returns a response message Each response message consists of one or more response message units and is terminated by the ASCII newline character RS 232 or the ASCII newline character sent concurrently with the GPIB END line asserted GPIB Responses to single queries within a query message are sent in the order in which each query was received Most queries return a single response message unit in the following format lt header gt lt data gt lt data gt The exceptions are LRN SET and WFMPRE which return multiple response message units Most queries return a fixed number of data elements Exceptions are MASKOPTION MODLOWER MODUPPER MEASURE EVNTINFO PULSELIST RANGELIST DENSITYLIST and CURVE when ASCII waveform encoding is used which return a variable number of data elements The header portion of the response is the unabbreviated upper case header of the corresponding query without the trailing question mark The header may or may not be sent in the query response depending on the setting of the header enable option refer to the HEADER command description Response headers are never sent for IEEE 488 2 common queries or for the SET GPLTSCREEN and GPLTTEXT queries With exceptions noted in the co
122. of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 27 Chapter 1 Introduction FS1500 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 11 FS1500 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 10 us 1000 m 26 5 36 0 1080 1050 4000 ns 400 m 24 5 36 0 480 420 2000 ns 200 m 20 5 36 0 240 220 1000 ns 100 m 19 0 36 0 140 110 500 ns 50 m 17 5 36 0 70 55 200 ns 20 m 15 5 36 0 40 25 100 ns 10 m 14 0 36 0 25 12 50 ns 5 m 12 5 36 0 20 7 50 ns 5 m HR 9 0 33 0 18 7 20 ns 2 m HR 7 5 33 0 NA 5 10 ns 1 m HR 5 0 33 0 NA 3 Operating wavelength 1550 nm 20 nm Masking menu selectable Auto QuickMask m Auto AccuMask Manual QuickMask J Manual AccuMask Full screen display range 50 m to 200 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 40
123. param1 gt with a command or query lt param2 gt Formats 3 through 8 are used when an error can be attributed directly to a particular command or query or to one or more parameters of a particular command or query 8 20 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Message Exchange Protocol The way the controller sends query messages to FiberMaster and reads response messages must conform to the following rules 1 The controller should wait until it has sent a query message plus a program message terminator before it attempts to read the corresponding response message If the instrument detects a violation of this rule event 420 query UNTERMINATED error is logged in the Event Queue and bit 2 QYE is set in the SESR if enabled by the DESER The Output Queue is cleared and any command or query currently being parsed by FiberMaster is discarded The instrument then becomes ready to parse a new command or query 2 The controller should wait until it has read an entire response message including the response message terminator before sending a new program message to FiberMaster If FiberMaster detects a violation of this rule event 410 query INTERRUPTED error is logged in the Event Queue and bit 2 QYE is set in the SESR if enabled by the DESER The Output Queue is cleared and FiberMaster stops sending the current response so it can read and process the new program information Rules 1 and 2 can
124. parameter settings specifically for high density data acquisition Settings for high density data must match those of the corresponding normal density data Any setting changes you make while viewing high density data also apply to the normal density data Changes to the pulse width maximum range and laser source require a new acquisition to take effect A message appears instructing you to press START STOP to acquire data using the new settings The new acquisition is normal density the acquisition screen returns to overview and the previously acquired high density data is lost Exceptions occur however to allow manual adjustments to masks for high density data without requiring a new normal density acquisition You can change the masking type setting and make manual changes to masks specifically for high density data For example when viewing high density data you can switch from an automatic to a manual masking type setting In this case when you press START STOP to implement the new masking type high density data is reacquired without affecting the normal density data You can press START STOP either after returning to the acquisition screen or on the Place Manual Masks screen after adjusting masks If you change the masking type or adjust manual masks for high density data when you return to overview the Masking Type parameter is highlighted to indicate that the current setting does not match the overview waveform data A prompt a
125. point distance is 2 828 km and the two point loss is 3 45 dB The loss per distance unit for the same section of fiber is calculated and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Normal Density Averages 20480 Event User Adjusted Measurement Time 00 00 31 Loss 1 221 dB km Table 6 453 km 9 281 km 40 Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss 10 Mass Storage 0 x T Y T Y T T 0 2 4 6 8 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 214 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File 15 7078 Figure 4 10 User Adjusted Two Point Measurement TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 19 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Fiber Loss Measurements Measure fiber loss on a featureless section of backscatter using the LSA method of slope calculation 1 Enter the menu system and select LSA as the slope calculation method The display shows one loss cursor fitted as a straight line along the waveform between the distance cursors 2 Using the CURSOR knob place the active distance cursor at the starting point of the section of fiber used for loss measurement beyond the tail caused by any previous reflection Press the EXPAND button to expand the view
126. points along the fiber under test The vertical axis measures reflected light detected by the OTDR and represents transmission loss along the fiber length The leftmost spike is a reflection caused by the front panel connector The sloping waveform is backscattered light light reflected back towards its source that shows fiber characteristics The slope of the waveform represents the optical fiber loss A low loss homogeneous fiber will show a gradually sloping waveform Any breaks or connections along the fiber appear on the display as either reflective or nonreflective discontinuities in the waveform as shown in figure 1 1 These discontinuities or events indicate locations along the fiber where you might find a splice connector bend break or other anomaly in the cable TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Use the data displayed on the OTDR s screen to determine the physical locations of these types of optical fiber faults to help analyze their probable causes and to measure cable transmission loss Reflective break at Reflective loss Nonreflective loss the end of the fiber at connector or i e a fusion splice the end of the fiber mechanical splice or a bend in the cable can also be nonreflective Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 Reflection at front panel connector 1 828 km Event Markinq Auto Masking Off Module F51315 13105M File LSJU76 WEM Settings
127. power on The GPIB related power on defaults are as follows GPIB address defaults to the last used value The factory default is 7 GPIB status GPIB status is always online after power on Status enable registers the status enable registers include the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Standard Event Status Enable Register SESER and the Service Request Enable Register SRER The power on values of these registers are DESER 255 SESER 0 SRER 0 Standard Event Status Register SESR the power on value is 128 decimal which indicates the power on event Status Byte Register STB the power on value is 0 Event Queue power on value is to queue a single event power on event 401 Response header enabling power on value is ON Waveform encoding power on value is BINARY The sequence of events at power on is illustrated in the following diagram Power On DESER set to 255 SESER set to 0 SRER set to 0 SESR STB Event Queue cleared SESR set to 128 bit 7 Event 401 logged in Event Queue 8 24 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Device Clear Messages A second type of initialization is performed by device clear messages DCL and SDC A DCL or SDC forces the instrument s message handler into an idle state ready to receive and execute program messages but does not affect any device operation in progress A device clear message causes the inst
128. pressing Next Menu Next Param Prev Param or Exit The next time you save a waveform to mass storage the file format selection is used TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 45 Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE When settings only are saved the TFP2 file format is used regardless of the File Format selection on the System Settings menu The factory set default is TFP2 You can select CFF as the power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter 3 46 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Hard Copy Device NOTE To display the Hard Copy Device pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the hardcopy device parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 17 24 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 28 Hardcopy Device Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Hard Copy Device window to choose which device will be used for printing when you press the HARD COPY button on the instrum
129. program message ESR 6 The instrument sends the response message 1 lt NL gt 4 lt END gt where the 1 indicates the operation complete event Example 3 1 The controller sends the program message SRE 16 enabling the device to request service when the message available bit MAV is set in the STB 2 The controller sends the program message ACQUIRE 10 0 START NORMAL CURVE to cause FiberMaster to make an acquisition and return the waveform data 3 When FiberMaster completes the acquisition it places the CURVE query response data in the Output Queue and sets the MAV bit in the STB generating a service request The controller may conduct a serial poll sequence to determine that FiberMaster is the device requesting service and that the MAV bit is set in the STB 4 The controller reads the CURVE query response data Examples 2 and 3 allow the controller to exchange messages with other devices while FiberMaster is acquiring data TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 23 Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Device Initialization In addition to power on initialization FiberMaster has three types of reset via GPIB accomplished through the DCL SDC interface messages the RST command and the CLS command Power On Initialization Instrument parameters with factory set power on defaults are reset to their factory set values at power on Parameters with user definable power on defaults are reset to the user programmed values at
130. programmed to generate a user request event These softkeys function as follows Pressing the Return to Local softkey causes the instrument to return to LOCS If you press Return to Local during the receipt of a program message from the controller execution errors occur for any commands or queries that are remote executable only and are received after the transition from REMS to LOCS Programmable Softkeys You can use the SOFTKEY command to program a softkey to generate a user request event URQ in the Standard Event Status Register and the Event Queue if enabled by the DESER The topmost softkey is Return to Local not programmable does not generate a URQ event The programmable softkeys are identified as 1 through 5 The two bottom softkeys 4 and 5 are not available for programming when GPIB status information is being displayed The GPIB status display is enabled and disabled using the GSTATUS command When softkey n has been programmed and is subsequently pressed the user request event 4030 n is generated in the Event Queue For example pressing softkey 1 causes the following Event Queue entry 4031 User request Softkey 1 actuation 8 40 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control The controller can subsequently use the ESR query to determine that the URQ bit is set in the Standard Event Status Register and use the EVENT or EVMSG query to determine if a programmable softkey has been pressed
131. range centered around the event of interest You may also notice the acquisition range shift when changing pulse widths If you change from a long to a short pulse width the range of the new acquisition may not extend from the start of the current range to the location of the active TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions distance cursor In this case the new acquisition is centered around the active distance cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 9 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions High Density Data Acquisition When you expand a waveform either by turning the horizontal SIZE knob in expanded view or by pressing the EXPAND button in overview the number of data samples visible on the display can be reduced to 100 In this case a prompt may appear telling you to press the START STOP button to acquire high density data You do not have to press START STOP when you see this prompt but you cannot expand the waveform to fewer than 100 displayed data samples NOTE High density data acquisition is not available with the FL series optical modules and may not be possible with other modules for waveforms with short pulse widths and long maximum ranges In these cases the high density prompt does not appear When you press START STOP new data is acquired at a sample density up to five times the normal sample density The high density data is displayed in a different color and at higher
132. s DRIVESEL FIXED select fixed mass storage drive BATCHCOPY WT WFM copy all waveform files that start with the letters WT from the fixed drive to the external drive DRIVESEL REMOV select removable media drive BATCHCOPY WT SET copy all settings files that start with the letters WT followed by any single character from the external drive to the fixed drive TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 129 Chapter 8 Remote Control COPYFILE Copy file from the currently selected drive to the second drive The currently selected drive is selected by the DRIVESELECT command For instruments with both internal RAM and a floppy disk drive Remote only Command Syntax COPYFILE filename Command Data filename SPD and specifies the file name to be copied The full file name including extension if any must be specified Example s COPYFILE TESTWFM COPYFILE FIBO90 WFM COPYF FIBO90 SET COPYF 850TEST OBJ COPYSET COPYWFM Copy file from the currently selected drive to the second drive The currently selected drive is selected by the DRIVESELECT command For instruments with both internal RAM and a floppy disk drive Remote only Command Syntax COPYSET filename COPYWFM filename Command Data filename SPD and specifies the file name to be copied Example s COPYW FIBOS90 COPYW FIBO90 WFM COPYS 850TEST COPYS 850TEST SET Discussion If no extension is specified in
133. sent if no waveform data is available Binary encoding lt len gt lt count gt lt byteM gt lt byteL gt lt checksum gt The data is in lt Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data gt format where lt len gt is a single digit 0 9 which specifies the number of bytes in the lt NR1 gt element lt count gt lt count gt specifies the number of bytes of data that follow including the checksum byteM is the most significant byte of a 16 bit data word lt byteL gt is the least significant byte of a 16 bit data word Each data word is a signed 2 s complement integer lt checksum gt is a single byte giving the 2 s complement of the modulo 256 sum of all bytes in the response except for If lt len gt is 0 the entire response is 10 and indicates that no waveform data is stored The ENCDG command is used to determine how waveforms will be formatted The WFMPRE query is used to determine the number of points on an ASCII or binary waveform the offset of the first sample point from the origin and the sample interval The maximum number of points per waveform is 16 000 For binary encoded waveforms this results in a maximum block response length of 32 008 bytes i e the response CURVE 532001 lt 32000 data bytes gt lt checksum gt CURVE returns normal or high density data whichever was acquired last regardless of whether the last acquisition was made under local control by pressing the START STOP
134. service request whenever the ESB bit of the STB is set Refer to the Commands and Queries section later in this chapter for complete descriptions of GPIB commands TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 17 Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB System Errors Events and Warnings Certain categories of errors and events detected by the instrument are recorded in the Standard Event Status Register and the Event Queue as described in the previous section on status reporting and error handling Logged events are categorized by their numeric codes as shown in the following table Table 8 7 GPIB Event Code Categories Code Range Event Category SESR Bit 100 199 Command error CME 200 299 Execution error EXE 2000 2999 Execution error EXE 300 399 Internal error DDE 3000 3999 Internal error DDE 400 499 System event PON OPC URQ QYE 500 599 Execution warning EXE 600 699 Internal warning DDE The specific codes and messages used by FiberMaster are listed in the section GP B Event Codes and Messages later in this chapter Command Errors A command error is a syntax or semantic error in a program message A syntax error occurs when a program message contains a combination of syntactic elements that FiberMaster does not recognize A semantic error occurs when the instrument receives an unrecognized command or query header or detects a length or type error in a program data element Execution Errors Internal Errors NOTE
135. stand for a non standard core diameter For example FS1315 1310SM standard module with standard core diameter FS1315 1310SMaA modified module with non standard core diameter FS1315 1310SMA standard module with non standard core diameter FS1315 1310SMa modified module with standard core diameter For more information on module modifications and internal fiber core diameters in the U S and Canada call 1 800 833 9200 or contact your local Tektronix representative The Source parameter shows where the current waveform data originated The data could be the result of an acquisition a data transfer or from a mass storage file For an acquisition the parameter displays as Source Acquisition If the waveform was loaded from mass storage the parameter reads File FILE NAME Where FILE is the name of the mass storage file If the waveform data was received via an XModem data transfer the parameter reads Source XModem Softkey labels display along the right hand edge of the screen On the acquisition screen the softkeys allow you to switch measurement modes view the event table enter the menu system and access mass storage functions TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 11 Chapter 1 Introduction About this Manual The FiberMaster User Manual consists of seven chapters and six appendices containing the following information Chapter 1 Introduction provides a description of the Fib
136. state when the Return to Local key is pressed in REMS when the instrument receives the Go to Local GTL interface message in REMS and at power on The instrument enters LWLS from LOCS when it receives the Local Lockout LLO interface message with REN asserted and from RWLS when it is addressed to listen and receives the GTL interface message REMS is entered from LOCS when the instrument is addressed to listen while REN is asserted FiberMaster enters RWLS from REMS when the LLO message is received and from LWLS when the instrument receives its listen address REMS cannot be directly entered from RWLS Local to Remote Transition When the instrument changes from local to remote operation the following occurs Ly Any currently executing device operation that was initiated from the front panel is aborted with the exception of a mass storage operation When the state change is made the full set of GPIB commands is now available for execution rather than the limited subset available in the local state The REMOTE indicator on the front panel lights up The instrument remains in the current measurement mode with any previously acquired waveform displayed Instrument settings are not affected Allfront panel controls are disabled The only exception is the softkey that displays only in REMS Return to Local The Return to Local softkey returns the instrument to local control The acquisition screen is updated duri
137. the instrument detects the query and sends the response 1 NL 2 END 3 Upon reading the response message from the controller knows the acquisition is complete Note that this method does not allow the controller to exchange messages with other devices since it must wait for a response from FiberMaster Example 2 1 The controller sends the program message ESE 1 enabling the setting of the event summary bit ESB in the STB when the OPC command is executed The 1 indicates the operation complete bit or OPC in the SESR Note bit 1 of the DESER must be set to enable the logging of the operation complete event The factory default setting of the DESER is all bits set 8 22 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control 2 The controller sends the program message SRE 32 enabling FiberMaster to request service when the event summary bit ESB is set in the STB 3 The controller sends the program message ACQUIRE 10 0 START NORMAL OPC 4 When the acquisition is complete the instrument detects and executes the OPC command The OPC bit is set in the SESR and summarized in the ESB bit in the STB When the ESB bit is set the instrument asserts the GPIB service request line SRQ The controller may conduct a serial poll sequence to determine that FiberMaster is the device requesting service and that the ESB bit is set in the STB 5 To read and clear the SESR the controller sends the
138. the CTS and DSR lines after power on even if hardware flow control is not enabled If hardware flow control is selected RTS CTS or DTR DSR one of these lines CTS or DSR respectively is dropped whenever FiberMaster is not ready to receive data DCD is asserted continuously after power on and not dropped under any condition TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 27 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 System Setup Set the RS 232 parameters on FiberMaster s System Settings Menu to match those of the controller being used These parameters include Baud rate Parity Stop bits Data bits Flow control O O O These parameter settings can be saved as power on user defaults using the User Defaults menu If binary waveform or settings transfers used set the number of data bits to 8 and the flow control to RTS CTS or DTR DSR Use RTS CTS if you are connecting FiberMaster to a modem and the modem supports RTS CTS flow control Do not change FiberMaster RS 232 parameters while I O with a controller is in progress This could result in a lockup of communications between the controller and FiberMaster as well as in lost data In the event that this happens however communications can be restored by doing the following 1 Restore FiberMaster parameter settings to match those of the controller 2 Senda BREAK signal to FiberMaster to ready the instrument to receive new commands Cabling It is recommended that only sh
139. the UNITS command lt distspec gt lt CPD gt and specifies that the distance supplied by the lt distance gt parameter will be used as a starting point or center point for the acquisition Values for lt distspec gt are START and CENTER START causes the acquisition to start at the point specified by the lt distance gt parameter CENTER causes it to be centered around that point lt densityspec gt lt CPD gt Values are NORMAL for normal density acquisition and HD1 for high density Example s ACQ 10 0 START NORMAL Discussion The acquisition is done using the optical module and wavelength specified by the MODSELECT command The acquisition can be stopped before completion by sending a device clear interface message immediately followed by a STOP command When a high density acquisition is made and the instrument is then returned to local control the display indicates that both normal and high density data are stored This maintains consistency with local operation of the instrument because high density data can only be obtained in local when normal density data is already stored A following WFMPRE or CURVE query returns data for the high density waveform acquired under remote control unless a new acquisition has been made under local control 8 92 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control REALTIME Place the instrument in real time acquisition mode Remote only Command Syntax
140. the active loss cursor up and down When you turn the knob the active loss cursor is automatically elongated to make manual adjustments easier in the noise except when using LSA slope calculation method To adjust a loss cursor in noise move it until there are an equal number of noise spikes above and below the cursor Use the slope Loss knob to match the cursor slope to the signal slope When using the LSA slope calculation method the vertical Loss knob vertically positions the loss cursor maintaining the same slope In Two Point mode using the two point slope calculation method and in Link Return Loss mode the active loss cursor is the one on the active distance cursor selected using the CURSOR SELECT button In Splice Loss and Link Return Loss modes there is one distance cursor and two loss cursors Select the active loss cursor using the CURSOR SELECT button 2 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors Slope LOSS This knob the right hand Loss knob is active in Two Point Splice Loss Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss modes and allows you to rotate the active loss cursor manually to match the slope of the signal When you turn the slope Loss knob the active loss cursor is automatically elongated to make manual adjustments easier except when using the LSA slope calculation method When using the LSA slope calculation method the slope Loss knob rotates the LSA los
141. the call with its internal modem The remote modem answered the call and transferred commands to FiberMaster Local RTS CTS flow control was used between FiberMaster and the remote modem and between the PC and controller modem The Hayes factory default settings for both modems were used with the following exceptions Controller modem Destructive break signalling ATS82 7 command Command echo turned off ATEO command Speaker off ATMO Basic call progress return codes ATX1 Remote modem Auto answer on one ring ATSO 1 command Destructive break signalling ATS82 7 command Command echo turned off ATEO command Speaker off ATMO Basic call progress return codes ATX1 The modem commands and or settings needed may be different for other types of connections or for other types of modems Settings that apply only to synchronous transmission have been omitted 8 30 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control An asterisk in the second column indicates that settings for both modems are identical Table 8 12 Hayes Accura Modem Settings for FiberMaster Remote Control Modem Setting Controller B16 B1 amp YO 500 000 501 000 502 043 503 013 504 010 505 008 506 002 507 050 508 002 509 006 510 014 511 095 512 050 518 000 525 005 530 000 Remote 500 001 507 060 11 055 Use U S domestic industry standard 103 when dialing at 300 bps Use U S dome
142. the left hand distance cursor Then use the vertical and slope Loss knobs to adjust the loss cursor so it is aligned with the section of backscatter in front of the fiber link being measured Notice that when you adjust the loss cursor manually the message User Adjusted Measurement appears in the upper left hand corner of the screen Normal Density User Adjusted Measurement Averages 1024 Time 00 00 05 3 000 km Link Retum Loss 26 9 dB 10 383 km gt gt gt Link Return Loss Exit Return Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Maximum Range 25 0 km Max Avgs 1 024 5 3 s Ref Index 1 4680 Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 30 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Change Module FS1315 1310SM Settings File LINK 100 WEM Figure 4 19 User Adjusted Link Return Loss Measurement TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 37 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Event Return Loss Mode When FiberMaster is first turned on softkeys allow entry into Two Point and Splice Loss modes Two additional return loss measurement modes are available via the Return Loss softkey When you press the Return Loss softkey the Two Point and Splice Loss softkeys are replaced by the Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss softkeys Enter Event Return Loss mode from Splice Loss mode simply by pressing the Return Loss softkey From Preview a
143. the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter Specifications are based on reflections not to exceed a return loss of 40 dB 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection Performance specifications are at 25 C 1 30 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FG1315 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 14 FG1315 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 10 us 1000 m 31 0 29 0 38 0 36 0 1150 1150 4000 ns 400 m 28 5 26 5 38 0 36 0 550 475 2000 ns 200 m 25 5 23 5 38 0 36 0 250 225 1000 ns 100 m 24 0 22 0 38 0 36 0 150 110 500 ns 50 m 21 5 19 5 38 0 36 0 80 85 55 200 ns 20 m 19 5 17 5 38 0 36 0 55 60 25 100 ns 10 m 18 0 16 0 38 0 36 0 50 55 12 50 ns 5 m 16 5 14 5 38 0 36 0 45 55 10 50 ns 5 m HR 13 5 11 5 34 0 33 0 30 35 7 20 ns 2 m HR 11 5 9 5 34 0 33 0 25 30 5 10 ns 1 m HR 9 5 7 5 34 0 33 0 N A 4 Operating wavelengths 1310 1550 20 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 50 m to 200 km
144. the waveform between the two cursors is calculated and displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen The method of calculation is determined by the slope calculation parameter setting Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on setting instrument parameters The two slope calculation methods are two point and least squares average LSA In two point slope calculations the two point loss is divided by the two point distance using the data point at each intersection between the loss cursors and the waveform In LSA slope calculations the data points on the waveform between the distance cursors are used to determine the best fitting straight line using the least squares average algorithm 4 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements NOTE Use the LSA slope calculation method for measuring fiber loss on featureless sections of backscatter and the two point method for most other two point measurements Figure 4 4 shows an example of Two Point mode measurements using the two point slope calculation Figure 4 5 shows an LSA slope calculation which displays a straight line fitted between the points where the distance cursors intersect the waveform Manual Two Point Measurements NOTE Make manual adjustments to two point measurements by adjusting the slopes and vertical positions of the loss cursors When they are manually adjusted two point loss cursors elongate extendi
145. this softkey The Place Manual Masks screen displays Masks are identified by shaded rectangular areas that cover the portions of the waveform that are excluded from acquisition averaging When there are no masks a blank mask appears as an outlined rectangle between the two distance cursors Moving the active distance cursor enables this mask which you can then move and resize as needed When working on the Place Manual Masks screen you can use the expansion window to magnify portions of the waveform for precise mask placement Use the horizontal and vertical SIZE knobs and the EXPAND button to size the waveform for this purpose The waveform POSITION knobs also function when working on the Place Manual Masks screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 17 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Adjusting Masks NOTE To mask a reflection manually position the left side of the mask on the rising edge of the reflection Place the right side of the mask on the down turning point of the right side of the reflection After placing masks press START STOP to acquire new data using the new mask without exiting the Place Manual Masks screen If necessary you can then readjust masks to further minimize dead zone The following paragraphs describe how to move add adjust and remove masks manually If reflections are too close together tail from the first reflection can interfere with the second one To see data between two closely spaced r
146. time stamp all acquisitions and disk files on a 24 hour clock basis Use the CURSOR knob to increase and decrease the hours minutes and seconds The highlighted portion of the time is affected when you turn the CURSOR knob Turning the knob clockwise increases the highlighted number turning the knob counterclockwise decreases it Pressing the Next Digit softkey causes the next portion of the time to be highlighted Pressing the Prev Digit softkey highlights the previous portion of the time You can also use the optional keyboard to type in the time Enter two digits each for the hours minutes and seconds Use the colon key in place of the Next Digit softkey The new time setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys 3 40 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started System Date To display the Date pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the date parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Remot Settings Settings Defaults Next SYSTEM Menu Language English Intensity Medium Next Param Prev Param Color Color Tum the CURSOR knob to Sound On change the highlighted number Time 18 05 42 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format Units Metric 6 1993 Keyboard
147. to GPIB and RS 232 data Refer to chapter 8 for information on GPIB and RS 232 data formats 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual D Diagnostics Menus This appendix describes how to use FiberMaster s diagnostics menus If your instrument does not function properly or if you have questions about the instrument contact your local Tektronix representative or call our toll free help line at 1 800 833 9200 You may be asked to run tests using these diagnostics menus in the process of troubleshooting any problems with your instrument Run Diagnostics Tests Menu Mode Power on Tests Real Time Clock Figure D 1 Run Diagnostics Menu Entering the Diagnostics Menus Set Options Result OK OK OK Next Menu Select Test START TEST More Info Exit The diagnostics menus are available from the start up screen via a function key if diagnostic errors were detected during power on The menus are also available from the start up screen by pressing the HELP button and softkey 6 the bottom softkey simultaneously TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix D Diagnostics Menus The diagnostics menus allow the selection of various self tests for the instrument to perform The results of the tests are reported following completion of the tests Reading More Information on the Highlighted Test To read more information on the currently highlighted test press the More Info S
148. to return to LOCS If you press Return to Local during the receipt of a program message from the controller execution errors occur for any commands or queries that are remote executable only and are received after the transition from REMS to LOCS Programmable Softkeys You can use the SOFTKEY command to program a softkey to generate a user request event URQ in the Standard Event Status Register and the Event Queue if enabled by the DESER The topmost softkey is Return to Local not programmable does not generate a URQ event The programmable softkeys are identified as 1 through 5 The two bottom softkeys 4 and 5 are not available for programming when status information is being displayed The status display is enabled and disabled using the GSTATUS command When softkey n has been programmed and is subsequently pressed the user request event 4030 n is generated in the Event Queue For example pressing softkey 1 causes the following Event Queue entry 4031 User request Softkey 1 actuation The controller can be asynchronously notified of the actuation of a softkey by programming the instrument to request service when the corresponding URQ event occurs Using the SOFTKEY command with the MESSAGE command allows an interactive dialog between the instrument operator and the controller during remote operation of the instrument When the instrument returns to local control programmable softkey definitions are retained When the i
149. us 1000 m 36 0 46 0 1270 1050 4000 ns 400 m 33 5 45 5 670 440 2000 ns 200 m 31 0 44 5 395 220 1000 ns 100 m 29 5 44 5 280 120 500 ns 50 m 27 5 44 0 150 60 200 ns 20 m 25 5 44 0 125 35 100 ns 10 m 24 0 44 0 125 25 Operating wavelength 1310 nm 20 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 50 m to 320 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs lt 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based on 262 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 496 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first ref
150. waveform Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion TWOPOINT lt dist1 gt lt dist2 gt disti lt DNPD gt and specifies the starting point for the two point calculations lt dist2 gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the ending point for the two point calculations disti and lt dist2 gt need not specify locations of actual data points on the waveform The measurement is made using the waveform point closest to dist and the waveform point closest to lt dist2 gt dist p1 and dist p2 in the query response give the actual locations of the two points TWOPOINT dist p1 dist p2 loss slope dist p1 NR2 and specifies the distance to the starting waveform point from the instrument s front panel dist p2 NR2 and specifies the distance to the ending waveform point from the front panel loss lt NR2 gt and specifies the loss in decibels between points dist p1 and dist p2 slope NR3 and specifies the calculated slope of the waveform between these points using the method specified in the CALCSLOPE command On the instrument s display the reference and active distance cursors are moved to locations dist p1 and dist p2 respectively 8 102 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Event Marking and Event Table Commands and Queries EVNTAUTOMARK Mark
151. you can perform measurements on the active waveform The WFM SELECT button on the front panel selects the active waveform Pressing WFM SELECT alternately selects the current and the reference waveform as the active waveform One of the indicators next to the WFM SELECT button lights to show which waveform is active The active waveform is displayed at a brighter intensity to differentiate it from the inactive waveform Each waveform is independent from the other and has its own set of waveform settings Measurement operation is the same as in single trace mode as described in chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements The front panel controls operate on the active waveform except for the horizontal POSITION knob and the SIZE knobs in expanded view which operate on both waveforms simultaneously Normal Density Averages 1024 Time 00 00 05 5 089 km 2 174 km Splice Loss 10 Return Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto IMaximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Avqs 1 024 45 s Dual Trace On Module 51315 13105 Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB File WEM1310 WFM Settings Figure 6 6 Dual Waveform Display 6 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Aligning Waveform Scales In dual trace mode the current and reference wavef
152. 0 0 10 0 pulse width 100 ns range 10 km The PULSRNG query returns the pulse width and range that will be used for the next acquisition if the current waveform is active If the reference waveform is active the response is the pulse width and range that were used to acquire the reference waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 85 Chapter 8 Remote Control Module Information Queries AVETIME Return the approximate averaging time for an acquisition Computed from current AVERAGES setting and required density level for the acquisition Query Syntax AVETIME density level Query Data density level lt CPD gt Possible values are NORMAL HD1 Response Syntax AVETIME minutes Response Data minutes NR2 and specifies the maximum averaging time in minutes for an acquisition Discussion Certain instrument settings automatic event marking automatic masking and FL module calculations add uncertainty to the time estimates depending on the characteristics of the fiber under test When setting a time out value for external computers add an additional one to two minutes Also see the description of the OPC query MASKOPTION Determine available automatic masking options for the currently selected module Query Syntax MASKOPTION Response Syntax MASKOPTION option Response Data option lt CRD gt Possible values are NONE Masking is not available for the currently s
153. 0 m 4000 ns 400 m 10000 ns 1 0 km Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 3 3 Pulse Width Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu The pulse width is the length of time the laser is on during each sampling acquisition also measured in distance units A sampling acquisition is the acquisition of one set of data points on the waveform The current pulse width setting is highlighted in the window The number of pulse width selections is defined by the laser source selected and may change when the laser source is changed Pulse width selections are also dependent on the current maximum range setting and vice versa Because the two parameters are interdependent the Maximum Range pop up window displays next to the Pulse Width window to show the maximum range settings that are available with the current pulse width selection If you change the pulse width and the current maximum range selection is unavailable for the new pulse width the closest available maximum range setting is automatically selected Short pulse widths permit more detail to be seen over a shorter range Use long pulse widths when you want to see more fiber at lower resolution The default pulse width 3
154. 00 05 Event Retum Loss 29 0 dB 3 000 km 10 65 dB Gain Event Return Loss Exit Return Loss Mass Storage 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Max Avgs 1 024 5 3 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LINK 100 WFM Figure 4 22 User Adjusted Event Return Loss Measurement TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 45 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 4 46 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Event Marking The previous chapter describes FiberMaster s measurement modes how to make automatic measurements on a fiber and how to make manual adjustments to the automatic measurements on the acquisition screen FiberMaster s event marking feature detects fiber features and performs these measurements automatically and combines them into a tabular format for each fiber under test When you turn event marking on FiberMaster automatically locates every event on the fiber above a defined threshold identifies these events on the acquisition screen and compiles a table containing several distance and loss measurements for each event detected In addition to its fully automatic mode the event marking feature includes provisions for manually entering measurements into the tab
155. 05M File FIG2 WFM Change Settings Hi Figure 5 10 Event Marking and Grouped Reflective Events TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 19 Chapter 5 Event Marking For FL series modules only the first event in the group is marked and the splice loss is calculated by combining the loss from all events in the group When there are no reflections found after the first event in a group or when any event in the group is masked only the first event is marked The combined splice loss of all events in the group is measured and reported on the event table Normal Density Averages 2048 Time 00 00 18 105 8 m 1 04 dB T T T 80 100 120 Mass T T Storage 140 e Event 2 Dist 105 8 m Loss 1 05 dB Event Ret Loss 29 9 dB Pulse Width 50 ns 5 m Slope Calc LSA Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 62 3 Max Avqs 2 048 15 0 s Dual Trace Off Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB Event Marking Auto Masking NA Module FM8513 850MM File FIGIL WFM Figure 5 11 Event Marking and Grouped Non Reflective Events Event Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Change Settings With two closely spaced events the tail of one reflection may extend to the second reflective event Both reflections are marked but the splice loss measurements may not be accurate In this case you can use a shorter pul
156. 1024 Event Time 00 00 09 Table 10 005 km Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss E EIE 21 0 A A Mass T T T Storage 9 600 3 800 10 000 10 200 10 400 Event 6 Dist 10 005 km Spl Loss 0 115 dB Event Ret Loss Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Manual Maximum Range 50 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Max Avgs 1 024 6 9 s Dual Trace Off Module F 1315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB File PW 2 WEM Change Settings Figure 5 17 Manually Marked Fusion Splice TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 23 Chapter 5 Event Marking Example 2 An alternative to marking the splice manually is to decrease the pulse width to obtain higher resolution on the waveform When we did this on our test fiber changing the pulse width from 1000 ns to 500 ns FiberMaster located and marked the fusion splice automatically as shown in figure 5 18 Normal Density Averages 1024 Time 00 00 17 10 001 km A 5 A Event Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss T 9 600 T 9 800 10 000 T 10 200 Event 6 Dist 10 001 km Spl Loss 0 138 dB Event Ret Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Maximum Range 50 0 km Max Avgs 1 024 10 8 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace O
157. 1315 1310SMA standard module with non standard core diameter FS1315 1310SMa modified module with standard core diameter For more information on module modifications and internal fiber core diameters in the U S and Canada call 1 800 833 9200 or contact your local Tektronix representative Five settings are specific to each laser source These are pulse width maximum range refractive index scattering coefficient and masking type refer to the following chapter for details on instrument settings and configuration When you change laser sources the values of these settings last used with the selected laser are recalled The power on defaults for the selected laser are used if no other parameter values have been specified 2 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors The power on defaults for these five settings remain in effect until changed on the User Defaults menu or if you install a different type of optical module When you install a new optical module the factory defaults for each laser are used unless the new module is the same type as the module that was removed In this case the previously defined defaults are retained and recalled for the new module s laser s If the pulse width maximum range or masking type changes when you change laser sources the parameter is highlighted in the list of waveform settings at the bottom of the acquisition screen This indicates that t
158. 1550 nm SM 1 4680 The new refractive index takes effect with the active waveform Set the scattering coefficient For best results in return loss measurements the value should match the scattering coefficient given by the fiber manufacturer Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Factory Default Discussion SCATTERCOEFF lt coeff gt lt coeff gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the scattering coefficient in dB Allowable values are from 100 0 dB to 40 0 dB inclusive SCA 80 3 850 nm MM 62 5 um core diameter 62 3 1300 nm MM 62 5 core diameter 69 7 1310 nm SM 80 3 1550 nm SM 82 3 The new scattering coefficient takes effect with the active waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 75 Chapter 8 Remote Control TIME Set system clock Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s TRACE TIME lt time gt time SPD A quoted string in the format HH MM SS where HH hour MM minute SS seconds TIM 12 22 01 12 22 09 Select dual or single trace display Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion Power On Value UNITS TRACE lt mode gt lt mode gt lt CPD gt and specifies single or dual trace display Possible values are SINGLE DUAL TRA DUAL Dual trace mode shows both current and reference waveforms using a default separation Single trace mode shows the activ
159. 17 Chapter 7 Mass Storage Quick Copy Batch Copy copies the highlighted file from the active drive to the inactive drive Pressing No cancels the operation and returns to the Copy menu The Quick Copy softkey provides a way to copy several files in succession quickly Press Quick Copy to copy the highlighted file from the active drive to the inactive drive immediately bypassing the confirmation The next file is then highlighted The Start Batch Copy softkey lets you copy some or all the files on the disk by pressing one softkey When you press Start Batch Copy files from the active drive are copied to the inactive drive starting with the currently selected file and ending when the end of the directory is reached For example to copy all the files from one drive to the other select the first file in the directory and press the Start Batch Copy softkey After you press Start Batch Copy the softkey changes to Stop Batch Copy Press the softkey again to stop the batch copy operation When the operation is stopped the softkey reverts to Start Batch Copy Exiting the Copy Menu Press the Next Menu softkey to go to the Load from Disk menu Press Exit to exit the mass storage system and return to the acquisition screen 7 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 Remote Control The FiberMaster OTDR operates directly from front panel controls or under the remote control of an instrument controller This chapter tells yo
160. 36 0 140 110 500 ns 50 m 20 5 17 5 38 0 36 0 70 55 200 ns 20 m 18 5 15 5 38 0 36 0 40 25 100 ns 10 m 17 0 14 0 38 0 36 0 25 12 50 ns 5 m 15 5 12 5 38 0 36 0 20 7 50 ns 5 m HR 12 0 9 0 34 0 33 0 15 18 7 20 ns 2 m HR 10 5 7 5 34 0 33 0 NA 5 10 ns 1 m HR 9 0 5 0 34 0 33 0 NA 3 Operating wavelengths 1310 1550 20 nm Masking menu selectable Auto QuickMask Auto AccuMask Manual QuickMask Manual AccuMask Full screen display range 50 m to 200 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs lt 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance a
161. 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based on 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 35 Chapter 1 Introduction FM1300 Multimode Optical Module Table 1 19 FM1300 Multimode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 1000 ns 100 m 26 5 38 0 125 110 500 ns 50 m 23 5 38 0 65 55 200 ns 20 m 21 5 38 0 35 25 100 ns 10 m 20 0 38 0 30 12 50 5 5 m 18 5 38 0 25 7 50 ns 5 m HR 15 0 35 0 20 7 20 ns 2 m HR 13 0 35 0 18 5 10 ns 1 m HR 15 0 35 0 14 3 Operating wavelength 1300 nm 30 nm Masking not applicable Full scre
162. 5120 which improved the signal to noise ratio enough so the automatic event marking function was able to locate the fusion splice as shown in figure 5 20 Normal Density Averages 5120 Event Time 00 00 53 Table 6 746 km 19 6 Two Point 19 2 Splice Loss 18 8 18 4 Return Loss 18 0 A Mass T T T T T Storage 5 500 6 000 6 500 7 000 7 500 Event 3 Dist 6 746 km Spl Loss 0 080 dB Event Ret Loss Pulse Width 50 ns 5 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avas 5 120 48 8 s Dual Trace Off Module F81315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB Eile AVG Figure 5 20 Fusion Splice Automatically Detected in Noise TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 25 Chapter 5 Event Marking 5 26 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Advanced Operating Functions The previous chapters describe FiberMaster s measurement modes how to make automatic optical fiber measurements and how to make basic manual adjustments to the automatic measurements In many applications automatic measurements provide all necessary data If you require more in depth fiber analysis however you can use FiberMaster s additional features which offer extended flexibility in acquiring and interpreting fiber data These functions include for example acquiring high density data for more accurate measur
163. 63 1844 XX 063 1982 XX 063 1983 XX TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix A Accessories and Options Options Table A 4 System Options Description 1 Mbyte nonvolatile RAM Internal printer assembly DC power option Keyboard and adapter cable USA format Universal European 220VAC 16A 50 Hz United Kingdom UK 240VAC 13A 50 Hz Australian 240VAC 10A 50 Hz North American 240VAC 12A 60 Hz Swiss 250VAC 6A 50Hz Table A 5 System Multimode Options Description 850 nm MM acquisition module 1300 nm MM acquisition module 850 1300 nm MM acquisition module Biconic connector MM 62 5 um FC PC connector MM 62 5 um D4 PC connector MM 62 5 um SMA 905 906 connector MM 62 5 um ST PC connector MM 62 5 um DIN PC 47256 connector MM 62 5 um Diamond 3 5 connector MM 62 5 um Diamond 2 5 connector MM 62 5 um SC PC connector MM 62 5 um SMA 2 5 connector MM 62 5 um Order FM8500 FM1300 FM8513 119 4515 00 119 4516 00 119 4514 00 119 4557 00 119 4513 00 119 4546 00 119 4558 00 119 4556 00 119 4518 00 119 4517 00 Use when ordering optics modules separately for a previously purchased mainframe TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual A 3 Appendix A Accessories and Options Table A 6 System Singlemode Options Opt Description Order 04 1310 nm SM acquisition module FS1300 05 1550 nm SM acquisition module FS1500 06 1310 1550 SM acq
164. 8 Remote Control RECEIVE response Sample response 0 00020 0 00005 Response data elements are sampling intervals in kilometers 0 00020 is the normal density sampling interval 0 00005 is the high density sampling interval SEND ACQUIRE 5 0 START HD1 OPC Run a high density acquisition at 5 0 km RECEIVE response Response 1 SEND ENCDG BIN WFMPRE Request binary waveform encoding for the CURVE query response and size and scaling information for the active waveform RECEIVE response Sample response WFID ALPHA D NR PT 16000 XINCR 0 00005 PT OFF 0 XZERO 5 0 YMULT 0 001562 YZERO 0 0 YOFF 0 0 indicating a waveform ID of ALPHA D the waveform contains 16 000 points the sample interval is 0 00005 kilometers x coordinate for the nth point on the waveform is 5 0 km n 0 00005 kilometers n 0 1 15999 the y coordinate for the nth point can be multiplied by 0 001562 to obtain a dB value SEND CURVE Return data for the active waveform RECEIVE response Sample response 532001 lt wfm_y_data gt lt checksum gt where 5 is the number of digits following which give the number of bytes remaining in the response wfm y data consists of 16 000 two byte y values and lt checksum gt is a one byte 2 s complement checksum of all preceding bytes except the SEND DIRWFM Get a directory of waveform files stored on the diskette in the instrument s disk drive RECEIVE response Sample response
165. 9 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 36 Reset and Stop Commands Remote only Command Y N Page RST Y 8 149 STOP Y 8 149 Table 8 37 Status and Error Reporting Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page CLS N 8 150 DESE N 8 150 ESE N 8 150 SRE N 8 150 Queries DESE N 8 151 ESE N 8 151 ESR N 8 151 EVENT N 8 151 EVMSG N 8 152 SRE N 8 152 STB N 8 152 Table 8 38 Device Synchronization Commands and Query Remote only Commands Y N Page OPC N 8 153 WAI N 8 153 Query OPC N 8 153 Table 8 39 Selftest Queries Remote only Queries Y N Page TST Y 8 154 TSTRESULT Y 8 154 8 70 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Remote Local Commands and Queries LOCAL Places the instrument in local control LOCS from any other remote local state RS 232 only Command Syntax LOCAL REMLOCK Places the instrument in remote control with local lockout RWLS from any other remote local state RS 232 only Command Syntax REMLOCK REMOTE Places the instrument in remote control REMS from any other remote local state RS 232 only Command Syntax REMOTE LOCAL Determines if the instrument is in local control LOCS Query Syntax LOCAL Response Syntax LOCAL option Response Data option lt NR1 gt 0 instrument is not in LOCS 1 instrument is in LOCS REMLOCK Determines if the instrument is in remote control with local lockout RWLS Q
166. 9 500 10 000 10 500 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 214 s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 4 2 Preview Mode Measuring Distance to End of Fiber TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 2 Press the EXPAND button to expand the view of the event if you need more accurate cursor positioning The example below shows the distance cursor on the leading edge of a nonreflective loss caused by a fusion splice Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 8 725 km lt lt 4 028 km 28 24 20 16 12 Mass Storage 7 000 7 500 8 000 8 500 9 000 9 500 10 000 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 214s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 4 3 Preview Mode Measuring Distance to Fusion Splice 3 The reading at the cursor is the distance from FiberMaster s front panel connector to the event In these examples the end of the fiber is 9 287 km from the front panel and the fusion splice is 8
167. An SPD element longer than 255 characters was received 8 162 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Execution Errors Execution error codes are in the ranges from 200 to 299 and 2000 to 2999 and set the EXE bit in the Standard Event Status Register 220 Parameter error unrecognized lt CPD gt element An invalid CPD element was received 220 Parameter error invalid value A numeric data element is invalid for a reason not related to range 220 Parameter error abbreviation not unique A non unique abbreviation for a lt CPD gt element has been received 220 Parameter error ON OFF 0 or 1 required Indicates that a command or query that takes an ON OFF or 0 1 argument received an invalid argument 220 Parameter error incorrect format for date The argument for the DATE command contained an incorrectly formatted date 220 Parameter error incorrect format for time The argument for the TIME command contained an incorrectly formatted time 222 Data out of range Indicates that a lt DNPD gt element was outside the valid range 241 Hardware missing printer not installed A command to write data to an internal printer was received but no printer is installed 250 Mass storage error Generic mass storage media error 250 Mass storage error no waveform data stored An attempt was made to save the current or reference waveform to mass storage when no waveform data
168. B clear the Status Byte Register except for MAV bit the Standard Event Status Register and the Event Queue but do not clear the Output Queue If the instrument is currently requesting service it releases the SRQ line and clears the RQS bit in the Status Byte Register RS 232 clear the Standard Event Status Register and Event Queue but do not clear the Output Queue Command Syntax CLS DESE Device event status enable command Specify which event types are summarized in the Standard Event Status Register and logged in the Event Queue Command Syntax DESE mask Command Data lt mask gt lt DNPD gt and sets a bit mask that indicates which types of events are summarized in the Standard Event Status Register and logged in the Event Queue Possible values are 0 to 255 inclusive Power On Default 255 all events enabled ESE Set the Standard Event Status Enable Register bits Command Syntax ESE mask Command Data lt mask gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the status byte mask value Possible values range from 0 to 255 inclusive Example s ESE 100 Power On Default 0 no events enabled SRE Set the Service Request Enable Register bits Command Syntax SRE mask Command Data masks DNPD and specifies the byte mask value for the Service Request Enable Register 0 through 255 inclusive Example s SRE 100 Power On Default 0 service requests disabled 8 150 TFP2A FiberMa
169. Bits Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 53 Figure 3 34 RS232 Data Bits Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu eere essen 3 54 Figure 3 35 RS232 Flow Control Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 55 Figure 3 36 User Defaults Menu Page 1 cease sees sesenta 3 56 Figure 3 37 User Defaults Menu Page 2 3 57 Figure 3 38 Remote Menu 3 59 Figure 4 1 Preview Mode Overview top and Expanded View bottom ecce eesssuss 4 3 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual xi List of Illustrations Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Preview Mode Measuring Distance to End of Fiber 4 7 Preview Mode Measuring Distance to Fusion Splice 4 8 Two Point Mode Two Point Slope Ca
170. CK command which causes the TFP2A to enter the RWLS state from any other remote or local state NUL Null byte The null byte 0 hex is treated as white space when it occurs in program messages This is the same as GPIB remote control REN Remote enable Emulated by sending the REMOTE command which causes the TFP2A to enter the REMS state from any other remote or local state RFD Ready for data Part of IEEE 3 wire handshake No RS 232 hardware equivalent although the RS 232 remote control interface supports XON XOFF CTS RTS and DTR DSR flow control as described in the RS 232 System Overview section RQS Request service Not emulated Error conditions in the TFP2A that require host and or operator intervention can be ascertained by querying the TFP2A s event queue with the ESR and EVMSG queries SDC Selected device clear Emulated by sending an RS 232 BREAK to the TFP2A SPD Serial poll disable SPE Serial poll enable Not emulated Refer to RQS above SRQ Service request Not emulated Refer to RQS above TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 53 Chapter 8 Remote Control Remote Control Data Formats Remote control data formats are explained in this section The following notational conventions are used in the format definitions as well as in the command and query descriptions in the following section Symbol Definition lt gt Defined element ss Is defined as Explanatory material Grouping
171. Command Data Factory Default BAUDRATE lt baudrate gt PARITY lt parity gt NSTOPBITS lt stopbits gt NCHARBITS lt charbits gt FLOW lt flowcontrol gt baudrate DNPD Possible values 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 parity lt CPD gt Possible values are NONE EVEN ODD ZERO ONE lt stopbits gt DNPD Possible values are 10 15 20 indicating 1 1 5 and 2 bits respectively lt charbits gt lt DNPD gt Possible values are 7 8 lt flowcontrol gt lt CPD gt Possible values are NONE XONXOFF RTS_CTS 9600 baud no parity 1 stop bit 8 bits character xon xoff flow control TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 89 Chapter 8 Remote Control Serial port setup queries Determine individual serial port parameters Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Discussion BAUDRATE PARITY NSTOPBITS NCHARBITS FLOW BAUD lt baudrate gt PARITY lt parity gt NSTOPBITS lt stopbits gt NCHARBITS lt charbits gt FLOW lt flowcontrol gt lt baudrate gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the serial port baud rate parity CRD and specifies the parity setting lt stopbits gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the stop bits lt charbits gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the bits per character lt flowcontrol gt CRD and specifies the flow control method See previous section on Serial port setup commands for an expl
172. Control EVNTTHRESH Set a minimum event threshold for automatic event marking All events with splice loss measurements of equal or greater magnitude are marked and included in the event table Hemote only Command Syntax EVNTTHRESH threshold Command Data threshold lt DNPD gt The value for the threshold must be in the range 0 0 to 5 0 decibels Values are converted to the nearest multiple of 0 05 Discussion Events with losses or gains below the selected threshold are not reported by the EVNTINFO query and do not appear in the event table under local operation of the instrument A threshold of 0 causes all events to be reported regardless of loss The new event threshold takes effect with the active waveform Factory Default 0 20 dB IPRNEVENTS Print the event table for the active waveform on the TFP2A internal printer Remote only Command Syntax IPRNEVENTS EVNTCOUNT Return the number of events stored in the event table Query Syntax EVNTCOUNT Response Syntax EVNTCOUNT lt numevents gt Response Data numevents lt NR1 gt and specifies the number of events included in the event table Discussion When event marking is set to automatic whether events are included in the event table depends on the current event threshold setting Refer to the EVNTTHRESH command EVNTINFO Return information for one or all events in the event table Query Syntax EVNTINFO lt eventnum gt l
173. DOW 8 99 WINDOW 8 100 X XINCR 8 119 XModem data transfer 3 59 3 60 XZERO 8 120 Y YMULT 8 120 YOFF 8 120 YZERO 8 120 Index 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual
174. ED Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 4M Removable Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRIS01 WFM HARRISOZ SET HARRISOZ WFM HARRISOS WFM HARRISDAWFM HARRISOS WEM HARRISOB WFM 07 WFM MIDLAKOT WFM MIDLAK 2Z WFM MIDLAKOS WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM iL uj Format Re movable Exit Press the appropriate softkey to Format the disk Figure 7 7 Format Menu Dual Drive Instrument For dual drive instruments if there is a disk in the floppy disk drive when you turn on the instrument that drive is the active drive If there is no floppy disk present the internal RAM is the default drive type After power on each time you enter the mass storage menus the active drive type is the one last used Exiting the Format Menu To go to the Delete menu press the Next Menu softkey To return to the acquisition screen press Exit 7 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Delete Use the Delete menu to remove a file from the selected mass storage device From the acquisition screen display the Delete menu by pressing the Mass Storage softkey then the Next Menu softkey three times Selecting a File to Delete The disk s directory is displayed on the lower half of the screen figure 7 8 The selected file in the disk directory is highlighted The file specification fields display d
175. ELECT button lights to show which waveform is active When dual trace is on and both the current and reference waveforms are displayed the dB scale is that of the active waveform The difference between the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is displayed at the top of the vertical scale To align the two waveforms vertically press and hold the WFM SELECT button The inactive waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB When dual trace is off and the view is in overview pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button zeros the waveform s position it is moved so that 0 dB is at the bottom of the vertical scale and 0 kilometers or kilofeet is at the left of the horizontal scale Store the current waveform into reference memory Any previous contents of reference memory are erased Select the next available laser source Changing the laser source requires a new acquisition When you press the MODULE SELECT button a message displays instructing you to press START STOP to acquire new data using the new laser In addition any waveform parameters that change when you change laser sources are highlighted indicating that these parameters no longer match the displayed waveform data The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired Start a new acquisition Any manually adjusted measurements are retained until you press the Splice Loss softkey to restart measurements If an a
176. ET SET are not allowed under RS 232 remote control ASCll encoded versions are available and described in the following section Waveform encoding is selected using the ENCDG command TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 61 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 15 Remote Local Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page LOCAL RS 232 only N 8 71 REMLOCK RS 232 only N 8 71 REMOTE RS 232 only N 8 71 Queries LOCAL N 8 71 REMLOCK N 8 71 REMOTE N 8 72 Table 8 16 Module Independent Settings Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page AVERAGES Y 8 73 CALCSLOPE Y 8 73 DATE Y 8 74 FIBERID Y 8 74 FIBERNOTE Y 8 74 OPERATOR Y 8 75 REFINDEX Y 8 75 SCATTERCOEFF Y 8 75 TIME Y 8 76 TRACE Y 8 76 UNITS Y 8 76 Queries AVERAGES N 8 77 CALCSLOPE N 8 77 DATE N 8 77 FIBERID N 8 78 FIBERNOTE N 8 78 OPERATOR N 8 78 REFINDEX N 8 78 SCATTERCOEFF N 8 78 TIME N 8 79 TRACE N 8 79 UNITS N 8 79 8 62 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 17 Module Dependent Settings Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page MASKSET Y 8 80 MODSELECT Y 8 81 PULSRNG Y 8 82 Queries MASKSET N 8 83 MODINFO N 8 84 MODSELECT N 8 85 PULSRNG N 8 85 Table 8 18 Module Information Queries Queries Remote only Y N Page AVETIME N 8 86 MASKOPTION N 8 86 MODLOWER N 8 86 MODUPPER N 8 87 PULSELIST N 8 87 RANGELIST N 8 88 DENSITYLIST N 8 88 Table 8 19 Seri
177. Event Code Categories ecce 8 43 Remote Local Commands and Queries seus 8 64 xiv TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual List of Tables Table 8 16 Module Independent Settings Commands and Queries 8 64 Table 8 17 Module Dependent Settings Commands and Queries 8 65 Table 8 18 Module Information Queries 8 65 Table 8 19 Serial Port Settings Commands and Queries 8 65 Table 8 20 RS 232 Remote Control 8 66 Table 8 21 Acquisition Commands 8 66 Table 8 22 Cursor Movement Command and Query 8 66 Table 8 23 Expansion Commands and Queries eese 8 66 Table 8 24 Measurement Command and Queries us 8 67 Table 8 25 Event Marking and Event Table Commands and Queries 8 67 Table 8 26 Event Marker Commands and Queries 8 68 Table 8 27 Waveform Selection and Storage Commands and Queries 8 68 Table 8 28 Waveform Data Command and Queries 8 68 Table 8 29 Response Formatting Commands and Queries 8 69 Table 8 30 Waveform Transfer Commands and Queries
178. Example s Discussion Factory Default FIBERNOTE fibernote lt fibernote gt SPD and specifies a string up to 150 characters long Only the first 150 characters are stored FIBERN REFERENCE CABLE Used to supply additional notes about the fiber under test The string is used by the next SAVECUR or SAVEREF operation waveform or settings and is printed on hard copies The new fiber notes take effect with the active waveform Null string 8 74 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control OPERATOR Store the name of the instrument operator Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Discussion REFINDEX OPERATOR lt operator gt operator SPD and specifies a string 1 25 characters long Only the first 25 characters are stored The operator string takes effect with the active waveform and is used by the next SAVECUR or SAVEREF operation waveform or settings and is printed on hard copies Set the refractive index The setting should match the fiber being tested in order to obtain best measurement results Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Factory Default Discussion SCATTERCOEFF REFINDEX lt index gt index DNPD and specifies the refractive index Allowable values are from 1 4000 and 1 6000 inclusive Values are rounded internally to the nearest 0 0001 REF 1 4000 850 nm MM 1 4776 1300 nm MM 1 4719 1310 nm SM
179. F common file format The TFP2 format is backward compatible with older TFP2 instruments The CFF format is common to Tektronix OTDR type products produced in 1995 and after The File Type field on the Load From Disk and Delete menus shows which type of file is currently selected For waveform files the file type shows TFP2 or CFF depending on the format that was used to save the file The File Type field shows Settings for settings only files and Non OTDR for all other file types The File Type field shown on the Save to Disk menu shows the file format that will be used when waveform files are saved This is the current setting of the file format parameter which is selected on the System Settings menu Loading and Saving Other OTDR Files NOTE Media Capacity You can load waveform files acquired using other Tektronix OTDR type products All Tektronix OTDR products produced in 1995 and after use the common file format and any CFF file can be loaded into the FiberMaster After loading a non FiberMaster CFF file you can change the fiber notes operator name fiber ID scattering coefficient index of refraction units of measurement fault threshold and event notes Saving the file on the FiberMaster saves the changes without affecting any other data in the file If a non FiberMaster file is loaded into current memory and you push the START STOP button to start a new acquisition all non FiberMaster data is discarded All data used b
180. FiberMaster User Manual 6 21 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions 6 22 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 Mass Storage Mass storage menus are available from the start up screen and from the acquisition Screen These menus allow you to save and recall waveform data and instrument settings on removable floppy disks and optional fixed internal RAM The data is saved in MS DOS compatible files Instrument Configuration FiberMaster can be configured with one or two mass storage devices Your instrument can have a floppy disk drive alone or a floppy disk drive plus internal RAM The mass storage menus vary depending on whether your instrument has one or two mass storage devices The illustrations in this chapter show examples of mass storage menus for both single and dual drive instruments Entering the Mass Storage Menus Enter the mass storage menus from the power on screen or the acquisition screen by pressing the Mass Storage softkey The first menu displayed is the Load from Disk menu Each menu in the system includes a list of mass storage menus across the top of the display The current menu is highlighted Each menu provides a specific mass storage function including Load from Disk Save to Disk Format Delete Copy available only on dual drive instruments C O O O If an acquisition is in progress when you enter the mass storage menus it stops until you exit When you exit mass storage the acquisition
181. GPIB Address window to set the talker and listener address for use in GPIB communications You can set the address to any value from 0 to 30 inclusive The default address is 7 The power on default value is the address last used To set the address turn the CURSOR knob clockwise to increase the number and counterclockwise to decrease it If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new GPIB address takes effect when you exit this parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys 3 50 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started RS232 Baud Rate To display the RS232 Baud Rate pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the baud rate parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 21 18 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 31 RS232 Baud Rate Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the RS232 Baud Rate window to select the baud rate used by the RS232 serial p
182. Getting Started for hardcopy device selection details When using a GPIB plotter or printer under RS 232 remote control configure the device as listen only To start a hard copy send the GPLTSCREEN or GPLTTEXT command Details on using these commands are given in the Commands and Queries section later in this chapter RS 232 Communications and Mass Storage Serial communications are ignored during mass storage operations Data can be lost if a mass storage operation is started via RS 232 and then another RS 232 command is sent before the mass storage operation is complete To avoid this problem send only one mass storage command in an RS 232 program message and terminate the message with the operation complete query OPC Then wait for the response to be returned before sending another command or query For example to save the current waveform to the file TEST WFM send the following message SAVECUR TEST OPC 4NL FiberMaster sends the response to the query 1 NL when the SAVECUR command is complete In general the recommended form for sending an RS 232 mass storage command is as follows command OPC NL The controller should read the OPC response 1 NL from FiberMaster after sending this type of message There is no need to terminate a mass storage query with OPC but use only one mass storage query in a program message For example to obtain a directory of the currently selected drive send
183. HARRISO2 SET HARRISO2 WFM HARRISO3 WFMNM HARRISO4 WFM HARRISOS WFM HARRISOB WFM 07 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIBLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKOS WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM Format Exit Press the appropriate softkey to Format the disk Figure 7 6 Format Menu Single Drive Instrument must be in the drive before pressing the softkey A pop up window displays asking you to confirm the format operation Two softkeys display Yes and No Yes formats the disk and returns to the Format menu No returns to the Format menu without formatting the disk CAUTION Be careful when formatting both removable and fixed media Any data already on the media is erased TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 13 Chapter 7 Mass Storage Selecting the Drive For instruments equipped with both internal RAM and a floppy disk drive figure 7 7 softkeys allow you to specify which drive to format Format Fixed and Format Removable Pressing Format Fixed formats the internal RAM Pressing Format Removable formats a floppy disk In both cases you are asked to confirm the operation and two softkeys display Yes and No Pressing Yes formats the selected device Pressing No cancels the operation Load Save Delete s From Disk To Disk aid Next FILE SPECIFICATION Menu Drive Type Removable File Type TFP2 File Name HARRISO1 WFM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERV
184. If the hardcopy device selected is an external GPIB plotter or printer FiberMaster automatically switches temporarily to talk only status when the user presses the HARDCOPY button When the plotter is finished the status is reset to its previous value online or offline Address and status change requests are not allowed when the instrument is in talk only mode and sending data to a GPIB plotter or printer 8 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Communications Communication between the controller and FiberMaster takes place using interface messages defined by IEEE 488 1 common commands defined by IEEE 488 2 and device dependent messages IEEE 488 1 Interface Messages Interface messages control the operation of the 488 1 bus only and do not control device operations There are two types of interface messages uniline and multiline Uniline messages are sent by asserting one of the general interface management lines They include IFC ATN REN SRQ and END IFC ATN and REN are sent from the controller to the instrument SRQ is sent by the instrument to the controller to request service END is sent by either the controller or the instrument to terminate a program or response message respectively A multiline message is transferred on the GPIB DIO lines while ATN is asserted These messages are used for control functions such as device addressing serial polling clearing the instrument I O fron
185. KING 8 106 EVNTMARKING 8 110 EVNTMEAS 8 106 EVNTNOTES 8 106 EVNTNOTES 8 110 EVNTRTNLOSS 8 102 EVNTTHRESH 8 107 EVNTTHRESH 8 110 Exit Return Loss softkey in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 4 EXPAND 8 98 EXPAND button 2 9 6 2 6 6 in Event Return Loss mode 4 42 in Link Return Loss mode 4 33 in Preview mode 4 5 in Splice Loss mode 4 25 in Two Point mode 4 13 EXPAND 8 100 expansion window 1 9 2 8 6 2 6 6 and high density data 6 9 in dual trace mode 6 12 F FETCHID 8 139 FETCHNOTE 8 139 FETCHOPER 8 140 FG1300 optical module 1 30 FG1315 optical module 1 31 FG series optical module 3 4 5 19 Index 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual fiber cleaning 1 39 1 40 connecting to FiberMaster 3 1 general analysis of 1 4 1 5 fiber ID 3 32 7 10 fiber notes 3 32 7 10 FIBERID 8 76 FIBERID 8 80 FiberMaster data format C 1 C 2 file types 7 2 powering on 3 1 product description 1 1 1 3 unpacking and preparation for use 1 14 1 20 FIBERNOTE 8 76 FIBERNOTE 8 80 file format 3 45 7 7 file name 7 9 file specifications 7 7 7 10 FILE 8 127 FILHIGH 8 125 FILNORM 8 125 FILSET 8 125 filtering 3 30 filters 1 41 firmware features E 1 E 3 firmware version 3 1 firmware upgrading E 2 E 3 FL1300 optical module 1 32 FL1315 optical module 1 34 FL1500 optical module 1 33 floppy disk drive 7 1 7 18 FLOW 8 91 FLOW 8 92 FL series optical modul
186. Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 30 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 096 Weight 4 4 lbs 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm Dynamic range specifications are based on 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings 2 Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise 4 Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter Specifications are based on reflections not to exceed a return loss of 40 dB 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection Performance specifications are at 25 C TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 31 Chapter 1 Introduction FL1300 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 15 FL1300 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 20 us 2000 m 37 5 46 0 2375 2100 10
187. Load sss 7 3 Loading a Waveform File sss seien 7 4 Loading a Settings File esses eite 7 5 Quick Load eo cete ice ee Hte docu enne 7 5 Exiting the Load from Disk 7 6 Save to Disk ci e Poire et eR Toe reae Po eundo ado 7 7 FUG FOrmatias ct tp ets t eget bebe 7 7 File Specificalions attt 7 7 Saving the FIG ssi eles tee ur eae ets 7 11 Quick Save t nee b PE 7 11 Exiting the Save to Disk 7 12 POMIMN AL sais 7 13 Selecting the Drive sicco RE Pee Hace 7 14 Exiting the Format Menu esses eintreten 7 14 DON CIC e 7 15 Selecting a File to Delete sss 7 15 Exiting the Delete Menu e sessi 7 16 REESE EE RE E EUER SERERE 7 17 QUICK CODy iiti ED ERROR ED ELI HERR ARX SERERE 7 18 Batch GOD ien ct e eee eee sepe to Ee eoe 7 18 Exiting the Copy eene 7 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual vii Table of Contents 8 Remote opa FA esa RUE 8 1 GPIB System eine eae rina Ea aa eaa aeaea 8 1 GPIB Sighial EInes eot o rh 8 2 GPIB Interface Functions esses esee eene enn 8 3 GPIB Aadressing idea ctt d ne ER
188. MM 1300 nm MM 1310 nm SM 1550 nm SM FL series 1310 SM 1550 SM Index of refraction range Distance measurement accuracy 1 to 200 km 5 cm to 2 m normal density 1 cm to 50 cm high density 20 cm to10 m normal density 10 cm to 2 m high density 2m to 10 m normal density no high density 1 4000 to 1 6000 0 001 Xminimum cursor resolution tuncertainty in index of refraction Number of displayed waveform points Table 1 3 Display gt 16 000 maximum for each normal and high density Table 1 4 Keyboard Size 7 inches 17 5 cm diagonal Resolution 640 by 480 pixels Display type Color Two color system giving three colors with five levels each Monochrome Five level gray scale Connector 5 pin RJ11 Compatibility Compatible with IBM AT keyboards input only but complete compatibility can be guarenteed only with Tektronix keyboard Option 19 1 22 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 5 Hardcopy Internal printer High speed high resolution dot matrix thermal Resolution 150 dots in vertical and horizontal Print dimensions 4 in by 5 in 10 2 cm by 12 7 cm External plotter HP GL compatible Tektronix HC100 GPIB and RS232 connections External printer Epson FX compatible RS232 connection Hewlett Packard ThinkJet LaserJet compatible GPIB and RS232 connections PostScript compatible RS232
189. Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control System Events There are three types of system events 1 The power on event PON 2 The operation complete event OPC Refer to the description of the OPC command in the Commands and Queries section later in this chapter 3 The user request event URQ which occurs when you press a softkey programmed by the SOFTKEY command while the instrument is in REMS Execution Warnings An execution warning occurs when 1 a command or query parameter is adjusted to the nearest legal value or 2 a command refers to data that is not currently stored in the instrument Internal Warnings An internal warning is caused by a command or query execution failure but does not indicate as serious a failure as an internal error For example an internal warning would occur in response to a timeout on a data transfer to an external device such as a plotter or a printer out of paper error Event Code and Message Formats In response to the EVENT and EVMSG queries event codes are formatted as unsigned decimal integers Event messages are returned as string response data up to 256 characters in total length Refer to the EVENT and EVMSG query descriptions in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter Event messages may be in one of nine formats 1 message message specifics 2 3 message Header lt header gt 4 lt gt Header header Parameter
190. N OFF A number that rounds to an integer value of 0 can be used instead of OFF A number that rounds to a nonzero integer value can be used instead of ON Discussion Interface status is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen when the instrument is under remote control The following information is displayed MA My Address nn indicates the current bus address of the instrument LSTN Addressed to listen indicator TALK Addressed to talk indicator SRQ Service request indicator set when the service request line is asserted Status indicators are erased when the instrument returns to local control and are redisplayed upon returning to remote control TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 143 Chapter 8 Remote Control MESSAGE Post a text message on the instrument display screen Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Discussion MESSAGE msg type msg msg type lt CPD gt Possible values are INFORM REQUEST ERROR INFORM Informative message REQUEST User request ERROR Error indication The color of the message on the display depends on the message type msg SPD and is the text of the message to display up to a maximum of 150 characters The display area reserved for the message is 50 characters by three lines in size To cause text to wrap to the next line an ASCII newline character 0A hex can be inserted in the message A null string clears any me
191. Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 6 453 km Loss 1 230 dB km 9 287 km T 0 2 T 8 T 4 349 dB Event Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Maximum Range 10 0 km Max Avgs 20 480 21 4 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 20 dB Masking Off Event Marking Auto Module F31315 13105M File LSJU76 WEM Change Settings Figure 4 7 Automatic Two Point Measurement Positioning the Second Distance Cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 17 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements To make manual adjustments to automatic measurements use the vertical and slope Loss knobs to adjust the active loss cursor so it is aligned with the waveform The cursor extends from the opposite distance cursor to the edge of the display as shown below in expanded view Fit the cursor so there is an equal number of noise spikes above and below it 9 283 km 18 21 479 dB Two Point 18 8 Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage Normal Density Averages 20480 Event User Adjusted Measurement Time 00 00 31 Loss 1 230 dB km Table 18 4 18 0 17 6 17 2 16 8 T T 8 600 8 800 9 000 9 200 Pulse Width 500 ns 50
192. Optional may be omitted Preceding element be repeated Exclusive OR Program Messages Program messages are device dependent messages used to program FiberMaster via GPIB or RS 232 They consist of a sequence of one or more commands or queries A program message that contains a query is called a query message Each program message sent to FiberMaster must be terminated in one of the following ways GPIB 1 Assert the IEEE 488 1 END line concurrently with the last data byte sent 2 Sendan ASCII newline character 0A hex as the last data byte of the message or 3 Send an ASCII newline character as the last data byte of the message concurrently with asserting the END line RS 232 1 Send an ASCII newline character as the last data byte of the message White space can be freely used within a program message with the following exceptions Itcannot be embedded within the text of a command or query header or character program data CPD element It cannot be embedded within a signed or unsigned integer that is part of a decimal numeric program data DNPD element It cannot appear within the string program data SPD elements used for the TIME and DATE commands White space is required between a command or query header and a following data element It consists of a sequence of one or more ASCII characters in the range 0 to 9 hex or OB to 20 hex all ASCII control characters and space but e
193. P2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Mass Storage Commands NOTE Serial communications are ignored during mass storage operations Data can be lost if a mass storage operation is started via RS 232 and then another RS 232 command is sent before the mass storage operation is complete To avoid this problem send only one mass storage command in an RS 232 program message and terminate the message with the operation complete query OPC Then wait for the response to be returned before sending another command or query BATCHCOPY Copy multiple files from the internal drive to the external drive or from the external drive to the internal drive Remote only Command Syntax BATCHCOPY wildcard Command Data wildcard SPD and specifies a wildcard character that indicates the files to be copied as follows Use to copy all files Use SET to copy all settings files Use WFM to copy all waveform files The and wildcard characters are supported The matches any sequence of characters not including a dot and the matches any single character except a dot Discussion Files are copied from the currently selected drive to the other Note that file name extensions must be explicitly given as opposed to commands such as COPYSET which assumes a SET extension or COPYWFM which assumes a WFM extension Extensions can also be specified with wildcards for example FIBERO5 Example
194. P2A display If there is a problem with your instrument that you cannot resolve call our toll free help line at 1 800 TEK WIDE ext 2400 File System Error Codes The following file system errors may occur during the process of loading new software into the TFP2A Table F 1 File System Error Codes Error Code Description FS 1 FS 2 FS 3 Unable to allocate memory for file system File name invalid or file does not exist Invalid pathname FS 4 FS 5 FS 6 Too many files open Incompatible file access or file is not open for access Invalid file handle FS 12 FS 13 FS 14 Invalid access mode Recovered error in data Unrecovered error in data FS 15 FS 17 FS 18 Invalid device Incorrect device for this operation No more directory entries satisfy request FS 19 FS 20 FS 21 Invalid file truncation Device or media write protected Invalid directory of FAT table FS 22 Hardware error on device TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual F 1 Appendix F Error Codes Table F 1 File System Error Codes cont Error Code Description FS 23 Directory already exists FS 24 Directory full FS 25 Directory to be deleted not empty FS 26 Invalid disk label FS 27 Disk full FS 28 Duplicate file directory name FS 29 Invalid operation on current path FS 30 Disk I O error abort FS 31 Timeout on disk I O FS 34 Disk not formatted FS 66 Ambiguou
195. PD gt and specifies the number of the marker for which the distance is to be returned Response Syntax MARKERDIST lt distance gt Response Data distance lt NR2 gt and gives the location of the marker in distance units kilometers or kilofeet NUMMARKERS Return the number of markers shown on the Place Event Markers screen Query Syntax NUMMARKERS Response Syntax NUMMARKERS lt nummarkers gt Response Data lt nummarkers gt lt NR1 gt Discussion The NUMMARKERS response includes all markers on the Place Event Markers screen This includes all marked events regardless of the event threshold setting TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 109 Chapter 8 Remote Control SHOWMARKERS Return whether event markers are on or off on the instrument display Query Syntax SHOWMARKERS Response Syntax SHOWMARKERS option Response Data option lt NR1 gt and specifies that event markers are off or on Possible values are 0 1 off 1 on 8 110 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Waveform Selection and Storage Commands and Queries STORE Save the current waveform and associated settings to reference memory Remote only Command Syntax STORE WFMSELECT Select the active waveform waveform used for measurements and waveform settings queries Remote only Command Syntax WFMSELECT waveform Command Data waveform lt CPD gt and specifies which
196. PSON or POSTSCRIPT the data is intended for transferring via GPIB A response header is never sent for this query GPLTSCREEN must be sent as the last or only query ina program message because it asserts the END line after the data is sent HPGL plotters only the display is scaled to A size 8 5 by 11 inches on the plotter For more information on sending data to a GPIB hardcopy device refer to the section Using a GPIB Plotter or Printer in this chapter NOTE The response for this query is not a 488 2 compatible response data format TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 141 Chapter 8 Remote Control NOTE GPLTTEXT Return printer or plotter commands to draw a text string Remote only GPIB only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion GPLTTEXT lt text gt lt x gt lt y gt lt text gt SPD specifying the text string to print or plot 80 characters maximum The escape characters n and Ww can be used in text to send a newline character or a carriage return character to the printer or plotter The escape character M can be used in text to send a form feed character to a printer HPGL plotter x and y lt DNPD gt specifying in plotter coordinates the desired location of the text string The text string is left justified at this location The x and y coordinates are relative to the minimum x and y hard clip limits of the plotter ThinkJet
197. Parameter Keyboard Functions Key Function Home Move the cursor to the first character in the string End Move the cursor to the last character in the string Page Down Delete the characters from the cursor to the end of the string lt Move the cursor left or right Delete Delete the character before the cursor Del keypad Delete the character that the cursor is on Mass Storage Menu System Functions The following key sequences are available on the mass storage menus in addition to the general menu system functions listed on the previous page Table B 5 Mass Storage Keyboard Functions Key Function Home Move the directory cursor to the first file name in the directory End Move the directory cursor to the last file name in the directory lt Move the directory cursor left or right TX Move the directory cursor up or down TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual B 3 Appendix B Keyboard Definitions Acquisition Screen Functions The following key sequences are available on the acquisition screen Table B 6 Acquisition Screen Keyboard Functions Key Function lt Move the distance cursor left or right Alt 4 Resize the expansion box or change the waveform scale Ctrl 57 Position the waveform Alt C Cursor select Alt J Join cursors Alt E Expand Alt W Waveform select Alt A Align waveforms dual trace mode Alt P Store the current waveform
198. RATE HDR PARITY ESE CALCSLOPE HDR PULSELIST ESE DATE HEADER PULSRNG ESR DATE HEADER RANGELIST DENSITYLIST MASKOPTION REFINDEX LRN DESE MASKSET SET DESE MESSAGE SOFTKEY ENCDG MODINFO STOP RST ENCDG MODLOWER TIME SRE EVENT MODSELECT TIME SRE EVMSG MODUPPER TRACE STB FIBERID NCHARBITS TWOPOINT WAI FLOW NCHARBITS UNITS AVERAGES FLOW NSTOPBITS WFMSELECT AVETIME GSTATUS NSTOPBITS BAUDRATE GSTATUS PARITY TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 93 Chapter 8 Remote Control Cursor Command and Query CURSOR Set the position distance of the distance cursors Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion CURSOR CURSOR lt cursor gt lt dist gt cursor lt CPD gt and specifies which cursor is to position Possible values are ACTIVE INACTIVE dist lt DNPD gt and specifies the distance where the cursor will be positioned in distance units kilometers or kilofeet lt dist gt need not specify the location of a data point on the waveform The cursor is positioned at the waveform scale increment a data point if the distance specified is on the waveform nearest the specified distance CURS ACTIVE 2 549 If the instrument is in Splice Loss or Event Return Loss mode the inactive distance cursor is not visible although its position can be set If the active distance cursor is moved out of the expans
199. RS 232 The service request generation part of the status reporting is removed for RS 232 remote control Message Termination Under GPIB remote control the controller must send one of data byte END lt NL4 lt ENDs or lt NL gt to terminate a program message FiberMaster always terminates a response message by lt NL gt 4 lt END gt Under RS 232 remote control lt NL gt serves as the sole terminator for both program and response messages TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 49 Chapter 8 Remote Control Buffer Sizes The following table gives the FiberMaster buffer sizes in bytes used for remote control External Hardcopy Under GPIB remote control the commands SPLTSCREEN and SPLTTEXT can be used to generate hardcopy on an RS 232 printer or plotter connected to FiberMaster s RS 232 port The GPLTSCREEN and GPLTTEXT queries are used to send data to a GPIB plotter or printer on the GPIB bus The controller is required to address the plotter or printer to listen before sending the GPLTSCREEN or GPLTTEXT query to FiberMaster These commands and queries are GPIB only and not available under RS 232 remote control Under RS 232 remote control the commands GPLTSCREEN and GPLTTEXT can be used to generate hardcopy on a GPIB plotter or printer connected to FiberMaster s GPIB port The plotter or printer must be configured for listen only mode Since RS 232 remote control does not support multidrop configura
200. Refractive Index To display the Refractive Index pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the refractive index parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu 6 458 km 4 028 km Refractive Index 40 Next 4680 the CURSOR knob to change the highlighted number Je su Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Exit Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Ref Index 1 4580 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJLI78 WFM Figure 3 6 Refractive Index Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Refractive Index window to specify the refractive index of the fiber under test You can set the refractive index to any value from 1 4000 to 1 6000 inclusive This value is characteristic of the fiber and can vary from fiber to fiber The refractive index can be obtained from the fiber manufacturer The factory default refractive index values depend on the laser source as follows LY 850 nm MM 1 4776 LY 1300 nm MM 1 4719 Q 1310 SM 1 4680 1550 nm SM 1 4685 You can set a different power on refractive index for the currently selected laser source using the User Defaults menu described later
201. S 232 Appendices contain information that applies to general operation of the instrument They include a list of options and accessories available for use with the FiberMaster OTDR a description of the instrument s data output a list of keyboard sequences recognized by the instrument how to run the instrument s diagnostic self tests a list of firmware versions a list of start up error codes and instructions on how to upgrade software via floppy disk 1 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Conventions Used in this Manual In the text of this manual references to front panel controls and softkeys appear in boldface type for example Press the START STOP button Change instrument settings by pressing the Change Settings softkey Remote control commands and messages as sent and received by the instrument are shown indented and in upper case boldface type ACQUIRE 10 0 START NORMAL OPC Change and History Information Change information that involves manual corrections and additional data is located at the back of this manual in the Change Information section History information with the updated data is integrated into the text or diagrams when a page is updated TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Unpacking and Preparation for Use Before unpacking FiberMaster from its shipping container or carton inspect for signs of external damage If the carton is dam
202. S232 Epson Online 7 9600 bits per second None 1 8 XON XOFF TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started The settings marked with an asterisk are always reset to the initial factory set values at power on For example every time you turn on the instrument it enters Preview mode User selected power on defaults can be defined for the remaining settings except GPIB address via the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Until you specify a user defined default the factory default is used as the power on default When you change languages the newly selected language is automatically saved as the power on default The GPIB address is factory set to 7 The power on default is always the value last used TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 5 Chapter 3 Getting Started Using FiberMaster s Online Help FiberMaster s online help system consists of pop up windows that overlay the screen when you press the HELP button These windows provide brief information on the current display When you are making measurements on a fiber the current measurement mode is described on the screen that appears when you press the HELP button You can also read help on how the controls function in the current mode by turning the knobs and pushing the buttons Each action brings up an additional help screen that describes the function of that control When you are working in the menu system to configure the
203. SIZE Knob de aper E EXER 6 5 Distance CURSOR Knob sss 6 5 CURSOR SELECT 6 6 Extending the Acquisition Range e eeeeeer ener e erret nnn 6 7 High Density Data Acquisition eere eren r nennen ernannt nnn nn 6 9 Parameter Settings and High Density Data Acquisition 6 10 Storing High Density Data sss eene 6 10 Dual Trace 6 11 Aligning Waveform Scales sse 6 12 Changing Instrument Settings sse 6 12 The Expansion WindOW tete e Pp oe 6 12 High Density Data Acquisition seen 6 13 Real Time Acquisition eurer esee eerie enne 6 14 Setting Manual Masks gt eerie 6 15 Entering the Place Manual Masks 6 16 Adjusting MasKS s 4 sep eo the t ta eR oes 6 17 Implementing Manual Masks 6 19 Clearing and Replacing Manual Masks sse 6 19 Exiting the Place Manual Masks 6 20 f Mass SIOrage dri tas ear E URINE EK 7 1 Load from Disk 1 rer riidisecoi dts 7 3 Selecting a File to
204. Settings Menu Use the Parity window to set the RS232 serial port parity The parity is used for serial plotter and serial printer hardcopy During XModem data transfers parity is temporarily set to none automatically regardless of the menu setting The factory default parity setting is None You can set a different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Change the parity selection by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new parity setting takes effect when you exit the Parity parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit keys 3 52 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started RS232 Stop Bits To display the RS232 Stop Bits pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the stop bits parameter is highlighted Waveform Settings SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Sound On change the selection Time 18 24 03 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format Units Metric 1 0 Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Operator User Settin
205. Softkey then pressing the Next Menu softkey three times Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Turn the CURSOR KNOB to scroll up for previous page Menu FL1315 13105M L1 FL1315 13105M L1 Save Param Pulse Width Maximum Range L1 2000 ns 200 m 100 0 km 2000 ns 200 m 100 0 km Refractive Index L1 1 4680 1 4680 Save Scattering Coefficient L1 80 3 80 3 All Maximum Averages 20 480 20 480 Masking Type Restore All Filtering FL modules Event Marking Restore Event Threshold 0 20 dB 0 20 dB Factory Units Metric Metric Display Intensity Medium Medium Turn the CURSOR KNOB to scroll down for next page Figure 3 36 User Defaults Menu Page 1 Use the User Defaults menu to define power on defaults for instrument parameters that accept user definable defaults These parameters are listed on the User Defaults menu screen along with their current default values and their current settings The Default Setting column lists the power on default settings Note that the pulse width maximum range refractive index scattering coefficient and masking type shown in the Default Setting column apply to the currently selected optical module shown in the Current Setting column The optical modules are designated by position on the User Defaults menu The laser locations are referred to as U1 U2 L1 and L2 and designate the two possible lasers in th
206. Status Register The eight bits of the Standard Event Status Register SESR log individual events occurring in the instrument The SESR is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on after being read by sending the ESR query and when the CLS command is issued The bit definitions of the SESR are listed below When a defined event occurs and is enabled by the DESER the corresponding bit is turned on in the SESR and an event code and message pair is logged in the Event Queue Bit 7 Power On PON When set to 1 the power on bit indicates that the instrument has been turned off and then turned on since the last time the SESR was read Bit 6 User Request URQ When the URQ bit is set to 1 it indicates that the user has pressed a softkey programmed using the SOFTKEY command Read the Event Queue entry for this event to determine which key was pressed Bit 5 Command Error CME The CME bit is turned on when the instrument detects a command error Command errors can be caused by 1 command or query syntax errors and 2 semantic errors For example an unimplemented or incorrectly spelled command or query will generate a command error Bit 4 Execution Error EXE The EXE bit is turned on when FiberMaster detects an error during the execution of a command Execution errors can occur when command parameters are outside the legal range for the instrument or are inconsistent with a current instrument mode or operation Bit 3 Devic
207. T button to move the inactive cursor to the same location as the active cursor Switch between overview and expanded view Expanded view distance measurements may be at higher resolution Using the expansion window and working with high density data are explained in more detail in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions In overview expand and contract the expansion window vertically In expanded view the vertical SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself vertically When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the vertical SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor In overview expand and contract the expansion window horizontally In expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself horizontally This does not affect distance measurements unless you expand into or out of high density data When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor Move the active waveform up and down on the display It is possible to move the waveform off the display When dual trace mode is on the vertical POSITION knob operates only on the active waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements
208. TB are defined Bit 4 Message Available MAV The MAV bit is turned on when FiberMaster has response data in the Output Queue Bit 5 Event Status Bit ESB The ESB is turned on when an enabled standard event has occurred and has been logged in the SESR 8 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Bit 6 Master Summary Status Bit MSS The MSS bit indicates that the instrument has at least one reason to request service one or both of the ESB and MAV bits is set in the STB and in the Service Request Enable Register The MSS bit is sent in response to the STB query but not in response to the serial poll It is not considered part of the IEEE 488 1 Status Byte Bit 6 Request Service Bit RQS Bit 6 also functions as the RQS bit which is turned on when the instrument raises the SRQ line to request service SRQ is raised when an enabled bit ESB or MAV is set in the Status Byte Register When SRQ is raised the controller typically starts a serial poll to determine which device requested service The instrument sends the Status Byte in response to the serial poll then clears the RQS bit Service Request Enable Register Input Buffer Output Queue GPIB Softkeys The Service Request Enable Register SRER determines which bits in the Status Byte Register generate a service request to the controller Bits 4 and 5 of the SRER enable service request generation when the MAV and ESB bits of the Status Byte R
209. TST 8 157 TSTRESULT 8 157 Two Point mode 4 9 4 21 Two Point softkey in Preview mode 4 4 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 in Two Point mode 4 12 TWOPOINT 8 105 TYPEFILE 8 140 U UNITS 8 78 units 3 43 UNITS 8 81 universal connector cleaning and changing 1 39 1 40 unpacking and preparation for use 1 14 1 20 User Defaults menu 3 56 WAI 8 156 waveform adjusting position 2 10 adjusting size 2 8 aligning in dual trace mode 4 6 4 15 4 26 4 34 4 43 6 12 general OTDR analysis of 1 4 1 5 waveform file 7 2 C 1 loading from mass storage 7 4 saving to mass storage 7 11 Waveform Settings menu 3 9 3 29 5 4 dualtrace 3 22 event marking 3 25 3 26 event threshold 3 23 3 24 filtering 3 30 masking type 3 27 3 29 maximum averages 3 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index 9 maximum range 3 12 3 13 pulse width 3 10 3 11 refractive index 3 16 3 17 scattering coefficient 3 20 3 21 slope calculation 3 18 3 19 waveform active 1 10 2 10 3 22 4 5 4 6 4 14 4 15 4 26 4 34 4 42 4 43 6 11 6 12 6 13 8 114 8 115 8 117 8 119 8 127 wavelength how to select 2 4 WFID 8 118 WFM SELECT button 2 10 in Event Return Loss mode 4 43 in Link Return Loss mode 4 34 in Preview mode 4 6 in Splice Loss mode 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 15 WFMINT 8 116 WFMINT 8 118 WFMPRE 8 119 WFMSELECT 8 114 WFMSELECT 8 114 WFMSOURCE 68 115 WINCURSOR 8 98 WINDISTANCE 8 99 WIN
210. User Manual Tektronix TFP2A FiberMaster Optical Time Domain Reflectometer 070 9189 03 This document applies to firmware version T1 2E and above Earlier instruments may not include all features describedin this manual Referto appendix E First Printing November1998 Copyright 1998 Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Tektronix Inc Products of Tektronix Inc and its subsidiaries are covered by U S and foreign patents and or pending patents TEKTRONIX TEK and FiberMaster are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Printed in U S A Specification and price change privileges are reserved Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 WARNING This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual may cause interference to radio communica lions It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pur suant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designated to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference EC
211. WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRISO1 WFM HARRISO2 SET HARRISO2 WFM HARRISO3 WFM HARRISO04 WFM HARRISQ5 WFM HARRISO6 WFM HARRISO7 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIDLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKO3 WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM Exit Select filename w CURSOR knob press Copy softkey Figure 7 10 Copy Menu Dual Drive Instrument Copy Quick Copy The directory area of the Copy menu lists the contents of the active drive Pressing the Switch Drives softkey displays the directory of the other drive The Drive Type field in the file specification area of the screen indicates which drive is active Fixed refers to the internal RAM and Removable refers to the floppy disk drive You can then select the file to copy from the active drive s directory For dual drive instruments if there is a disk in the floppy disk drive when you turn on the instrument that drive is the active drive If there is no floppy disk present the internal RAM is the default drive type After power on each time you enter the mass storage menus the active drive type is the one last used Select a file by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight the file name After the cursor is stationary the file specification fields are updated to show data for the currently selected file Perform the copy operation by pressing the Copy softkey A pop up window displays asking you to confirm the copy Two softkeys are shown Yes and No Pressing Yes TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7
212. When using a GPIB device as the hardcopy device GPIB status is temporarily set to talk only when the HARD COPY button is pressed When the plotter or printer finishes the hard copy the setting automatically reverts to its original value To select the GPIB status setting turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The GPIB status setting takes effect when you exit this parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 49 Chapter 3 Getting Started GPIB Address To display the GPIB Address pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the GPIB address parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Tum the CURSOR knob to Sound On change the highlighted number Time 18 19 52 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y GPIB Address Units Metric Remote Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 30 GPIB Address Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the
213. ace Event Markers Screen Moving Event Marker 5 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Examples Moving a marker 1 Press Next Marker until the distance cursor is located on the marker you want to move 2 Press Move Marker 3 Turn the CURSOR knob to move the distance cursor and the marker to the new location Press EXPAND to expand the view if necessary for precise marker placement 4 Press Leave Marker Adding a marker 1 Turn the CURSOR knob to move the distance cursor to the leading edge of the event where you want a new marker Press EXPAND to expand the view if necessary 2 Press Add Marker Deleting a marker 1 Press Next Marker until the distance cursor is located on the marker you want to delete 2 Press Remove Marker Automatic Measurements with Manually Placed Markers The measurements for an event marker depend on the locations of the adjacent event markers to determine how much data is used Adding moving and removing a marker therefore requires that some measurements be recalculated as follows Adding or moving a marker recalculates all event measurements for that marker as well as automatically entered measurements for both markers to its left and right Manually entered measurements for neighboring markers are not recalculated 1 Removing a marker recalculates the automatically entered measurements for both neighboring markers but not any manually entered on
214. acement 5 22 Figure 5 16 Unmarked Fusion Splice eese eese ee tnn 5 23 Figure 5 17 Manually Marked Fusion Splice eese 5 23 Figure 5 18 Automatically Marked Fusion Splice 5 24 Figure 5 19 Fusion Splice Undetected in Noise s 5 24 Figure 5 20 Fusion Splice Automatically Detected in Noise 5 25 Figure 6 1 The Expansion WindoOW eere erreur nina nnn nnn 6 2 Figure 6 2 Moving the Expansion Window 6 4 Figure 6 3 Short Acquisition 6 7 Figure 6 4 Cursor Past Acquisition Range and Resulting Promptl 6 8 Figure 6 5 Extended Acquisition eere seen e einen neni in nnn nnn nnn 6 8 Figure 6 6 Dual Waveform Display eere creer 6 11 Figure 6 7 Place Manual Masks Screen 6 15 Figure 7 1 Load from Disk Menu Single Drive Instrument 7 3 Figure 7 2 Load Menu Dual Drive Instrument seen 7 4 Figure 7 3 Quick Load eese ana aa rasa anna 7 6 Figure 7 4 Save Menu Dual Drive Instrument 7 8 Figure 7
215. ad from numeric digits to cursor functions TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix B Keyboard Definitions Menu System Functions The following key sequences are available when in the menu system including the mass storage menus Table B 2 Menu System Keyboard Functions Key Function Return Display next parameter menu Shift Return Display previous parameter menu Esc Restore previous value for current parameter TL For menus with selections listed move selection up or down For menus with numeric parameters increase or decrease the value The following key sequences apply to the numeric parameters Table B 3 Menu System Numeric Parameter Keyboard Functions Key Function 0 through 9 For menus with numeric parameters including the time and date parameters shift the typed digit in from the right Delete For menus with numeric parameters shift the rightmost digit out Tab For the time and date parameters move to the next field hours minutes or seconds or day month or year Shift Tab For the time and date parameters move to the previous field For the time parameter move to the next field same as the Tab key For the date parameter move to the next field same as the Tab key B 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix B Keyboard Definitions The following key sequences apply to the character string parameters Table B 4 Menu System Alphanumeric
216. age and Prev Page softkeys to scan through the events or scroll through the events using the CURSOR knob Enter Current Meas allows you to make manual entries to the event table as follows 1 Onthe acquisition screen move the distance cursor to an event marker and make either a splice loss or event return loss measurement For example you can adjust the expansion window to optimize the automatic measurement or you can manually adjust the loss cursors 2 From the acquisition screen press the Event Table softkey to enter the Event Table screen Because you have made or changed a splice loss measurement or an event return loss measurement for the current event the Enter Current Meas softkey is now available The Enter Current Meas softkey is not available on the Event Table screen unless you make an automatic splice loss or event return loss measurement or you make manual adjustments to either measurement for the event currently highlighted on the event table 3 Atthe bottom of the screen a message informs you of the value type and location of the current measurement To replace the existing event table measurement with the new value press the Enter Current Meas softkey The new measurement is entered into the event table and an asterisk indicates that it was entered manually For automatically placed event markers if a new splice loss measurement is below the current event threshold setting the event is deleted from the eve
217. aged notify the carrier The shipping carton contains the instrument and its standard and optional accessories If the contents of the shipping container are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defects or if the instrument does not meet operational check requirements contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative If the shipping container is damaged notify the carrier as well as Tektronix The instrument was inspected both mechanically and electrically before shipment It should be free of mechanical damage and meet or exceed all electrical specifications Functional and operational self tests are performed at power on If your instrument fails to perform satisfactorily contact your Tektronix representative immediately or in the U S and Canada telephone toll free 1 800 TEK WIDE ext 2400 Preparation for Use Use FiberMaster s front cover to protect the front panel when storing and transporting the instrument Remove the cover by pulling out on the sides and lifting off Replace the cover by pressing it over the front panel until the cover snaps in place The instrument s accessories are stored in the soft carrying case You can position FiberMaster s handle to serve as a tilt stand or you can move it to the front of the instrument so the instrument can be stacked or carried To position the handle press in at both pivot points and rotate to the desired position Power Source and Power Hequirements CAUTION
218. al Port Settings Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page BAUD GPIB only Y 8 89 FLOW GPIB only Y 8 89 NCHARBITS GPIB only Y 8 89 NSTOPBITS GPIB only Y 8 89 PARITY GPIB only Y 8 89 Queries BAUD N 8 90 FLOW N 8 90 NCHARBITS N 8 90 NSTOPBITS N 8 90 PARITY N 8 90 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 63 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 20 RS 232 Remote Control Command Remote only Commands Y N Page NLTRANS Y 8 91 Table 8 21 Acquisition Commands Remote only Commands Y N Page ACQUIRE Y 8 92 REALTIME Y 8 93 Table 8 22 Cursor Movement Command and Query Remote only Command Y N Page CURSOR Y 8 94 Query CURSOR N 8 94 Table 8 23 Expansion Commands and Queries Remote only Command Y N Page EXPAND Y 8 95 WINCURSOR Y 8 95 WINDISTANCE Y 8 96 WINDOW Y 8 96 Queries EXPAND N 8 97 WINDOW N 8 97 8 64 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 24 Measurement Command and Queries Remote only Command Y N Page MEASMODE Y 8 98 Queries EVNTRTNLOSS Y 8 99 LINKRTNLOSS Y 8 100 MEASMODE N 8 101 MEASURE Y 8 101 SPLICELOSS Y 8 101 TWOPOINT Y 8 102 Table 8 25 Event Marking and Event Table Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page EVNTAUTOMARK Y 8 103 EVNTMARKING Y 8 103 EVNTMEAS Y 8 103 EVNTNOTES Y 8 103 EVNTTHRESH Y 8 104 IPRNEVENTS Y 8 104 Queries EVNTCOUNT N 8 104 EVNTINFO N 8 104 EVNTMARKING N 8 107
219. an repeat the steps above for both the splice loss and the event return loss measurements Or you can go to the Place Event Markers screen and move or remove and replace the marker manually Automatic measurements are performed for all new and moved event markers Details on moving adding and deleting event markers manually on the Place Event Markers screen are given later in this section To repeat automatic measurements for event markers do one of the following L1 With the event marking parameter set to Manual press the START STOP button to start a new acquisition New data triggers automatic measurements at all event markers using the existing event marker locations Event notes are retained 14 With the event marking parameter set to Manual go to the Place Event Markers screen and press the Auto Mark Events softkey This replaces all markers with automatically located markers and measurements are recalculated Event notes are erased 14 With the event marking parameter set to Auto press the START STOP button to start a new acquisition This also replaces all markers with automatically located markers and recalculates measurements Event notes are erased Printing the Event Table NOTE With the Event Table screen displayed press the HARD COPY button to print the event table including event notes You can print the event table only when the hardcopy device selected is the internal printer or one of the supported external prin
220. anation of data element formats 8 90 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Remote Control Command NLTRANS Determines translation of ASCII newline character 0A hex returned by queries with ASCII encoded responses Applies only to RS 232 remote control Command Syntax Command Data Example s Power On Default Discussion NLTRANS char char lt HNPD gt To change translation to an asterisk character NLTRANS 2 7E hex ASCII tilde character Certain queries that return ASCII data with quoted strings such as the DIRWFM query contain embedded newline characters in the responses By default under RS 232 remote control these newline characters are translated to tildes to prevent application software from considering the newline characters to be message terminators If desired such translation can be disabled by sending the following command NLTRANS TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 91 Chapter 8 Remote Control Acquisition Commands ACQUIRE Perform an averaged normal or high density acquisition Remote only Command Syntax ACQUIRE lt distance gt lt distspec gt lt densityspec gt Command Data distance lt DNPD gt and specifies either the starting point or center point for the acquisition as determined by the lt distspec gt parameter The distance is from the front panel in the currently selected distance units set by
221. and not accepted in real time mode The instrument is in real time acquisition mode and the command received is not allowed in this mode 2004 Instrument state error query not accepted in real time mode The instrument is in real time acquisition mode and the query received is not allowed in this mode 2006 Instrument state error command accepted only under 488 remote control A command available only under GPIB remote control was received while RS 232 remote control was active 2007 Instrument state error query accepted only under 488 remote control A query available only under GPIB remote control was received while RS 232 remote control was active 2008 Instrument state error command accepted only under RS 232 remote control A command available only under RS 232 remote control was received while GPIB remote control was active 2009 Instrument state error query accepted only under RS 232 remote control A query available only under RS 232 remote control was received while GPIB remote control was active 8 164 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control 2010 Instrument state error indefinite length binary data format not allowed under RS 232 remote control One of the commands and queries PUT PUT SET GET WFM or GET SET was received when the waveform encoding ENCDG command was set to BINARY Only the ASCII versions of these commands and queries are supported under RS 232 remote
222. annot be edited To change these fields before saving a file go to the Operator Settings menu by pressing the Change Settings softkey from the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for instructions on how to set the system date and time and how to enter information on the Operator Settings menu 7 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Saving the File Quick Save If you choose to save waveform data the save function saves the current or the reference waveform measurement information and instrument settings into a disk file on the currently selected drive fixed or removable if both are installed If there is high density data associated with the waveform you are prompted whether the high density data should also be saved with the other waveform data If you choose to save settings data only the current instrument settings are saved into a disk file If you try to save a current acquisition that is still in progress the following message displays There is an acquisition in progress It must be stopped before saving Acquisitions in progress are paused upon entry to the mass storage menus and resumed when you exit the menus When you see this message you must exit the mass storage system and press START STOP to stop the acquisition You can then return to the Save menu and continue the save operation Save waveform or settings data by pressing the Save softkey The softkeys are
223. apter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Extending the Acquisition Range NOTE The maximum range specified on the Waveform Settings menu should be approximately the same as the length of the fiber being tested If you select a short pulse width for the acquisition the resulting waveform may span only a fraction of the maximum range and the screen as shown below You can extend the acquisition Normal Density Averages 5120 Event Time 00 04 11 Table 1 845 km Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage panui T T 0 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 Pulse Width 10 ns 1 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change 5 120 3 8 min Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 13108M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB Source Acquisition Figure 6 3 Short Acquisition Range range up or down the fiber by moving the distance cursor to the left or right off the waveform When the cursor passes the end of the waveform the following prompt displays on the screen Press START STOP to extend the acquisition Extended data acquisition is not necessary when using long pulse widths and unavailable with the long range FL series modules In these cases this prompt does not appear TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 7 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions NOTE Normal De
224. apter for details on using the expansion window with high density data and in dual trace mode The expansion window is also available during real time acquisition and when setting manual masks Use these front panel controls to manipulate the expansion window Vertical SIZE Knob In overview turning this knob causes the expansion window to expand and shrink vertically Turn the knob clockwise to increase the height of the rectangle and counterclockwise to decrease it You cannot expand the window larger than the overview vertical dimension and you cannot reduce the window vertically to less than ten pixels on the display In expanded view the frame of reference is the waveform and not the expansion window which now fills the display Even if you shrink the expansion window down to the 10 pixel limit in overview you can increase vertical expansion further in expanded view using the vertical SIZE knob When you expand the waveform to the point where the dB scale spans 1 dB no further vertical expansion is possible Note that expanding the waveform vertically in expanded view has the same effect as shrinking the expansion window vertically in overview Shrinking the waveform in expanded view is the same as enlarging the expansion window in overview You can see the effects of these actions on the height of the expansion window when you return to overview TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 3 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions
225. aracters has been detected TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 161 Chapter 8 Remote Control 104 Data type error A data element sent for a command or query does not match the type of element required For example a CPD element is sent when a lt DNPD gt element is expected 108 Parameter not allowed Too many data elements have been sent for a command or query 109 Missing parameter A command or query is missing a required parameter 110 Command header error too short A command or query header shorter than three characters has been received 110 Command header error too long A command or query header longer than 12 characters has been received 110 Command header error abbreviation not unique A command or query was abbreviated using the same characters used to abbreviate another command or query 113 Undefined header A command or query with an unrecognized header was received 120 Numeric data error conversion error A floating point conversion error occurred during an attempt to convert a lt DNPD gt element to internal representation 123 Numeric overflow A lt DNPD gt element was received that contained an exponent of absolute value greater than 32 000 124 Too many digits A DNPD element was received that contained more than 255 characters 144 Character data too long A lt CPD gt element longer than 12 characters was received 150 String data error too long
226. art a real time acquisition the instrument automatically enters Two Point mode These measurements require very little calculation and except for automatic two point loss remain unchanged by the constant input of new data unless you turn the distance CURSOR knob When you start a real time acquisition with return loss on the Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss softkeys are replaced by the Two Point and Splice Loss Softkeys the Exit Return Loss softkey changes to Return Loss and the instrument enters Two Point mode When the real time acquisition is stopped return loss is turned back on You cannot enter the mass storage menus during a real time acquisition In order to enter mass storage first stop the acquisition To stop a real time acquisition press the START STOP button again Real time acquisition also stops when you press a softkey to exit Two Point mode TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 15 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Setting Manual Masks The Place Manual Masks screen is available via a softkey on the Waveform Settings menu when the Masking Type pop up window is displayed Use this screen to make manual adjustments to automatically set masks or to set masks independently Manual masking is available only if supported by the currently selected laser and if the masking type parameter is set to one of the manual settings Masking is supported on the FS series 1310 nm SM and 1550 nm SM modules The mask
227. ata for the highlighted file Turn the distance CURSOR knob to select other files from the directory After the cursor is stationary file data is read from the disk and the file specification fields are updated for the currently selected file If the directory is longer than one page use the Next Page and Previous Page softkeys to move through the directory or use the distance CURSOR knob to scroll through the directory Load Save Format Delete From Disk To Disk TI Next FILE SPECIFICATION Menu Drive Type Removable File Type TFP2 File Name HARRISO1 WFNM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT a AVE JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 44 Removable Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRISO1 MWFM HARRISO2 SET HARRISO2 WFM HARRISO03 WFM HARRISO04 WFM HARRISOS WFM HARRISO6 WFM HARRISO7 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIDLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKO3 WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM Previous Page Select filename w CURSOR knob press Delete softkey Figure 7 8 Delete Menu Single Drive Instrument TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 15 Chapter 7 Mass Storage If your instrument includes both internal RAM and a floppy disk drive a Switch Drives softkey displays allowing you to select which device to use for the delete operation figure 7 9 The directo
228. ated settings and output to an external RS232 plotter or printer Remote only GPIB only Command Syntax SPLTSCREEN Discussion The data format is determined by the HCTYPE command An A size plot 8 5 x 11 is produced SPLTTEXT Print text string on an external serial plotter or printer Remote only GPIB only Command Syntax SPLTTEXT lt text gt lt x gt lt y gt Command Data lt text gt SPD specifying the text string to plot 80 characters maximum The escape characters n and r can be used in lt text gt to send a newline character or a carriage return character to the plotter lt gt and lt y gt lt DNPD gt specifying in plotter coordinates the desired location of the text string Discussion The HCTYPE command specifies the type of data to be printed by this command 8 140 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control GPLTSCREEN Return printer or plotter commands to draw a representation of the acquisition screen including waveform s and instrument settings Remote only GPIB only Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Discussion GPLTSCREEN printer plotter commands gt lt NL gt lt END gt lt printer plotter commands gt is the sequence of printer or plotter commands needed to draw the waveform s and settings on a printer or plotter The HCTYPE command specifies the data format to be returned by this query If the format is specified as E
229. ave a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The selection of a new masking type requires a new acquisition in order to take effect When you press the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkey to exit the Masking Type parameter the masking type setting at the bottom of the screen is highlighted to indicate that the current setting does not match acquisition data When you exit the menu system the following message displays Press START STOP to acquire new data Press START STOP to start an acquisition using the new masking type The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired because the masking type setting now corresponds to the displayed waveform You can press START STOP to start a new acquisition without exiting the menu system TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 29 Chapter 3 Getting Started Filtering NOTE To display the Filtering pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the filtering parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu 40 Filtering FL modules Next Param Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection Prev Param ggg i T f T 7 T T 0 20 40 60 80 Pulse Width 2000 ns 200 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 100 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 T E
230. be summarized in the following sequence Controller sends query message Controller sends program message terminator Controller reads response message Controller reads response message terminator Controller sends next program message gv c c 3 If the controller expects a lengthy response from a particular query at least 512 characters it should limit the length of the query message to less than 512 characters including the program message terminator If the length were not limited both the Input Buffer and the Output Queue would fill during the receipt and execution of the query message The controller since it must observe rule 1 above would not be able to read the response from the full Output Queue because the Input Buffer would not be able to hold the program message terminator If the instrument detects a violation of this rule event 430 query DEADLOCKED error is logged in the Event Queue and bit 2 QYE is set in the SESR if enabled by the DESER The Output Queue is cleared and FiberMaster does not generate a response for any query in the current program message When the instrument sees the program message terminator it again becomes ready to generate responses to query messages If the controller violates any of these rules it may timeout waiting for a query response that the instrument has aborted Status queries such as ESR and EVENT can then be sent to determine the nature of the error TFP2A FiberMast
231. before you entered the menu system and there were no previous manual adjustments to two point measurements the slope is recalculated using the new method 3 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started If two point measurements included manual adjustments the method of slope calculation changes but the slope is not recalculated The new loss cursor s are fitted to the existing points where the old loss cursor s intersected the distance cursors In this case you can restart two point measurements using the new method by pressing the Two Point softkey TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 19 Chapter 3 Getting Started Scattering Coefficient NOTE To display the Scattering Coefficient pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the scattering coefficient parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu Scattering Coefficient Next Param Tum the CURSOR knob to Prev Param 20 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Avgs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File 153078 Figure 3 8 Scattering Coefficient Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Se
232. ble B 1 Global Keyboard B 1 Table B 2 Menu System Keyboard Functions eee B 2 Table B 3 Menu System Numeric Parameter Keyboard Functions B 2 Table B 4 Menu System Alphanumeric Parameter Keyboard 3 Table B 5 Mass Storage Keyboard Functions eere B 3 Table B 6 Acquisition Screen Keyboard Functions B 4 Table E 1 Firmware Versions and E 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual List of Tables Table F 1 Table F 2 Table F 3 Table F 4 Table F 6 File System Error Codes eese eese seen inna nna nant natn F 1 Flash Memory Error Codes esee F 3 LED Error Codes 222222 4 Phase 1 Error Codes seated careo iwi F 5 Phase 2 Error Codes caer eee eee eee ee eee nnnm F 5 xvi TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Safety Information The general safety information in these pages is for both operating and servicing personnel In addition specific warnings and cautions appear throughout the manual where they apply Definition of Terms and Symbols In this manual a CAUTION flag identifies a potential for equipment or
233. byte count and also transmits a checksum to be used for detecting transmission errors If the program message containing the GET WFM or GET SET query contains another query it must precede the GET WFM or GET SET query This is because GET WFM and GET SET always terminate the response message with the GPIB EOI line For example the message IDN WFMSEL REF GET is valid and returns the IDN response followed by the GET WFM response However the message WFMSEL REF IDN generates an error in the Event Queue and no response data is sent The message WFMSEL CUR GET WFM 8 126 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control is a query for the current waveform file data The response is in the general form WFM 0 lt file_data gt lt NL gt lt END gt The response header GET can be disabled using the HEADER OFF command so the response would be 0 lt file_data gt lt NL gt lt END gt GET_WFM GET_SET ASCII encoding NOTE This form of the GET_WFM and GET_SET queries is intended for RS 232 remote control applications when eight bit binary data cannot be handled Upload a waveform or settings file from the TFP2A to the controller Files are read from current or reference memory depending on which waveform is active Remote only Query Syntax Response Syntax Discussion GET_WFM GET_SET GET_WFM 0 lt data gt lt NL gt
234. character 0A hex No spaces or other characters are allowed between the REQCTRL and terminating lt NL gt character The letters in the word REQCTRL can be upper lower or mixed case This sequence selects FiberMaster s RS 232 port as the remote control port and takes the GPIB interface offline All subsequent data received by FiberMaster s RS 232 interface is interpreted as commands or queries described in the Commands and Queries section later in this chapter To bring the GPIB interface back online cycle power to the FiberMaster The port select sequence only enables the RS 232 port as the remote control port it does not put the instrument into remote mode or affect any instrument mode or operation in progress Refer to the descriptions of the REMOTE REMLOCK and LOCAL commands in the Commands and Queries section for information on switching between local and remote modes of instrument operation If the port select sequence is received when the RS 232 port is already enabled for remote control it is ignored 8 32 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control The following example shows a typical sequence used to initiate RS 232 remote control REQCTRL lt NL gt Send RS 232 port select sequence REMOTE lt NL gt Put instrument in remote control RST lt NL gt Reset instrument settings to factory defaults CLS lt NL gt Clear instrument status registers and event queue IDN lt NL gt Query instrument f
235. cify an actual data point on the waveform The measurement is made using the waveform point closest to distance dist in the query response gives the actual location of the point EVNTRTNLOSS lt dist gt lt loss gt lt height gt dist lt NR2 gt and specifies the distance of the data point nearest distance loss lt NR2 gt and specifies the return loss at dist height lt NR2 gt and specifies the height of the reflection at dist in dB If the distance given lies within the bounds of the active waveform the instrument enters Event Return Loss mode unless already in that mode If the given distance is within one pulse width of a splice the active distance cursor is placed at the splice If not the active distance cursor is placed at the data point closest to the distance specified Event 2260 is generated if the loss value reported in the query response is not accurate due to clipping of the waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 99 Chapter 8 Remote Control LINKRTNLOSS Enter Link Return Loss mode and return link return loss data for the active waveform Remote only Query Syntax LINKRTNLOSS lt distance1 gt lt distance2 gt Query Data lt distance1 gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the starting point for link return loss calculations distance2 lt DNPD gt and specifies the ending point for link return loss calculations lt distance1 gt
236. cing any waveform data already residing in reference memory Abort Transfer stop an XModem data transfer that is in progress This softkey is not shown when there is no data transfer in progress Exit Menus return to the acquisition screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 59 Chapter 3 Getting Started During XModem data transfers the only RS232 parameter used is baud rate The other serial port parameters are temporarily defaulted to the settings required by XModem When an XModem transfer is complete the settings revert to their original values Refer to the System Settings menu descriptions in this chapter for information on setting RS232 parameters NOTE The XModem function supports only long packets when using the Send function 3 60 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements The FiberMaster OTDR offers the following five modes of optical fiber measurement 1 Preview displays an overview of the fiber Preview is the default mode entered at power on and provides a clear view of the fiber under test Use Preview mode to measured fiber length and distances to events on the fiber Unlike the other measurement modes Preview mode does not have its own softkey Turn on Preview mode by turning off the other measurement modes 2 Two Point the loss and distance are shown for a section of the waveform between the two distance cursors Use Two Point mode to measure end to end distance an
237. cisely figure 3 14 High Density Averages 1024 Event Time 00 01 04 Table 600 9 m 500 8 m Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage T T 450 500 550 600 Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto h Maximum Range 50 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Auto QuickMask Change Avas 1 024 289s Dual Trace Off Module F81315 13108M Settings Ref Index 14680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File MSK_3 WEM Figure 3 14 QuickMask 3 28 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started AccuMask reconstructs the reflection retaining the leading edge of the reflection in addition to removing the tail minimizing dead zone figure 3 15 Dead zone is defined as areas where the waveform deviates 0 5 dB from backscatter levels High Density Averages 1024 Event Time 00 01 34 Table 606 0 m 0 m Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Dea Mass Storage T T T 450 500 550 600 zone 1 Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 50 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Manual AccuMask Change Avas 1 024 17 1 s Dual Trace Off Module F81315 13108M Settings Ret Index 14680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File MSK 4 WEM Figure 3 15 AccuMask Make your masking type selection by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you h
238. coefficient for a particular fiber can usually be obtained from the fiber manufacturer If you do not know the correct value however it is recommended that you use the factory default values which depend on the laser source For more information on the scattering coefficient parameter and how to set it refer to chapter 3 Getting Started TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 29 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Chapter 4 Automatic Link Return Loss Measurements The width of the expansion window determines the loss measurements are made at each new position of the active distance cursor if you have not made any manual adjustments length of the loss cursor The loss cursor extends from the left distance cursor to the left edge of the expansion window You can vary the length of the loss cursor and distance cursors to make measurements at other locations along the waveform New thus the waveform data used for measurement by adjusting the size of the When you enter Link Return Loss mode the distance cursors are in the same locations as they were in the previous measurement mode You can then move the intersection of the distance cursor and the waveform The loss cursor moves horizontally as the distance cursor moves and is automatically fitted to the slope of the waveform This cursor is used to establish the backscatter level before the link and can be adjusted manually expansion window in overview or by positioning the wa
239. coefficient of reflection loss Figure 4 20 Event Return Loss Mode TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 39 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements NOTE Event return loss measurements on a reflective event yield the most accurate results with masking off however you can perform event return loss measurements on reflections that have been masked using the AccuMask masking type Event return loss measurements on reflections that have been masked using the QuickMask masking type are not accurate Manual Event Return Loss Measurements NOTE To adjust measurements select the active loss cursor using the CURSOR SELECT button You can adjust the active loss cursor using the vertical and slope Loss knobs Manually adjusted loss cursors extend to the edges of the display to help you make accurate adjustments As you move the distance cursor the loss cursors maintain the same slopes and vertical positions and event return loss is recalculated Manual adjustments are retained until you restart automatic event return loss measurements by pressing the Event Return Loss softkey An automatic event return loss measurement is made at the current distance cursor position Event Return Loss mode is a variation of Splice Loss mode If you turn off return loss manual adjustments made in Event Return Loss mode are retained and displayed in Splice Loss mode If you restart automatic splice loss measurements or if you make further manual adjust
240. connection Table 1 6 Mass Storage Floppy disk drive Size 3 5 in 8 9 cm Capacity 1 44 Mbyte or 720 Kbyte Format MS DOS compatible Internal RAM Capacity 1 Mbyte Battery life 1 year TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 23 Chapter 1 Introduction Operational Characteristics Table 1 7 Operational Characteristics Power requirements AC operation AC only DC operation AC operation AC with DC option 90 130 VAC 47 73 Hz 90 130 VAC 47 440Hz 180 250 VAC 47 73Hz auto select 180 250 VAC 47 73 Hz 11 16 VDC Power supply rating AC operation DC operation 250 watts max 315 VA max 200 VA max watts Module capacity Safety Physical Characteristics Two dual wavelength modules maximum for a total of four wavelengths UL 1244 UL 3111 1 CSA CAN CSA C22 2 No 231 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 192 IEC 1010 1 EN 61010 1 Table 1 8 Physical Characteristics Weight Dimensions 33 Ibs 15 kg mainframe configured with floppy disk drive internal printer and one optical module Overall dimensions including front cover handle and feet Length 25 in 63 7 cm width 18 in 46 cm height 7 in 18 cm 1 24 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Environmental Characteristics Table 1 9 Environmental Characteristics Temperature Mainframe With internal printer Without flop
241. cquisition is currently in progress pressing the START STOP button stops it Holding the START STOP button down for two seconds starts a real time acquisition The measurement mode automatically switches to Two Point mode during a real time acquisition 4 26 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Splice Loss Measurements Examples NOTE Use Splice Loss mode to measure the loss caused by a particular fiber feature 1 Turn the cURSOR knob to move the distance cursor to the leading edge of the event to be measured Use the expand function if necessary for precise cursor placement 2 An automatic splice loss measurement is made and the loss is displayed on the screen next to the event The example below shows an expanded view automatic splice loss measurement made at the location of a fusion splice in the cable The automatic measurement is made by fitting the loss cursors to the waveform on either side of the event being measured Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 8 735 km 0 921 di T T T T T T T 8 500 8 600 8 700 8 800 8 900 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc LSA Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off E Avas 20 480 214s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 13105M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU764 WEM Figure 4 14 Automatic Splic
242. d using the new settings the highlighting is cleared The Expansion Window When dual trace is on pressing the EXPAND button expands both the active waveform and the inactive waveform However if the inactive waveform is outside the expansion window in overview only the active waveform is visible in expanded view In this case you can use the vertical POSITION knob to move the active waveform and bring the inactive waveform into view TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 13 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions High Density Data Acquisition If the current waveform is active you may be able to acquire high density data for the active waveform You can expand the active waveform as long as the inactive in this case the reference waveform still has more than 100 data points on the screen If this limitation lets you expand the active waveform to 100 data points a prompt appears telling you to press the START STOP button to acquire high density data for the active waveform You can then expand the high density data as long as the inactive waveform still has more than 100 data points on the screen If the inactive waveform has high density data in the same region expanded view shows high density data for both waveforms If you reach the 100 point minimum for the inactive waveform you cannot expand the active waveform any further To expand the active waveform further you must turn dual trace off 6 14 TFP2A FiberMaster Use
243. d HPGL compatible plotters are supported Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for hardcopy device selection details GPIB Hardcopy under Local Control NOTE To use FiberMaster with a GPIB plotter or printer under local control configure the hardcopy device for listen only mode To start the hard copy press the HARDCOPY button Press HARDCOPY second time to stop a plot or print in progress When using an external plotter the HARDCOPY button functions only when the acquisition screen is displayed If you press HARDCOPY when any other screen is current i e a menu or help screen a beep sounds and a plot operation is not started Before starting a hardcopy operation the instrument enters talk only mode When the hardcopy finishes GPIB status is automatically reset to its previous value online or offline When the instrument is in talk only mode its listener function is disabled so it cannot process commands sent by a GPIB controller If a controller is on the bus and sends an interface message that unaddresses the instrument to talk OTA UNT or IFC the instrument readdresses itself to talk If the controller sends an interface clear message IFC the instrument waits for the IFC line to be released then continues sending data to the hardcopy device In this case the device may lose data depending on how it responds to interface clear In configurations with a controller on the bus contention for the bus may occur betwee
244. d loss and fiber loss 3 Splice Loss the splice loss or gain at the distance cursor is displayed Use Splice Loss mode to measure the loss caused by a splice connector or other fiber feature 4 Link Return Loss the return loss of a fiber link is shown Link return loss measures the amount of transmission energy lost over a fiber link due to light being reflected back towards its source Link return loss is expressed as a ratio of the light entering the link to the total light reflected by the link and allows you to characterize the performance of a fiber link without having to measure each reflective event in the link 5 Event Return Loss displays the return loss for a particular reflective event on the fiber The event return loss is given as a ratio of the light entering the event to the light reflected by the event and measures the transmission energy lost due to light reflected by a particular connector You can make measurements at any time including during an active acquisition By pressing softkeys you can easily move from mode to mode as various types of measurements are required And you can manually adjust automatic two point splice loss and return loss measurements if necessary This chapter describes measurements in each mode of operation and how to make manual adjustments to two point splice loss and return loss fiber measurements You can locate measure and document faults using FiberMaster s event markin
245. d zone 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 3 29 defaults power on 3 4 how to set 3 56 DELETE 8 133 Delete menu 7 15 7 16 Delete softkey 7 16 deleting a file 7 15 7 16 DELMARKDIST 8 111 DELMARKNUM 8 111 DELSET 8 134 DELWFM 8 134 DENSITYLIST 8 90 DESE 8 153 DESE 8 154 diagnostics menus D 1 D 3 diagnostics power on 3 1 DIRECTORY 8 137 DIRSET 8 138 DIRWFM 8 138 disk drive 1 23 7 1 7 18 display 1 22 color 3 38 intensity 3 37 display color 3 38 drive type 7 8 DRIVEBAT 8 138 DRIVESELECT 8 134 DRIVESELECT 8 139 dual trace 2 2 3 22 6 11 6 13 dynamic range 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 E ENCDG 8 121 ENCDG 8 122 Enter Current Meas softkey 5 9 error codes F 1 F 6 ESE 8 153 ESE 8 154 ESR 8 154 event markers storing and retrieving 5 18 event marking 1 2 3 12 3 25 3 26 5 15 25 automatic 5 19 5 22 manual 5 14 5 17 event notes 5 11 5 13 Event Return Loss mode 4 38 4 45 Event Return Loss softkey in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 4 event table 5 7 5 10 entering measurements manually 5 9 printing 5 10 Event Table softkey 5 5 5 6 in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 in Preview mode 4 4 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 in Two Point mode 4 12 event threshold 3 23 3 24 5 4 EVENT 8 154 EVMSG 8 155 EVNTAUTOMARK 8 106 EVNTCOUNT 8 107 EVNTINFO 8 107 EVNTMAR
246. de Restart automatic event return loss measurements and clear any previous manual adjustments You can manually adjust an event return loss measurement using the CURSOR SELECT button and the vertical and slope Loss knobs as described for these controls Any manual adjustments made in Event Return Loss mode are retained until you press the Event Return Loss softkey again If you leave Event Return Loss mode after making manual adjustments the adjustments are saved and redisplayed when you re enter Event Return Loss mode unless you make changes in the related Splice Loss mode see note on previous page In this case press the Event Return Loss softkey again to clear user adjusted measurements and make a new event return loss measurement using the current distance cursor position Pressing and holding the Event Return Loss softkey for two seconds exits Event Return Loss mode and enters Preview mode This softkey is available only when return loss is on Pressing Exit Return Loss turns the return loss modes off The Event Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Splice Loss softkey the Link Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Two Point softkey and the instrument enters Splice Loss mode Exit Return Loss reverts to Return Loss Enter the mass storage menu system allowing you to store waveform and settings data on floppy disk or internal RAM drive if installed Refer to chapter 7 Mass Storage for details on using this system Enter th
247. dex 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 5 1 Event Marking Automatic event marking stops looking for events when one of the following occurs a splice loss greater than 10 00 dB is detected indicating a break or the end of the fiber the noise floor is reached waveform amplitude drops below 0 dB on the acquisition screen or Q the end of the data is reached 5 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking A softkey on the acquisition screen allows access to the Event Table screen This table lists several distance and loss measurements for each event on the waveform The event table is compiled automatically but you can adjust the measurements if necessary From the Event Table screen additional softkeys allow you to read and record notes about each event listed in the table Event Table Event Lodi Notes Event Distance Splice Event Fiber Two Point Two Point Link Loss km Loss Retum Loss Loss Distance Loss from event 1 dB dB dB km km dB dB 1 0 000 0 88 39 7 2 5 458 1 45 26 8 0 332 6 459 3 02 3 6 735 0 92 2 277 2 18 5 21 4 9 287 10 91 40 3 0 551 1 26 6 46 Enter Current Meas Event Table Event Notes Tum the CURSOR knob to Event Noies select characters Next R037 001 SE comer of 5th amp Elm Event 02 SE corner of 6th amp Elm R037 003 SE comer of 7th amp Elm R037 005 SE comer of 9th amp E
248. ding ASCII encoded versions available for both GPIB and RS 232 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 67 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 31 Mass Storage Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page BATCHCOPY Y 8 129 COPYFILE Y 8 130 COPYSET Y 8 130 COPYWFM Y 8 130 DELETE Y 8 130 DELSET Y 8 131 DELWFM Y 8 131 DRIVESELECT Y 8 131 FORMAT Y 8 131 LOADCUR Y 8 132 LOADREF Y 8 132 LOADRFS Y 8 132 LOADSET Y 8 132 MSFORMAT Y 8 132 SAVECUR Y 8 133 SAVEREF Y 8 133 SAVESET Y 8 133 Queries DIRECTORY Y 8 134 DIRSET Y 8 135 DIRWFM Y 8 135 DRIVEBAT Y 8 135 DRIVESELECT Y 8 136 FETCHID Y 8 136 FETCHNOTE Y 8 136 FETCHOPER Y 8 137 MSFORMAT Y 8 137 TYPEFILE Y 8 137 8 68 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 32 Hardcopy Commands and Queries Remote only Commands Y N Page GPLTSCREEN Y 8 138 GPLTTEXT Y 8 138 HCTYPE Y 8 139 IPRNSCREEN Y 8 139 IPRNTEXT Y 8 140 SPLTSCREEN GPIB only Y 8 140 SPLTTEXT GPIB only Y 8 140 Queries GPLTSCREEN GPIB only Y 8 141 GPLTTEXT GPIB only Y 8 142 HCTYPE Y 8 142 Table 8 33 Display Related Commands and Query Remote only Commands Y N Page GSTATUS Y 8 143 MESSAGE Y 8 144 SOFTKEY Y 8 145 Query GSTATUS Y 8 145 Table 8 34 Identification Query Remote only Query Y N Page IDN N 8 146 Table 8 35 Learn Settings Queries Remote only Queries Y N Page LRN N 8 147 SET N 8 147 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 6
249. e The instrument automatically enters Preview mode at power on At other times enter Preview mode by turning off the current measurement mode The highlighted softkey indicates the current measurement mode Press and hold the highlighted softkey for two seconds to turn off the current mode and enter Preview mode In Preview mode no softkeys are highlighted Preview mode displays an uncluttered waveform for the fiber under test There are two distance cursors in Preview mode At power on the inactive cursor is at the zero distance point of the waveform and the active distance cursor is two pulse widths to the right Normal Density Averages 20480 Event Time 00 00 31 Table TATI kM Expansion 4 028 km window 40 Splice Loss 20 Return A Loss Active distance 10 cursor 0 T T 0 2 4 6 8 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13108M Settings IRef Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LSJU78 WFM Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 Inactive 473 km distance cursor lt lt 4 028 km T T T T 5 000 6 500 7 000 7 500 8 000 8 500 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficien
250. e 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 1 12 Table 1 13 Table 1 14 Table 1 15 Table 1 16 Table 1 17 Table 1 18 Table 1 19 Table 1 20 Table 1 21 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 8 7 Table 8 8 Table 8 9 Table 8 10 Table 8 11 Table 8 12 Table 8 13 Table 8 14 Table 8 15 Display Range Vertical System eese eser enean 1 21 Display Range Horizontal System cease 1 22 DISplay reed 1 22 Keyboard Bum M 1 22 E A N PA E E TST 1 23 Mass Storag anaa 1 23 Operational Characteristics cesses eee essen nain nn nana 1 24 Physical Characteristics eee eese sese essen nan 1 24 Environmental Characteristics eere esee nennt 1 25 FS1300 Singlemode Optical Module 1 27 FS1500 Singlemode Optical Module 1 28 FS1315 Singlemode Optical Module 1 29 FG1300 Singlemode Optical Module sss 1 30 FG1315 Singlemode Optical Module s 1 31 FL1300 Singlemode Optical Module 1 32 FL1500 Sin
251. e 3 4 3 9 3 13 3 30 5 19 6 7 6 9 FM1300 multimode module 1 36 FM8500 optical module 1 35 FM8513 multimode module 1 37 FM series optical module 3 11 4 23 5 19 FORMAT 8 134 Format Fixed softkey 7 14 Format menu 7 13 7 14 Format Removable softkey 7 14 Format softkey 7 13 formatting a floppy disk 7 13 7 14 formatting internal RAM 7 13 7 14 front panel connector changing 1 39 1 40 cleaning 1 39 1 40 front panel controls 2 1 2 12 3 39 in Event Return Loss mode 4 41 4 43 in Link Return Loss mode 4 32 4 34 in Preview mode 4 4 4 6 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 12 4 15 front panel covers 1 18 FS1300 optical module 1 27 FS1315 optical module 1 29 FS1500 optical module 1 28 FS series optical module 3 4 3 9 3 11 3 27 4 23 5 19 6 15 fuses 1 41 G GET SET ASCII encoding 8 130 GET SET binary encoding 8 129 GET WFM ASCII encoding 8 130 GET binary encoding 8 129 ghosting 3 12 GPIB 8 1 8 173 address 3 50 hardcopy device 3 48 3 49 plotter 2 2 printer 2 2 status 3 49 GPIB connector 2 12 GPIB system 8 1 8 26 GPLTSCREEN 8 141 GPLTSCREEN 8 144 GPLTTEXT 8 141 GPLTTEXT 8 145 GSTATUS 8 146 GSTATUS 8 148 H HARD COPY button 2 2 3 47 hardcopy device 1 23 2 2 3 47 HCTYPE 8 142 HCTYPE 8 145 HEADER 8 121 HEADER 8 122 HELP button 2 3 3 6 help online 2 3 3 6 high density data 6 9 in dual trace mode 6 13 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index 3
252. e DESE command For definitions of the bits in the DESER refer to the description of the SESR in the following paragraphs TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 11 Chapter 8 Remote Control DEVICE EVENTS Device Event Status Enable Register Set with DESE Read with DESE PON EXE DDE QYE OPC Event 2 Queue SESR Read Sync Standard Event Status Register Read with Read and clear with ESR EVENT or Clear with CLS EVMSG VE Clear with PON URQ CME EXE DDE lave crs code msg code msg code msg x amp M Output Queue S byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 byte Standard Event Status Enable Register iis t Set with ESE ply Read with ESE Status Byte Register Read with serial poll Read with Serial Poll or STB RQS J Clear with CLS 6 ESB MAV Service Read with MSS Request STB Generation DO a Service Request Enable Register Set with SRE Read with SRE Figure 8 3 GPIB Status Reporting and Error Handling 8 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Standard Event
253. e Dependent Error DDE A device dependent error occurs when a device operation does not complete due to some internal condition of the instrument Bit 2 Query Error QYE The QYE bit indicates that 1 the controller made an attempt to read a response from the instrument before sending a terminated query message UNTERMINATED error 2 the controller sent part of another program message to the instrument before reading the entire response for a previous query message INTERRUPTED error or 3 both the Input Buffer and Output Queue are full and another data byte was received DEADLOCK error Bit 1 Not Used Bit 0 Operation Complete OPC This bit is generated in response to the Operation Complete OPC command TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 13 Chapter 8 Remote Control Event Queue Device events that are enabled by the DESER are logged in the SESR At the same time a code and message identifying the event are written to the Event Queue The queue is written and read on a first in first out basis and has a capacity of eight events The Event Queue can be read using the EVENT or EVMSG queries Clear the Event Queue using the CLS command The reading of the Event Queue is synchronized with the reading of the SESR The ESR query reads and clears the SESR Each time an ESR query is issued the contents of the Event Queue that were logged up to the time the query is issued are enabled for reading If the data is not r
254. e Event Category SESR Bit 100 199 Command error CME 200 299 Execution error EXE 2000 2999 Execution error EXE 300 399 Internal error DDE 3000 3999 Internal error DDE 400 499 System event PON OPC URQ 500 599 Execution warning EXE 600 699 Internal warning DDE The specific codes and messages used by FiberMaster are listed in the section Remote Control Event Codes and Messages later in this chapter Command Errors A command error is a syntax or semantic error in a program message A syntax error occurs when a program message contains a combination of syntactic elements that FiberMaster does not recognize A semantic error occurs when the instrument receives an unrecognized command or query header or detects a length or type error in a program data element Execution Errors Internal Errors NOTE An execution error occurs when a program data element is invalid or out of legal range or when the current state of the instrument prevents the execution of a command or query Execution errors in the range from 2000 to 2999 are specific to FiberMaster An internal error is logged when a serious system or hardware failure occurs either during the power on sequence or during the execution of a command or query Internal errors in the range from 3000 to 3999 indicate errors specific to FiberMaster Event 350 which indicates an Event Queue overflow does not set the DDE bit in the SESR 8 42 TFP2A FiberMaster User
255. e Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET A v HARRISO2 SET HARRISO2 WFM HARRISO3 WFM HARRISO4 WFM HARRISQ5 WFM HARRISO6 WFM HARRISO7 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIDLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKO3 WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM Previous Page Select filename w CURSOR knob press Load softkey Figure 7 2 Load Menu Dual Drive Instrument 7 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Curr Memory load the waveform and settings data to current memory Any existing acquisition data in current memory is overwritten Ref Memory load the waveform and settings data to reference memory Any existing data in reference memory is overwritten Cancel cancel the operation and return to the Load from Disk menu NOTE If you load a waveform file into current memory any partial or complete acquisition data is overwritten Loading a Settings File When you press the Load softkey to load a settings file the following message displays on the screen Load settings to current Two additional softkeys are provided Yes and No Yes load the new settings into current memory No cancel the operation and return to the Load from Disk menu The original settings are retained NOTE If an acquisition was in progress when you entered the mass storage menus it stops until you exit When you exit mass storage the acquisition resumes unless you load a waveform or settings file into current memory If you load a settings file into
256. e Loss and the instrument returns to Splice Loss mode Enter the mass storage menu system allowing you to store waveform and settings data on floppy disk or internal RAM drive if installed Refer to chapter 7 Mass Storage for details on using this system Enter the instrument s Waveform Settings menu allowing you to change instrument settings and allowing access to additional configuration menus Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on using these menus 4 24 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements CURSOR Move the distance cursor along the waveform A new splice loss measurement is made knob at the new position When event marking is turned on and you move the distance cursor anywhere onto an event marker or an event the cursor automatically snaps to the location of the event You can then move the cursor on the event If you move the cursor off the event and back on or if you press the Splice Loss softkey the cursor snaps onto the event again CURSOR Pick the active loss cursor The active loss cursor is displayed at a brighter intensity SELECT knob _ than the inactive cursor Pressing and holding the CURSOR SELECT button in Splice Loss mode joins the loss cursors the inactive loss cursor is placed at the same vertical position and extends along the same slope as the active cursor Vertical LOSS Move the active loss cursor up and down Use this control to manually match t
257. e Loss Measurement In Splice Loss mode automatic measurements are made by fitting loss cursors to waveform data points The lengths of the loss cursors indicates the portion of the waveform used for measurement and are determined by the width of the expansion window in both overview and expanded view The size of the expansion window therefore may cause automatic loss figures to vary You can vary the width of the expansion window to control the number of data points used to perform the automatic splice loss measurement TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 27 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements To make manual adjustments to automatic measurements use the slope and vertical Loss knobs to rotate the active loss cursor and move it vertically The cursor elongates automatically extending from the distance cursor to the edge of the display to make it easier to fit to the waveform Press CURSOR SELECT to activate the second loss cursor Adjust the second cursor using the Loss knobs As you adjust the loss cursors the splice loss is recalculated The example below shows a manually adjusted splice loss measurement at the location of a connector Normal Density Averages 20480 User Adjusted Measurement Time 00 00 31 6 453 km Mass Storage T T 6 000 6 500 000 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc LSA Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Mask
258. e Place Event Markers screen from the acquisition screen as follows 1 Press the Change Settings softkey to enter the Waveform Settings menu 2 Press the Next Param or Prev Param softkey until the Event Marking pop up window displays 3 Setevent marking to Manual 4 The Place Markers softkey displays when event marking is set to Manual Press this softkey The Place Event Markers screen displays All marked events are displayed on the Place Event Markers screen regardless of the event threshold setting When working on the Place Event Markers screen you can use the expansion window to magnify portions of the waveform for precise marker placement Use the horizontal and vertical SIZE knobs to size the waveform for this purpose The waveform POSITION knobs also function when working on the Place Event Markers screen You can also press START STOP to start a new acquisition without exiting the Place Markers screen Placing Event Markers NOTE Use softkeys to add remove and move markers Use the distance cursor to identify the marker to be moved or removed Next Marker advance the distance cursor to the next marker Pressing Next Marker selects the marker to the right of the current cursor position and wraps to the first marker on the waveform from the last one Remove Marker appears only when the cursor is located on an existing marker see figures 5 7 and 5 9 remove the current marker and renumber the markers After the
259. e chosen is displayed as the full width of the overview acquisition screen The available range settings are determined by the laser source you selected This distance represents the maximum range that the acquisition can be moved down the fiber and usually is set to the length of the fiber Set the maximum range at least as long as the fiber under test to avoid ghosting A ghost is a reflection received from the previous sampling acquisition caused by an event on the fiber past the end of the maximum range The light reflected from such an event reaches the instrument s detector during the following sampling acquisition and the reflection is averaged into the valid waveform data within the maximum range When event marking is on any ghosts on the waveform are marked and measured as events 3 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started The range selections change when you select a new laser source The default maximum range depends on the laser source selected 4km for 850 nm MM 1 10km for 1300 nm MM 50 km for 1310 and 1550 nm SM FS series modules 100 km for 1310 and 1550 nm SM FL series modules The maximum range selections are also dependent on the current pulse width setting and vice versa Because these two parameters are interdependent the Pulse Width pop up window displays next to the Maximum Range window to show the pulse width settings that are available with the current maximum ra
260. e distance cursor The loss cursors move horizontally as the distance cursor is moved When you move the distance cursor using the CURSOR knob an automatic splice loss measurement is made at the new cursor position unless there are previous manual adjustments The splice loss or gain value is displayed to the left of the distance cursor and is shown graphically as a dashed portion of the distance cursor Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 8 735 km Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Event Markig Auto IMaximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Ref Index 1 4680 Splice i loss Distance cursor cursors Figure 4 13 Splice Loss Mode 4 22 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Automatic measurements are calculated by fitting loss cursors to waveform data points The lengths of the loss cursors indicate the sections of the waveform used in the measurement The width of the expansion window determines the lengths of the loss cursors which extend from the distance cursor to the edges of the expansion window When making splice loss measurements you can select the waveform data used in the measurements by adjusting the size of the expansion window You can include or exclude specific fiber features from your measurements this way The cursors may be automatically limited however to exclude featu
261. e expansion window horizontally In expanded SIZE knob view the horizontal SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself horizontally This does not affect distance measurements unless you expand into or out of high density data When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 25 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Vertical POSITION knob Horizontal POSITION knob WFM SELECT button STORE button MODULE SELECT button START STOP button Move the active waveform up and down on the display It is possible to move the waveform off the display When dual trace mode is on the vertical POSITION knob operates only on the active waveform Move the waveform right and left on the display In both overview and expanded view horizontal movement is limited to half the maximum range in either direction When dual trace mode is on the horizontal POSITION knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Pick whether the current waveform or the reference waveform is active The active waveform is the only one on which you can make measurements and is displayed at a brighter intensity than the inactive waveform In single trace mode the active waveform is the only one displayed The indicator next to the WFM S
262. e firmware into the instrument follow the steps given below First the instrument checks the firmware disks then the firmware is loaded into the instrument so you must insert each disk twice during this process E 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix E Firmware Features NOTES With the power turned off to the instrument insert TFP2A Firmware disk 1 into the floppy disk drive Press POWER to turn on the instrument The power on diagnostics are performed The TFP2A displays the following prompts To load from Floppy press the LOAD button To start the instrument press the START button Softkey 4 the fourth softkey from the top is labeled LOAD and softkey 5 is labeled START To start the process that loads the firmware from the floppy disk to the TFP2A s flash ROM where the firmware resides in the instrument press the LOAD softkey To bypass loading the firmware from the floppy disk and start the instrument using the firmware already resident in the flash ROM press the START softkey After you press the LOAD softkey the instrument starts checking the floppy disk Information is displayed about the disk number of disks languages being loaded part number firmware version and date and time When the instrument is finished checking the first disk this prompt appears Insert Disk 2 Remove disk 1 from the floppy disk drive and insert disk 2 Disk 2 is checked and the same information is displayed When the di
263. e instrument s Waveform Settings menu allowing you to change instrument settings and allowing access to additional configuration menus Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on using these menus Move the distance cursor along the waveform A new event return loss measurement is made at the new position When event marking is turned on and you move the distance cursor anywhere onto an event marker or an event the cursor automatically snaps to the location of the event You can then move the cursor on the event If you move the cursor off the event and back on or if you press the Event Return Loss Softkey the cursor snaps onto the event again TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 41 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements CURSOR SELECT knob Vertical LOSS knob Slope LOSS knob EXPAND button Vertical SIZE knob Horizontal SIZE knob Vertical POSITION knob Pick the active loss cursor The active loss cursor is displayed at a brighter intensity than the inactive cursor Pressing and holding the CURSOR SELECT button in Event Return Loss mode joins the loss cursors the inactive loss cursor is placed at the same vertical position and extends along the same slope as the active cursor Move the active loss cursor up and down Use this control to manually match the amplitude of the cursor to the waveform The event return loss value changes as you move the cursor vertically Any manual adjustment to the po
264. e left distance cursor the loss cursor is fixed at a minimum length The distance between the two distance cursors is shown graphically as a dashed line between the cursors The numeric distance value is displayed near the dashed line The return loss for the link specified by the distance cursors is calculated and displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen Link return loss measurements yield the most accurate results with masking off however you can perform link return loss measurements when reflections have been masked using the AccuMask masking type Link return loss measurements on fiber links with reflections that have been masked using the QuickMask masking type are not accurate Manual Link Return Loss Measurements NOTE Make manual adjustments to link return loss measurements by adjusting the slope and vertical position of the loss cursor When it is manually adjusted the loss cursor extends to the edge of the display to help in aligning the cursor with the backscatter The loss cursor then maintains the same angle and vertical position when you move the active distance cursor the amplitude of the point where the loss cursor intersects the distance cursor remains constant as the distance cursor moves The link return loss is recalculated at each new distance cursor position Manual adjustments are retained until you restart automatic link return loss measurements by pressing the Link Return Loss softkey An automat
265. e location as it was in the previous measurement mode The loss cursors move horizontally as the distance cursor is moved An automatic event return loss measurement is made at each new position of the distance cursor if you have not made any manual adjustments The event return loss is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen The left loss cursor is fitted to a segment of waveform data to establish the backscatter level before the reflection being measured This cursor extends from the distance cursor to the left edge of the expansion window so you can control its length by adjusting the width of the expansion window in overview or by positioning the waveform horizontally in expanded view The cursor may be automatically limited however to exclude features from the event return loss measurement such as large reflections The right loss cursor is used to mark the top of the reflection being measured and extends slightly more than a pulse width to the right of the distance cursor The dB difference between the two loss cursors is shown graphically as a dashed line between the cursors The numeric gain or loss value is displayed near the dashed line Normal Density Averages 1024 Time 00 00 05 Event Return Loss 28 9 dB 3 000 km 10 71 dB Gain Event 28 Return Return Settings Loss Cursor Loss cursor Distance cursor aligned with Scattering matched to top Return backscatter
266. e module until it stops While holding the connector in rotate the FREE LOCK screw back to the LOCK position Release the connector universal interface pigtail ferrule connector dios knurling 5 A ee A connector barrel pipe cleaner FREE LOCK screw swab Figure 1 9 Cleaning and Changing the Universal Connector 1 40 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Fuses Filters and Batteries There are no fuses filters or batteries in the FiberMaster that can be changed or maintained by the user TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 41 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 42 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors The functions of FiberMaster s controls indicators and connectors are described in this chapter Figures 2 1 and 2 2 illustrate their locations H HRRD MODULE STRRT TFP2 FiberMaster COPY SELECT STOR HOLD FOR REAL TIME Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 0031 B 094 km 7 CURSOR 401 SELECT i LOSS f WINDOW 1 4 20 EXPRND 10 or she zm T i 2 4 6 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto I WAVEFORM LUE c
267. e two point loss value The loss cursor elongates to make accurate positioning easier Moving the loss cursor vertically affects two point slope calculations For LSA slope calculations the vertical Loss knob vertically positions the loss cursor but maintains the same slope Unlike two point slope calculations LSA slope calculations are not affected by the vertical repositioning of the loss cursor Any manual adjustment to the position of the loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear in the top left corner of the screen Slope LOSS For two point slope calculations rotate the loss cursor at the active distance cursor knob When you are making manual two point loss adjustments this allows you to align the slope of the cursor with the waveform The cursor elongates to make accurate positioning easier This adjustment does not affect measurement values For LSA slope calculations rotate the LSA loss cursor around the point where it touches the active distance cursor This function changes the slope value Any manual adjustment to the automatically placed loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear at the top left of the display EXPAND Switch between overview and expanded view Unless expanded view includes high button density data there is no difference in measurement values except that expanded view measurements may be at higher resolution With high density data there may be slight var
268. e upper and lower modules If a single laser module is located in either position the laser location is U1 or L1 In the example above the power on default module is the 850 nm laser in position L1 while the currently selected module is the 1310 nm laser in position U1 The defaults that apply to the current optical module are in the Default Setting column and designated by the U1 notation The remaining defaults apply to instrument operation in general The softkeys on the menu allow you to save the current setting as the default value for a selected parameter to save the current settings as default values for all user definable defaults to reset the current settings to their power on default values and 3 56 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started to restore all settings to their factory defaults Turning the CURSOR knob causes each successive parameter to be highlighted wrapping from bottom to top The User Defaults menu is two pages long To scroll to the second page turn the CURSOR knob so the highlighting moves past the bottom parameter on the first page To return to the first page turn the CURSOR knob to move the highlight up past the top parameter on the second page Waveform Operator System User Remate Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Turn the CURSOR KNOB to scroll up for previous page Menu Save Param Save All Date Format Keyboard Transla
269. e values are PREVIEW TWOPOINT SPLICELOSS LINKRTNLOSS EVNTRTNLOSS Performs a measurement using the current distance cursor location s and measurement mode The cursor location and measurement mode may be set before sending this query either under local control or using the CURSOR and MEASMODE commands Hemote only Query Syntax Response Syntax SPLICELOSS MEASURE The response syntax depends on the current measurement mode Refer to the descriptions of the response syntax for the TWOPOINT SPLICELOSS LINKRTNLOSS and EVNTRTNLOSS queries Enter Splice Loss mode and return splice loss data for the active waveform Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data SPLICELOSS distance distance DNPD and specifies the point at which to make the measurement distance need not specify an actual data point on the waveform The measurement is made using the waveform point closest to distance lt splicedist gt in the query response gives the actual location of the point SPLICELOSS lt splicedist gt lt loss gt lt splicedist gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the distance to the splice from the instrument s front panel loss lt NR2 gt and specifies the value of the measured splice loss in decibels TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 101 Chapter 8 Remote Control TWOPOINT Enter Two Point mode and return two point measurement for active
270. e waveform only SINGLE Select distance measurement units for the horizontal axis of display Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Factory Default Discussion UNITS lt units gt units CPD and specifies the units of measurement Possible values are METRIC ENGLISH kilometers or kilofeet UNI METRIC METRIC The setting of the UNITS command also determines the units used in all query responses that return distances 8 76 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Module Independent Settings Queries AVERAGES Return the number of sampling acquisitions the instrument averages before stopping an acquisition Query Syntax AVERAGES Response Syntax AVERAGES numavg Response Data lt numavg gt NR 1 and specifies the number of waveforms the instrument will average during an acquisition Discussion The AVERAGES query returns the number of averages that will be used for the next acquisition if the current waveform is active If the reference waveform is active the response is the number of averages that was used to acquire the reference waveform CALCSLOPE Return method used in calculating slope for the active waveform Query Syntax CALCSLOPE Response Syntax CALCSLOPE calc Response Data calc lt CRD gt and specifies the current slope calculation method Possible values are TWOPOINT LSA DATE Return the system date
271. ead it remains in the queue until the next time the ESR query is received At that time events logged prior to the last ESR query are deleted and events logged since the last query and before the current query are enabled to be read EVENT returns only the code for the oldest enabled event in the queue and removes the event from the queue EVMSG returns the code and message for the oldest enabled event in the queue and removes the event from the queue In three cases EVENT and EVMSG do not return and remove an item from the queue but indicate the current state of the queue 1 event 0 is returned when the queue is empty 2 event 1 is returned when ESR must be sent to enable events in the queue for reading and 3 event 350 is returned when the queue has overflowed Standard Event Status Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register SESER allows the host to program which bits of the SESR when set will set the event summary bit in the Status Byte Register The eight bits of the SESER correspond to the bits in the SESR Set the SESER register using the ESE command Read the register using the ESE query Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register STB is used to summarize FiberMaster s internal states and to indicate to the controller if FiberMaster has originated a service request The STB is read during a serial poll and using the STB query It is cleared using the CLS command Three bits in the S
272. ecifies the format of the data sent to the GPIB port The printer or plotter connected to FiberMaster s GPIB port must be configured for listen only mode 8 138 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control HCTYPE Set the format of data output as a result of issuing the GPLTSCREEN and GPLTTEXT queries and the SPLTSCREEN and SPLTTEXT commands Hemote only Command Syntax HCTYPE lt hctype gt Command Data lt hctype gt lt CPD gt Options are PLOTTER HPGL data THINKJET Data format for ThinkJet printer EPSON Data format for Epson printer POSTSCRIPT Data format for PostScript printer Factory Default PLOTTER Discussion When using the GPLTSCREEN or GPLTTEXT queries the EPSON and POSTSCRIPT options are provided for the purpose of transferring Epson or PostScript compatible print commands via GPIB IPRNSCREEN Format and send a representation of the display screen to the internal printer Remote only Command Syntax IPRNSCREEN TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 139 Chapter 8 Remote Control IPRNTEXT Send a text string to the internal printer Remote only Command Syntax IPRNTEXT lt textstring gt Command Data lt textstring gt SPD and specifies a quoted string 1 to 80 characters in length The escape sequences M and M can be used in lt textstring gt to send a newline character or a form feed character to the printer SPLTSCREEN Format waveform and associ
273. ecomes FIBER 02 WFM FIBER 99 WFM becomes FIBER 00 WFM FIBER99 WFM becomes FIBES00 WFM TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 11 Chapter 7 Mass Storage CAUTION FIBERA WFM becomes FIBERB WFM FIBERZ WFM becomes FIBESA WFM The fiber ID is incremented using the same method From the acquisition screen access the Quick Save function as follows 1 Press the Mass Storage softkey The Load from Disk menu displays 2 Fordual drive instruments select the drive to use for the save operation by press ing the Switch Drives softkey 3 Turn the CURSOR knob to select the starting waveform file The first waveform file to be quick saved will have a file name based on the current file 4 Press the STORE button When you press the STORE button the following operations happen automatically The file name of the highlighted file is incremented Q Current waveform and settings are saved into the new file The new file is selected on the Load from Disk menu You are returned to the acquisition screen You can now repeat the Quick Save operation omitting step 3 The name of the last file saved is incremented with the next waveform saved This allows you to save successive waveforms into incremented files simply by pressing the Mass Storage softkey followed by the STORE button each time If the first file you select in the Quick Save operation is one of an already existing series of file names the succeeding files are overwritt
274. ectors DC power option 17 AC power Q CAUTION Listeo 0 REMOVING MODULE PANEL el JO O Je e GPIB O e E RS232 GPIB Figure 2 2 FiberMaster Rear Panel Connectors 2 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 Getting Started This chapter describes how to get started using the FiberMaster OTDR including how to display the online help available in the instrument and how to set up the instrument to your specifications Power on default settings are also listed in this chapter Powering On FiberMaster and Connecting a Fiber Turn on the instrument by pressing the POWER button A brief initialization period follows during which the following sequence occurs 1 The Tektronix logo and name of the instrument are displayed on the screen indicating that the display processor is working properly 2 The display processor and the main processor pe
275. ed view horizontal movement is limited to half the maximum range in either direction When dual trace mode is on the horizontal POSITION knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously 4 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements WFM SELECT Pick whether the current waveform or the reference waveform is active The active button waveform is the only one on which you can make measurements and is displayed at a brighter intensity than the inactive waveform In single trace mode the active waveform is the only one displayed The indicator next to the WFM SELECT button lights to show which waveform is active When dual trace is on and both the current and reference waveforms are displayed the dB scale is that of the active waveform The difference between the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is displayed at the top of the vertical scale To align the two waveforms vertically press and hold the WFM SELECT button The inactive waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB When dual trace is off and the view is in overview pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button zeros the waveform s position it is moved so that 0 dB is at the bottom of the vertical scale and 0 kilometers or kilofeet is at the left of the horizontal scale STORE Store the current waveform into reference memory Any prior contents of reference button mem
276. ed digits count is the count of hex encoded digits in data byte checksum twice the value of count for the binary encoding 8 124 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Discussion Example s For the binary encoding the sequence of bytes data byte not including the checksum is the contents of a FiberMaster waveform or settings file This data is the same as if the user had saved the active waveform or current instrument settings to a mass storage file The application software can write this sequence of bytes to a disk file and subsequently read this file in a FiberMaster floppy disk drive or as an input file to the FMTAP application software If no data is available at the time of the FILE query the entire response data field will be 10 The query FILE WFM NORMAL might return the following response Binary encoding FILE 4548801 byte 1 gt lt byte 2 gt byte 48000 gt lt checksum byte where 5 indicates the next five digits are the byte count 48801 The byte count includes the 48800 bytes of waveform file data plus the terminating checksum The response would be FILE 10 if no waveform data had been acquired since power on ASCII encoding FILE 597602FC55 B7A2 5 indicates that the next five digits 97602 are the count of all the bytes to follow including the checksum bytes The first actual byte of waveform data has the hex value FC the
277. ed letter The cursor advances to the next available character position The Delete Char softkey deletes the character under the cursor If the cursor is on the next available character position which is blank the character to the left of the cursor is deleted To correct characters to the left of the cursor press Delete Char to move backwards then re enter the note The new note takes effect when you exit the field by pressing Next Event or Previous Event or when you exit the screen by pressing Event Notes or Exit NOTE Event notes are erased with a new acquisition when the event marking parameter is set to Auto Event notes are also erased when you press the Auto Mark Events softkey on the Place Event Markers screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 13 Chapter 5 Event Marking Manual Event Marking Automatic event marking keeps track of the noise level on the waveform under test in order to avoid marking noise spikes as events However you may still see an occasional noise spike labeled with an event marker Or a large echo might be marked as an event On the other hand automatic event marking may miss a non reflective event when the splice loss is small or the waveform is noisy In these Cases you can use FiberMaster s manual event marking feature to add or remove event markers when necessary The Place Event Markers screen is available via a softkey on the Waveform Settings menu when the Event Marking pop up window is di
278. eflections mask the first reflection but not the second one Manual Masking Softkeys Moving a Mask The masking operation uses softkeys and two distance cursors to modify the masks Use the distance cursors to specify the mask to be modified and the softkeys to make the modification as follows Next Mask advance the distance cursors to the next mask A cursor is placed on either side of the mask Pressing Next Mask selects the mask to the right of the current cursor positions and wraps to the first mask on the waveform from the last one The selected mask is highlighted New Mask create a new mask that you can move to any point on the waveform Remove Mask delete the mask on which the distance cursors are located Change Settings return to the Masking Type parameter on the Waveform Settings menu Exit exit the menu system and return to the acquisition screen You can move a mask in the direction of the inactive distance cursor For example to move a mask to the right along the waveform follow these steps 1 Using the Next Mask softkey place the distance cursors on the mask to be moved 2 Press the CURSOR SELECT button to select the left hand distance cursor as the active cursor 3 Turn the CURSOR knob clockwise to move the distance cursor to the right Move the active cursor pushing the inactive cursor until you reach the location along the waveform where you want to place the mask 4 Place the cursors on
279. egister are set respectively FiberMaster has an input buffer used to store incoming program messages It has a capacity of 512 bytes Whenever the input buffer fills the GPIB handshake line NRFD Not Ready For Data is asserted to prevent the controller from sending another byte In this case NRFD is released whenever the instrument reads the next byte from the input buffer or a device clear message SDC or DCL causes the input buffer to be cleared FiberMaster logs query response data in the Output Queue which has a capacity of 512 bytes When this queue is not empty the MAV bit in the STB is turned on If enabled by the SRER this condition turns on the RQS bit and generates a service request A buffer deadlock condition can arise if the input buffer overflows from an incoming query message while the instrument has filled the Output Queue with a response message This condition can be avoided by not sending a long query message greater than 512 bytes If this condition occurs event 430 is logged in the Event Queue and all data in the output queue is lost As described previously when FiberMaster is in REMS the Return to Local softkey appears on the display In addition the remaining five softkeys can be programmed to generate a user request event These softkeys function as follows TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 15 Chapter 8 Remote Control Return to Local Pressing the Return to Local softkey causes the instrument
280. elected Valid settings for these parameters can be obtained by sending module information queries described in the following pages Execution errors are generated if settings commands specify options or values not available for the currently selected optics module MASKSET Select automatic masking type This command is available only if the currently selected laser source supports masking Manual masking is not selectable under remote control Remote only Command Syntax MASKSET lt masktype gt Command Data masktype CPD and specifies the type of automatic masking Possible values are OFF QUICK ACCU OFF Disable masking QUICK Enable QuickMask masking ACCU Enable AccuMask masking Power On Value ACCU if supported by optics module otherwise OFF Discussion Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for descriptions of the various masking types The new masking type takes effect immediately and is used for the next acquisition The command is executed even if the reference waveform is currently selected 8 80 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control MODSELECT Select a front panel optical module and wavelength Hemote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Power On Value Discussion MODSELECT lt slot gt lt module gt slot lt CPD gt UPPER Selects a wavelength in the upper module LOWER Selects a wavelength in the lower module module CPD
281. elected module OFF Masking is available but disabled QUICK QuickMask masking is enabled ACCU AccuMask masking is enabled Discussion Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for descriptions of the various masking types MODLOWER Determine what wavelengths if any are in the lower module on the front panel Query Syntax MODLOWER Response Syntax MODLOWER NONE MODLOWER MM850 MM1300 MODLOWER SM1310 SM1550 MODLOWER MMB850 MODLOWER MM1300 MODLOWER SM1310 MODLOWER SM1550 8 86 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control The first response indicates that no module is installed in the lower slot on the front panel Other responses indicate that one or two wavelengths are available in the lower module MODUPPER Determine what wavelengths if any are in the upper module on the front panel Query Syntax MODUPPER Response Syntax MODUPPER NONE MODUPPER MM850 MM1300 MODUPPER SM1310 SM1550 MODUPPER MM850 MODUPPER MM1300 MODUPPER SM1310 MODUPPER SM1550 The first response indicates that no module is installed in the upper slot on the front panel Other responses indicate that one or two wavelengths are available in the upper module PULSELIST Determine available pulse widths for the currently selected module and specified maximum range Query Syntax PULSELIST lt maxrange gt Query Data maxrange lt DNPD gt and specifies the desired maximum range or use a value of 0 to return all available
282. election Window System Settings Menu Use the Display Color window to select the color or colors used on the instrument s display The default setting is Color which uses the full range of colors available for display A selection of monochromatic colors is also available Turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have the optional keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The color setting takes effect as you change the selection allowing you to see the new display color immediately 3 38 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Sound To display the Sound pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the sound parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium change the selection Sound On Remote Time 18 03 16 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 21 Sound Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu FiberMaster s front panel controls beep to indicate they are not functioning in the current instrument mode and t
283. election window displayed If you exit the menus then re enter by pressing the Change Settings softkey again the instrument brings up the last Waveform Settings window that you viewed before exiting the menus The settings you can define on the Waveform Settings menu are Pulse width Maximum range Maximum number of averages Refractive index Slope calculation Scattering coefficient Dual trace Event threshold Event marking mode Masking type and manual masks if supported by the laser source FS series 1310 nm SM and 1550 nm SM Software filtering available only when an FL series module is selected m TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 9 Chapter 3 Getting Started Pulse Width Press the Change Settings softkey to enter the menu system When you initially enter the menu system after power on the first Waveform Settings pop up selection window Pulse Width displays If the Pulse Width window is not displayed upon entering the menu system press Next Param or Prev Param until the pulse width parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Settings Settings Settings Defaults Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection Maximum Range Remote Pulse Width 40 10 ns 1 m HR 20 ns 2 m HR 50 ns 5 m HR 10 0 km 30 50 ns 5 m 100 ns 10 m 200 ns 20 m 20 1000 ns 100 2000 ns 20
284. ements and comparing two waveforms by displaying them simultaneously This chapter explains the following Details on the expansion function Extending the acquisition range High density data acquisition Dual trace mode Real time data acquisition Manual masking C O O C O O TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 1 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions The Expansion Window The EXPAND button on FiberMaster s front panel allows you to magnify a selected area of the active waveform The magnified area is defined by the expansion window a rectangle visible on the acquisition screen at the active distance cursor The default size for this rectangle is one fifth of the width and one half the height of the overview Normal Density Averages 20480 Event Time 00 00 31 Table dB 6 458 km 0 081 km Two Expansion 30 window 10 Mass Storage 0 Li T T T T 0 2 4 6 8 Pulse Width 2 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Ma iq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Seater Coefficient 82 3 Masking 0 E Max 20 480 21 4 s Jual Trace Off Module i 315 13108M Settings Ref Ipdex 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJUJfa WFM Normal Derisity Averages 20480 Event ime 00 00 31 Table dB 6 458 km 26 Two Point 24 22 Splice Loss 20 18 Return Loss 16 14 Mass Storage T T T yi x T rw 5 000 5 500 6 000 6 500 7 000 7 500 km Expanded
285. en display range 50 m to 100 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 0 to 50 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs lt 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection 1 36 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FM8513 Multimode Optical Module Table 1 20 FM8513 Multimode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 850 nm 100 ns 10 m 27 0 36 0 13 0 10 5 50
286. en the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is displayed at the top of the vertical scale To align the two waveforms vertically press and hold the WFM SELECT button The inactive waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB When dual trace is off and the view is in overview pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button zeros the waveform s position it is moved so that 0 dB is at the bottom of the vertical scale and 0 kilometers or kilofeet is at the left of the horizontal scale Store the current waveform into reference memory Any prior contents of reference memory are erased Select the next available laser Changing the laser source requires a new acquisition When you press the MODULE SELECT button a message displays instructing you to press START STOP to acquire new data using the new laser In addition any waveform parameters that change when you change laser sources are highlighted to show that these parameters no longer match the displayed waveform data The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired Start a new acquisition Any manually adjusted measurements are retained until you press the Link Return Loss softkey to restart measurements If an acquisition is already in progress pressing the START STOP button stops the acquisition Pressing and holding the START STOP button starts a real time acquisition During a real time acquisition the return loss
287. en with new waveform data Take care when selecting the starting waveform file that you do not unintentionally overwrite waveform data If the file name you select for a Quick Save operation is a settings file that file name is incremented and a WFM extension is appended The current waveform and settings data is saved in the file Exiting the Save to Disk Menu To go to the Format menu press the Next Menu softkey To return to the acquisition screen press Exit 7 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Format From the acquisition screen display the Format menu by pressing the Mass Storage softkey then press the Next Menu softkey twice The format function formats the media in the selected drive depending on which mass storage device s are installed in your instrument MS DOS format is used For instruments with only one mass storage device figure 7 6 pressing the Format softkey formats a floppy disk or the internal RAM drive For a floppy disk the disk Load Save Delete From Disk To Disk Next FILE SPECIFICATION Menu Drive Type Removable File Type TFP2 File HARRISO1 WFM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT AVE JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 4M Removable Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRISO1 WEM
288. ence waveform is currently selected Change method of calculating slope Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Factory Default Discussion CALCSLOPE calc calc CPD and specifies the type of slope calculation Possible values are TWOPOINT Use the Two Point method to calculate slope LSA Use the Least Squares Average method to calculate slope CALC TWOP TWOPOINT The new slope calculation takes effect with the active waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 73 Chapter 8 Remote Control DATE Set real time clock date Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s FIBERID DATE lt date gt date SPD of the form YYYY MM DD where YYYY year MM month DD day DAT 1988 01 22 DAT 1988 12 25 Set the system fiber ID parameter which is used to identify a waveform Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion Power On Value FIBERNOTE FIBERID lt idstring gt lt idstring gt SPD and specifies a string 1 20 characters long Only the first 20 characters are stored FIBERI FIBERONE FIBERID ALPHAX2S The fiber ID string is used by the next SAVECUR or SAVEREF operation waveform or settings and is printed on hard copies The new fiber ID takes effect with the active waveform Null string Enter notes on cable or front panel settings Remote only Command Syntax Command Data
289. ent rating as specified in the parts list for your product Refer fuse replacement to qualified Service personnel Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres To avoid explosion do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere unless it has been specifically certified for such operation Do Not Remove Covers or Panels To avoid personal injury do not remove the product covers or panels Do not operate the product without the covers or panel properly installed Laser Radiation Avoid eye exposure to the laser output and open ended fibers by covering the end or directing the output at a non reflective surface FiberMaster has been classified as a Class 1 laser product under the Radiation Control and Health Safety Act of 1968 Repair Refer all repair problems to qualified service personnel xviii TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual ATTENTION Introduction the FiberMaster OTDR Read the Safety Information section located at the front of this manual before operating FiberMaster This manual applies to the TFP2A firmware shown on the title page of this manual For a list of firmware releases and major features refer to appendix E The information in this appendix will help you use this manual with earlier TFP2 firmware versions If you have questions about using FiberMaster or have special application problems in the U S and Canada call our toll free help line 1 800 TEK WIDE ext 24 or contact your local Tektronix representati
290. ent s front panel The internal printer is the built in thermal printer the GPIB plotter is an HP GL compatible color GPIB plotter and the RS232 plotter is an HP GL compatible color serial plotter The factory default setting is Internal Printer if installed or RS232 Epson if not You can specify a different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Select the hardcopy device by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The internal printer selection does not display if the printer is not installed in your instrument When using the TFP2A with a Hewlett Packard LaserJet printer select the RS232 ThinkJet option on the Hard Copy Device menu The hardcopy device setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 47 Chapter 3 Getting Started Any of the printer selections produces a waveform print when you press the HARD COPY button while an acquisition screen is on the display and prints the contents of the screen when any other display is current i e a menu or help screen The external plotters produce only waveform plots If you select a plotter as the hardcopy device and press the HARD COPY button when any display otherthan an acquisition Screen is current a beep sounds and the plotter does not produce a plot
291. ent table Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data EVNTTHRESH EVNTNOTES lt eventnum gt lt eventnum gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the number of the event within the event table EVNTNOTES lt notes gt notes lt SRD gt Return the setting of the event threshold for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Response Data EVNTTHRESH EVNTTHRESH threshold threshold lt NR2 gt and specifies the current event threshold setting in decibels Refer to the EVNTTHRESH command description TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 107 Chapter 8 Remote Control Event Marker Commands and Queries The following commands and queries are available only when manual event marking is selected refer to the EVNTMARKING command description ADDMARKER Add an event marker to the Place Event Markers screen The marked event is measured and entered into the event table Measurements for other events in the table are updated if they are affected by the new addition Remote only Command Syntax ADDMARKER distance Command Data distance lt DNPD gt and specifies the location of the new marker in distance units kilometers or kilofeet Discussion The new marker is not added to the event table if its splice loss is not equal to or greater than the current event threshold DELMARKDIST Delete an event marker from the Place Event Markers
292. enter Two Point mode The distance cursor where the last splice loss measurement was made becomes the active distance cursor Restart automatic splice loss measurements and clear any previous manual adjustments You can manually adjust a splice loss measurement using the CURSOR SELECT button and the vertical and slope Loss knobs as described for these controls Any manual adjustments made in Splice Loss mode are retained until you press the Splice Loss softkey again If you leave Splice Loss mode after making manual adjustments the adjustments are saved and redisplayed when you re enter Splice Loss mode unless you make changes in the related return loss mode Event Return Loss see note on previous page In this case press the Splice Loss softkey again to clear user adjusted measurements and make a new splice loss measurement using the current distance cursor position From Splice Loss mode press and hold the Splice Loss softkey for two seconds to exit Splice Loss mode and enter Preview mode This softkey is available only when return loss is off Pressing Return Loss turns the return loss measurement modes on When return loss is on the Two Point softkey is replaced by the Link Return Loss softkey and the Splice Loss softkey is replaced by the Event Return Loss softkey The Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Exit Return Loss softkey Pressing Exit Return Loss turns off the return loss modes the softkeys revert to Two Point and Splic
293. enter the File Name window the file name of the last file saved or selected is displayed The cursor is on the next available character position To enter a character turn the CURSOR knob until the desired character is highlighted in the character set shown The letter under the cursor in the file name changes to correspond with the highlighted letter in the character set Load Save From Disk To Disk ooo Delete FILE SPECIFICATIO Menu Drive Type Removabl Tum the CURSOR knob to pick a character in the list File Format TFP2 Press CURSOR SELECT to choose which character to edit File Name HARRISO1 WFM 14 4 File Name Ext 25 kbytes HARRISO1 Save EIBCDEFGHJKLMNOPQRSTUVWxYz 22 _0123456789 amp lt MIDLAK AWFNM Delete Char Exit Enter filename and press the Save softkey Figure 7 5 Save Menu Single Drive Instrument TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 9 Chapter 7 Mass Storage Date and Time 2 Press the Next Char softkey to accept the selected letter The cursor advances to the next available character position Press the CURSOR SELECT button to move the character selecting cursor to the file name You can then turn the CURSOR knob to go directly to the character in the file name that you wish to edit Pressing CURSOR SELECT again moves the character selecting cursor back to the character set and turning the CURSOR knob selects a new l
294. eporting of events in the SESR and the Event Queue Refer to the descriptions of the Standard Event Status Register and the Status Byte Register in the following pages When an event enabled by the DESER occurs the corresponding bit in the SESR is set and a code and corresponding message explaining the event are stored in the 8 38 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Event Queue Event codes and their meanings are listed in the section RS 232 Event Codes and Messages later in this chapter The DESER defaults to an ASCII value of 255 all bits on meaning that all types of events will be logged in the SESR and Event Queue To disable the logging of selected event types set the value of the register to the appropriate bit mask by using the DESE command For definitions of the bits in the DESER refer to the description of the SESR in the following paragraphs Standard Event Status Register The eight bits of the Standard Event Status Register SESR log individual events occurring in the instrument The SESR is cleared set to 0 when the power is turned on after being read by sending the ESR query and when the CLS command is issued The bit definitions of the SESR are listed below When a defined event occurs and is enabled by the DESER the corresponding bit is turned on in the SESR and an event code and message pair is logged in the Event Queue Bit 7 Power On PON When set to 1 the power on
295. er User Manual 8 21 Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Controller and Instrument Synchronization FiberMaster executes all commands and queries sequentially which means that any device operation initiated by a command or query must be complete before the next command or query is executed FiberMaster provides the controller with a means of determining when the instrument has completed a device operation and allowing the controller to exchange messages with other devices on the bus in the meantime The controller can send the command or OPC query after a command or query that starts a device operation Refer to the Commands and Queries section of this chapter for complete descriptions of FiberMaster s GPIB commands and queries Responses to individual queries are generated at the time FiberMaster detects the query not when the controller reads the query The message available bit MAV in the Status Byte Register indicates when query response data is available When used in conjunction with FiberMaster s service request capability the OPC command OPC query and MAV bit allow the controller to be notified when FiberMaster completes a device operation The following examples illustrate these synchronization techniques Example 1 1 The controller sends the query message ACQUIRE 10 0 START NORMAL OPC followed by the talk address of the instrument 2 FiberMaster starts an acquisition When the acquisition is complete
296. er to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on how to use these menus Move the active distance and loss cursors along the waveform New link return loss measurements are made at the new position 4 32 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements CURSOR Pick which distance cursor is controlled by the CURSOR knob The active cursor is SELECT knob displayed at a brighter intensity to differentiate it from the inactive cursor The CURSOR SELECT button also offers a join cursors function useful when the inactive cursor is not on the screen Press and hold the CURSOR SELECT button to move the inactive distance cursor to the same location as the active cursor Vertical LOSS Move the loss cursor up and down Note that the left hand distance cursor must be knob X active in order to adjust the loss cursor Use this knob to manually adjust the link return loss value by adjusting the vertical position of the loss cursor to match the backscatter The loss cursor elongates to make accurate positioning easier Moving the loss cursor vertically affects link return loss calculations Any manual adjustment to the position of the loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear in the top left corner of the screen Slope LOSS Rotate the loss cursor around the point where it meets the distance cursor Note that knob _ the left hand distance cursor must be active in order to adjust the loss cursor
297. erMaster unpacking and repacking instructions instrument specifications and user maintenance Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors describes the functions of each of the front and rear panel controls and connectors Chapter 3 Getting Started explains how to use the online help function lists settings defaults and describes the menu system used to configure the instrument and set measurement parameters Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements describes each of the measurement modes Preview Two Point Splice Loss Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss and how to make automatic and manual measurements on a fiber in these modes Chapter 5 Event Marking explains the process of locating measuring and documenting events on the fiber under test Events can be marked either automatically or manually An event table of measurements is compiled based on the locations of the event markers Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions outlines advanced aspects of some of FiberMaster s features including details on the expansion window high density data acquisition dual waveform operation and real time mode Chapter 7 Mass Storage explains how to use the mass storage device s floppy disk drive internal RAM to store and retrieve waveform and settings data Chapter 8 Remote Control contains the remote control command set and instructions on how to use the instrument under remote control via GPIB and R
298. erMaster s System Settings menu This device could be for example the internal printer an external GPIB plotter a serial plotter or a serial printer Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for instructions on using FiberMaster s menu system A printer either internal or external produces waveform prints when an acquisition is displayed on the screen and you press the HARDCOPY button When any other screen is displayed i e a menu screen the printer produces a hard copy of the screen The external plotters RS232 or GPIB only produce waveform plots If you press the HARDCOPY button when any screen otherthan an acquisition screen is displayed a beep sounds to indicate that no plot will be made If you use an external GPIB plotter or printer pressing the HARDCOPY button causes the instrument s GPIB status to reset temporarily to talk only for the duration of the plot When the hard copy finishes the instrument automatically switches back to the original GPIB status setting Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for information on setting GPIB settings Waveform prints include the date and time the acquisition was started the measurement mode used and the current instrument settings If the acquisition screen was in dual trace mode instrument settings for both waveforms are printed Whether the screen includes user adjusted measurements or high density data is also noted on the printout as well as the actual number of averages per
299. ering coefficient and masking type Exit return to the acquisition screen Until you use the User Defaults menu to define power on defaults for instrument parameters the factory set defaults remain in effect The factory set power on defaults are listed earlier in this chapter 3 58 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Remote Menu The Remote menu shown below allows you to perform a number of XModem data transfer operations Go to the Remote menu from the acquisition screen by pressing the Change Settings softkey then pressing Next Menu four times Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu XModem Send Binary Send Ref Wim 300 sectors transferred in 43 seconds Receive Transfer rate 893 characters per second Ref The transfer was successful Figure 3 38 Remote Menu Perform XModem operations by pressing the appropriate softkey on the menu During data transfers status information displays on the menu screen The softkeys perform the following functions Next Menu go to the next menu From the Remote menu pressing the Next Menu softkey displays the Waveform Settings menu Send Ref Wfm send the contents of reference memory the reference waveform and associated settings This softkey does not function if reference memory is empty Receive Ref Wfm receive a waveform file The file is stored in reference memory repla
300. erted or as device dependent messages when ATN is unasserted IFC Interface Clear used to initialize the interface functions of all instruments SRQ Service Request asserted to request service from the controller in charge 8 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control REN Remote Enable allows remote control of devices on the bus EOI End Or Identify indicates the last byte of a message or when asserted with ATN polls devices connected to the bus EOI is only used as a message terminator on FiberMaster and will be referred to in this manual as END Refer to ANSI IEEE standards 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation and 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for full definitions of these lines and protocol for use GPIB Interface Functions The following GPIB interface functions are implemented in FiberMaster Table 8 1 FiberMaster GPIB Interface Functions Function SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO E2 Description Source message transfer capability Accept message capability Basic talker serial poll talk only mode unaddress if MLA Basic listener no listen only mode unaddress if MTA Ability to request service via SRQ line Ability to enable disable local control No parallel poll function Device clear capability No device trigger function No controller function Tri state drivers
301. es TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 17 Chapter 5 Event Marking Storing and Retrieving Event Markers Event marker locations and event table measurements are stored to disk along with instrument settings information You can save event markers and later retrieve and reuse them by saving the waveform and associated settings or by saving the instrument settings alone When you reload the waveform or settings file to current memory the event marker information is also reloaded By setting the event marking parameter to Manual the loaded marker locations are used to determine where measurements are made for subsequent acquisitions This way you can use one set of markers to build an event table for each fiber bundled within a cable For example Generate and save event markers for the first fiber 1 Connect the first fiber to FiberMaster and press the START STOP button to start an acquisition with the event marking parameter set to Auto Event markers are located measurements are made and an event table is compiled automatically 2 Press the HARD COPY button to document the waveform 3 Press the Event Table softkey to go to the Event Table screen If necessary enter notes about the events marked on the fiber 4 Press the HARD COPY button to print the event table and notes for the current fiber 5 Press the Mass Storage softkey to enter the mass storage system and save the current instrument settings into a disk file Y
302. etter for the character in the file name being edited Use the Delete Char softkey to delete the character under the cursor If the cursor is blank indicating the next available character position the character to the left of the cursor is deleted To change characters to the left of the cursor either 1 Press Delete Char to move backwards then re enter the character string or 2 Press CURSOR SELECT to move the character selecting cursor to the file name then turn the CURSOR knob counterclockwise to select the character to edit If you have the optional keyboard you can type in the file name Refer to appendix B for a list of keyboard editing functions and key sequences that duplicate front panel controls in the mass storage menus The date and time fields are automatically set by the instrument s internal clock Files are date and time stamped when saved You cannot change the system date and time on the mass storage menus To reset the system date or time go to the System Settings menu by pressing the Change Settings softkey from the acquisition screen Fiber ID Notes and Operator The fiber ID notes and operator are optional information entered on the Operator Settings menu and saved with the waveform If you have not entered the fiber ID notes or operator since powering on the instrument these fields are blank On the mass storage menus these fields are shown for information only on the Load Delete and Copy menus and c
303. events on the active waveform that have splice losses exceeding the current event marking threshold This is the same function as pressing the Auto Mark Events softkey on the Place Event Markers screen Remote only Command Syntax EVNTAUTOMARK EVNTMARKING Select automatic or manual event marking Remote only Command Syntax EVNTMARKING marking type Command Data marking type lt CPD gt Possible values are AUTOMATIC MANUAL Factory Default AUTOMATIC Discussion The new event marking mode takes effect with the active waveform EVNTMEAS Store the current measurement splice loss or event return loss into the event table Remote only Command Syntax EVNTMEAS Discussion If the current measurement is a splice loss or event return loss at one of the events in the event table the measurement value is entered into the appropriate column of the table for that event and the event table is updated EVNTNOTES Store notes for a particular event into the event table Remote only Command Syntax EVNTNOTES lt eventnum gt lt notes gt Command Data lt eventnum gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the number of the event within the event table notes SPD where the number of characters within quotes must not exceed 79 characters Example s EVNTNOTES 3 R037 003 SE Corner of 7th amp Elm stores a note for event 3 into the event table TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 103 Chapter 8 Remote
304. events on the fiber under test An online table is compiled that contains two point splice loss return loss and distance measurements for each event You can adjust measurement values on the table and enter and edit notes for each event A general purpose interface bus GPIB and the RS 232 serial interface allow remote control of the instrument Advanced Functions FiberMaster s automatic measurements provide adequate data for many applications If you require more in depth fiber analysis however the instrument s advanced functions offer extended flexibility in acquiring and interpreting fiber data These functions include High density data acquisition A dual waveform display for comparing two waveforms Manipulation of the expansion window Real time acquisition Manual masking capabilities O O O 1 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Instrument Configuration Instrument configuration and measurement settings are set through a menu system accessed by pressing a front panel softkey You can set parameters using various front panel controls to enter the data or you can connect an optional IBM AT compatible keyboard to FiberMaster for data entry Mass Storage The mass storage system is also entered through a front panel softkey for storing waveform and settings data on floppy disks or an optional internal RAM Data is saved in MS DOS compatible files TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual
305. f reference memory are erased Select the next available laser Changing the laser source requires a new acquisition When you press the MODULE SELECT button a message displays instructing you to press START STOP to acquire new data using the new laser In addition any waveform parameters that change when you change laser sources are highlighted to show that these parameters no longer match the displayed waveform data The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired Start a new acquisition If an acquisition is already in progress pressing the START STOP button stops it Pressing and holding the START STOP button starts a real time acquisition The measurement mode automatically switches to Two Point during a real time acquisition The Loss knobs have no effect in Preview mode 4 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Preview Mode Measurements Examples Use Preview mode to measure fiber length and distances to events on the fiber as shown in these examples 1 Turn the CURSOR knob to move the active distance cursor to the leading edge of the event In the example below the cursor is on the reflection caused by the end of the fiber Normal Density Averages 20480 Event Time 00 00 31 Table 9 287 km lt lt 4 028 km Two Point 24 20 Splice Loss 16 12 Return Loss 8 Mass 4 Storage T X T 7 500 8 000 8 500 9 000
306. ff Event Threshold 0 00 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Module F 1315 13105M File PW 3 WFM Change Settings Figure 5 18 Automatically Marked Fusion Splice This example shows how you can use FiberMaster s maximum averages parameter to improve event marking accuracy Figure 5 19 shows a noisy waveform for a fiber that has a fusion splice at about 6 75 km The splice was not marked because of the noise in the waveform Normal Density Averages 1024 Time 00 00 18 7 457 km Return 1055 Event Table Two Point Splice Loss T 5 500 T T 5 000 6 500 T 7 000 7 500 Mass Storage Event 4 Dist 7457 km Loss 0 047 dB Event Ret Loss 41 3 dB Pulse Width 50 ns 5 m Maximum Range 25 0 km Max Avqs 1 024 15 0 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 00 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Module F51315 13108M File AVG 1 WFM Change Settings Figure 5 19 Fusion Splice Undetected in Noise 5 24 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking By increasing the number of averages FiberMaster does during data acquisition and reacquiring the waveform we can improve the signal to noise ratio of the waveform and reduce the effects of noise In this case we increased the number of averages from 1024 to
307. fficient however it is recommended that you use the factory default values which depend on the laser source as follows 850 nm MM 62 5 core diameter 62 3 dB 1300 nm MM 62 5 core diameter 69 7 dB 1310 nm SM 80 3 dB 1550 nm SM 82 3 dB d d d d If you do not know the scattering coefficient of a particular fiber but the fiber includes a reflection for which the return loss is known you can adjust the scattering coefficient by performing an event return loss measurement on the reflection and adjusting the scattering coefficient until the return loss value is correct When comparing a return loss measurement to any previous return loss measurements made on the same event be sure to use the same scattering coefficient value that was used for the previous measurement You can set a different power on scattering coefficient for the currently selected laser source using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 21 Chapter 3 Getting Started Dual Trace To display the Dual Trace pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the dual trace parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu Next Param 40 Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection Je su Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m
308. filename COPYSET assumes a SET extension and COPYWFM assumes a WFM extension DELETE Delete specified file from the floppy disk or internal RAM drive On instruments with both types of drives the file is deleted from the device selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Command Syntax DELETE lt filename gt Command Data filename SPD and specifies the file name to be deleted The full file name including extension if any must be specified Example s DELETE TESTWFM DELETE FIBO90 WFM DELETE 850TEST SET DELETE 850TEST OBJ 8 130 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control DELSET DELWFM Delete waveform or settings file from the floppy disk or internal RAM drive On instruments with both types of drive the file is deleted from the device selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Command Syntax DELSET lt filename gt DELWFM filename Command Data filename SPD and specifies the file name to be deleted Example s DELW FIBO90 DELW FIBO90 WFM DELS 850TEST DELS 850TEST SET Discussion If no extension is specified in filename DELSET assumes a SET extension and DELWFM assumes a WFM extension DRIVESELECT Select the internal RAM or floppy disk drive for subsequent mass storage operations For instruments with internal RAM and a floppy disk drive Remote only Command Syntax DRIVESELECT drive Command Data dr
309. fined defaults Remote menu the Remote menu allows serial port data transfers The operations available from this menu are to send receive and stop an XModem data transfer Status messages display on the Remote screen during data transfers to keep you informed of operation status In addition to the configuration menus if a mass storage device or devices floppy disk and internal RAM are installed in your instrument a softkey allows access to the Mass Storage menu system Use the Mass Storage menu system to write and read waveform and settings data to and from disk This system is described in detail in chapter 7 Mass Storage TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 7 Chapter 3 Getting Started Entering the Menu System To enter the menu system from the start up screen or from any acquisition screen press the Change Settings softkey In the menus the softkeys are redefined and the front panel controls function as follows Function Control Print a hard copy of the screen HARD COPY contents on the printer if installed Read online help HELP Select parameter value or enter CURSOR knob numeric and alphanumeric data Begin a new acquisition or start START STOP real time mode without exiting the current menu Waveform Settings menu only Position the waveform on the POSITION knobs display Waveform Settings menu only All front panel controls besides those listed here are not functional in the menu sys
310. for part s part number list Block erase error for part s part number list FM 8 FM 9 FM 10 Erase sequence error for part s part number list Parallel data failure for part s part number list Checksum failed FM 11 FM 12 FM 13 Invalid block number parameter Write enable failed Write disable failed FM 14 Unexpected error TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual F 3 Appendix F Error Codes Power On Diagnostic Error Codes During the first phase of power on diagnostics the front panel LEDs indicate which part of the test sequence is running The LED code is flashed just prior to starting the specific test so if the instrument halts the pattern displayed reflects the test that failed The pattern codes are as follows Table F 3 LED Error Codes REMOTE REFERENCE CURRENT WINDOW Error Condition LED LED LED LED Off Off Off Off Self test complete Off Off Off On LED bus error test Off Off On Off Unused Off On On Off Parallel port test Off Off On On Core RAM test Off On Off Off Shared RAM test Off On Off On Display processor test Off On On On Comprehensive RAM test On Off Off Off Floating point coprocessor test On Off Off On Serial port test On Off On Off Serial port test complete On Off On On Unused On On Off Off Status register bus error test On On Off On Unused On On On Off Unused On On On On Initial LED write read verify tes
311. form In Two Point mode and both return loss modes the slope calculation and return loss respectively appears in the upper right hand corner of the screen The message User Adjusted Measurement displays in the upper left hand corner of the screen for all manually adjusted measurements The actual number of averages that were performed on the waveform and the actual elapsed averaging time are shown in the upper center screen If an acquisition is in progress the number of averages and the time elapsed are seen increasing During an acquisition the display also contains an acquisition active indicator in the lower left corner of the waveform area This indicator provides a quick way to check whether an acquisition is still in progress When data acquisition is complete and calculations are still in progress the indicator changes to show a clock with a swinging pendulum When event marking mode is turned on events on the fiber are marked and numbered at the bottom of the acquisition screen In addition when the active distance cursor is on an event marker a field below the horizontal distance scale displays measurements for that event On color monitors the waveform area of the acquisition screen is color coded for easier interpretation of data and measurements Waveform data including the active waveform except for high density data the number of averages elapsed time and the Normal Density or High Density message is green The user
312. formation on setting the dual trace parameter refer to chapter 3 Getting Started Details on using dual trace are given in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions When dual trace is on and both the current and reference waveforms are displayed the dB scale is that of the active waveform The difference between the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is displayed at the top of the vertical scale To align the two waveforms vertically press and hold the WFM SELECT button The inactive 2 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB When dual trace is off and the view is in overview pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button zeros the waveform s position it is moved so that 0 dB is at the bottom of the vertical scale and 0 kilometers or kilofeet is at the left of the horizontal scale STORE Press this button to store the current waveform and associated instrument settings into reference memory The previous contents of reference memory are overwritten In addition to instrument settings the date and time the acquisition was started the actual elapsed acquisition time and number of averages high density data and any user adjusted measurements are saved into reference memory TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 2 11 Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors Conn
313. formed and the elapsed acquisition time The fiber ID notes and operator s name are also printed as entered on the Operator Settings menu 2 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors HELP Push the HELP button to read help information on the current operation being performed by FiberMaster For example if the instrument is in Splice Loss mode pressing the HELP button lets you read explanations on splice loss measurement and the functions of the front panel controls in Splice Loss mode In the menu system pressing the HELP button displays information about the currently selected setting REMOTE When lighted this indicator shows that FiberMaster is under remote control via GPIB KEYBOARD Connector for an optional keyboard Connect any IBM AT compatible keyboard to FiberMaster to duplicate the front panel controls Keyboard sequences recognized by the instrument are listed in appendix B The keyboard must be plugged into the instrument before you turn on the power TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 2 3 Chapter 2 Controls Indicators and Connectors Optical Output Controls MODULE START SELECT STOP HOLD FOR REAL TIME MODULE SELECT Pushing this button selects the laser source On the power on screen press this button to cycle through all available optical modules On the acquisition screen however when you press the MODULE SELECT button the following mes
314. fter any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 29 Chapter 1 Introduction FG1300 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 13 FG1300 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 10 us 1000 m 31 0 38 0 1150 1150 4000 ns 400 m 28 5 38 0 550 475 2000 ns 200 m 25 5 38 0 250 225 1000 ns 100 m 24 0 38 0 150 110 500 ns 50 m 21 5 38 0 80 55 200 ns 20 m 19 5 38 0 55 25 100 ns 10 m 18 0 38 0 50 12 50 ns 5 m 16 5 38 0 45 10 50 ns 5 m HR 13 5 34 0 30 7 20 ns 2 m HR 11 5 34 0 25 5 10 ns 1 m HR 9 5 34 0 N A 4 Operating wavelength 1310 nm 20 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 50 m to 200 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 30 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 096 Weight 4 4 lbs 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between
315. ftkey and the Splice Loss softkey is replaced by the Event Return Loss softkey The Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Exit Return Loss softkey Pressing Exit Return Loss turns off the return loss modes the softkeys revert to Two Point and Splice Loss and the instrument returns to Two Point mode Enter the mass storage menu system allowing you to store waveform and settings data on floppy disk or internal RAM if installed Refer to chapter 7 Mass Storage for details on how to use this system Enter the Waveform Settings menu allowing you to change instrument settings and giving access to additional configuration menus Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on how to use these menus Move the active distance and loss cursors along the waveform New two point measurements are made at the new position 4 12 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements CURSOR Pick which distance cursor is controlled by the CURSOR knob The active cursor is SELECT displayed at a brighter intensity button The CURSOR SELECT button also offers a join cursors function useful when the inactive cursor is not on the screen Press and hold the CURSOR SELECT button to move the inactive distance and loss cursors to the same location as the active cursors Vertical LOSS For two point slope calculations move the loss cursor on the active distance cursor knob up and down Use this knob to manually adjust th
316. g and event table features described in the following chapter Event Marking In addition to the basic optical fiber measurements described in this chapter FiberMaster offers extended fiber analysis capabilities such as high density data acquisition real time mode and a dual trace display These functions are covered in the chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 1 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements General Guidelines When making measurements observe these general principles Refractive Index before making distance measurements check that the refractive index setting is correct for the fiber under test The refractive index setting can affect distance measurement accuracy If you do not know the refractive index for the fiber you can calibrate it using a known length of fiber or known distance to an event on the fiber Refer to chapter 3 for instructions on how to set and calibrate the refractive index Event Location to measure the distance to an event on a waveform use the CURSOR knob to move the active distance cursor to the leading edge the left edge of the event The left edge is the actual location of the event which may be a reflective loss caused by a mechanical splice connector or break or a nonreflective loss caused by a fusion splice or bend in the cable 4 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Preview Mod
317. glemode Optical Module 1 33 FL1315 Singlemode Optical Module 1 34 FM8500 Multimode Optical Module ones 1 35 FM1300 Multimode Optical Module ores 1 36 FM8513 Multimode Optical Module sss 1 37 External Inspection Checklist c eeces eere 1 38 FiberMaster GPIB Interface Functions 8 3 Uniline Interface Messages rennen entente nnn 8 5 Multiline Universal Interface Messages enne 8 6 Multiline Addressed Interface Messages 8 6 Multiline Address Interface Messages 8 6 GPIB Status Register Summary eese eene tnra nana 8 11 GPIB Event Code Categories essei seen nitri nana 8 19 5 232 51 CE 8 28 FiberMaster to DTE Wiring euer 8 29 FiberMaster to DCE 8 30 FiberMaster to DTE Wiring 8 30 Hayes Accura Modem Settings for FiberMaster Remolte Conlrol aaa aaraa a aa oraig ere 8 32 RS 232 Status Register 8 39 RS 232
318. gs Defaults Remote Next Menu Prev Figure 3 33 RS232 Stop Bits Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the RS232 Stop Bits window to select the number of stop bits used for serial plotter and serial printer hardcopy During XModem data transfers the stop bits setting is temporarily set to 1 automatically regardless of the menu setting The factory default stop bits setting is 1 You can set a different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Change the number of stop bits by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new stop bits setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 53 Chapter 3 Getting Started RS232 Data Bits To display the RS232 Data Bits pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the data bits parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Tum the CURSOR knob to Sound On change the selection Time 18 25 14 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y RS232 Data Bits Units Metric Remote Keyboard USA File
319. gth Arbitrary Block Response Data Used for the CURVE and FILE query responses and defined in the descriptions of these queries in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter lt ILABRD gt lt Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data Used for the GPLTTEXT GPLTSCREEN GET_SET and GET_WFM queries and defined in the descriptions of these queries in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter lt AARD gt lt Arbitrary ASCII Response Data Used for the IDN query and defined in the description of this query in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter Response Message Terminator A terminated response message is sent in response to a terminated query message A response message terminator consists of the following RS 232 the ASCII newline character GPIB the ASCII newline character sent concurrently with the IEEE 488 1 END message These are illustrated in the following examples The terminated RS 232 query message UNITS lt NL gt would generate a terminated response message in the format UNITS ENGLISH lt NL gt The terminated GPIB query message DATE ACQUIRE 12 5 CENTER NORMAL HEADER lt NL gt would generate a terminated response message in the format DATE 1993 11 10 HEADER 1 lt NL gt 4 lt END gt If response headers were disabled using the HEADER command the response would be 1993 11 10 51 lt NL gt lt END gt Responses to Queries that Generate Errors If FiberMaster receives
320. hat is not within the distance spanned by the active waveform 2605 Event marking error No marker at the given distance An attempt was made to delete a marker at a distance where no marker exists 2606 Event marking error No event markers stored An attempt was made to delete a marker but there are no markers stored 2607 Event marking error Marker list full An attempt was made to add a marker but the list of markers is currently full 2608 Event marking error Current measurement not a splice loss or event return loss The EVNTMEAS command can only be used to replace a splice loss or event return loss measurement in the event table not two point or link return loss measurements 2609 Event marking error Current measurement not performed at a marker An attempt was made to use the EVNTMEAS command to replace a measurement in the event table with a new measurement but the cursor is not positioned at an event marker 2610 Event marking error Marker already exists at given distance An attempt was made to add an event marker where one already exists 2611 Event marking error No events stored An event information query was made but there are no events stored in the event table 2904 Selftest failure result buffer overflow The internal buffer used to hold selftest results from TST query has overflowed The query requesting the description receives partial information TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual
321. he knob amplitude of the cursor to the waveform The splice loss value changes as you move the cursor vertically Any manual adjustment to the position of the loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear in the top left corner of the screen Slope LOSS Rotate the active loss cursor Use this control to align the loss cursor with the slope knob ofthe waveform This adjustment does not affect the splice loss value Any manual adjustment to the position of the loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear in the top left corner of the screen EXPAND Switch between overview and expanded view Unless expanded view includes high button density data there is no difference in measurement values except that expanded view measurements may be at higher resolution With high density data slight variations in splice loss measurements may occur Using the expansion window and working with high density data are explained in more detail in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Vertical SIZE In overview expand and contract the expansion window vertically In expanded view knob the vertical SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself vertically When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the vertical SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor Horizontal In overview expand and contract th
322. he cursor knob clicks when used in the menu system Use the Sound window to turn these sounds and any alert beeps on and off The default setting is On You can choose off as the power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have the optional keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new sound setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 39 Chapter 3 Getting Started System Time To display the Time pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the time parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Remote Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Tum the CURSOR knob to Sound On change the highlighted number Time 18 04 22 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 22 System Time Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Time window to set the system time This time is used to
323. he new value of the setting is different from the one used to acquire the current waveform When you press START STOP to acquire data using the new laser selection the highlighted setting values are used and the highlighting is cleared The refractive index and scattering coefficient do not require a new acquisition in order to take effect 7 START STOP Pressing this button once begins an averaged waveform acquisition in current memory The acquisition is for the complete fiber as defined by the current maximum range setting If the active distance cursor is on the waveform when a new acquisition is started the new acquisition has the same starting point as the previous acquisition If the active distance cursor is not on the waveform when the START STOP button is pressed the waveform is centered around the active distance cursor unless limited by the maximum range In these cases the waveform is acquired against either the rightmost or leftmost limit of the maximum range An averaged acquisition stops when the selected number of averages is complete If an acquisition is in progress pushing the START STOP button stops it The maximum range setting and averaging time are selected on the Waveform Settings menu Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for information on setting parameters If you expand a waveform so that only 100 data points are displayed by pressing the EXPAND button or turning the horizontal SIZE knob pressing the
324. hecksum gt where 5 is the number of digits following which give the number of bytes remaining in the response wfm y data consists of 16 000 two byte y values and lt checksum gt is a one byte 2 s complement checksum of all preceding bytes except the 8 156 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control SEND 7 DIRWFM Get a directory of waveform files stored on the diskette in the instrument s disk drive RECEIVE 7 response Sample response ALPHA A WFM 07 07 89 11326 ALPHA B WFM 07 06 89 20342 ALPHA C WFM 06 10 89 15826 giving the names creation dates and sizes of the files SEND 7 LOADREF ALPHA C TRACE DUAL WFMSELECT REF Load waveform and associated settings from the file ALPHA C WFM into reference memory enable dual trace mode and select the reference waveform as the active one SEND 7 CALCSLOPE LSA TWOPOINT 5 1 5 2 Change the method of slope calculation to LSA and perform two point calculations between 5 1 and 5 2 km on the active waveform RECEIVE 7 response Sample response 5 1 5 2 0 101 9 3E 1 5 1 and 5 2 km are the data points at which the two point measurements were made 0 101 dB is the loss and 93 is the waveform slope SEND 7 BAUD 1200 FLOW XON Set RS232 port baud rate to 1200 and use XON XOFF flow control SEND 7 WFMSELECT CUR SAVECUR ALPHA D SPLTSCREEN Make the current waveform the active one and save the waveform data to disk in the file
325. height of the expansion window in decibels dist lt DNPD gt and specifies the center distance for the expansion window which need not specify the location of a data point on the waveform in distance units amp lt DNPD gt and specifies the center amplitude for the expansion window in decibels WINDOW 1 5 15 3 625 23 If the expansion window is moved off the active distance cursor the cursor moves with the expansion window 8 96 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control EXPAND Return the expansion state of the instrument Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data WINDOW EXPAND EXPAND option option lt NR1 gt 0 overview 1 expanded view Return the dimensions and position of the expansion window Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data WINDOW WINDOW lt width gt lt height gt lt dist gt lt amp gt lt width gt lt NR2 gt and specifies the width of the expansion window in distance units kilometers or kilofeet height NR2 and specifies the height of the expansion window in decibels dist lt NR2 gt and specifies the center distance for the expansion window in distance units amp lt NR2 gt and specifies the center amplitude for the expansion window in decibels TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 97 Chapter 8 Remote Control Measurement Command and Queries MEASMODE Select a mea
326. hich is in lt NR3 gt format For FIBERLOSS lt data gt lt NR3 gt The value of lt eventnum gt must be between 1 and the number of events reported in the EVNTCOUNT query response The lt bitmask gt is an eight bit field whose bits indicate the following conditions H0000 return loss normal 0001 return loss not accurate due to clipping actual value is less than reported value H0002 return loss not accurate because height of reflection too small actual value is greater than reported value H0003 return loss not applicable the event is non reflective H0004 no data at this event H0008 this event is the first event found on the waveform therefore no reference for TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 105 Chapter 8 Remote Control Example s FIBERLOSS TWOPTDIST TWOPTLOSS and LINKLOSS H0010 manually entered splice loss measurement 0020 manually entered return loss measurement H0040 high density data used for measurements Query response for the number of events in the event table EVNTCOUNT EVNTCOUNT 5 Queries responses for distance and splice loss for event 2 EVNTINFO 2 DISTANCE EVNTINFO H0000 2 947 distance in km EVNTINFO 2 SPLICELOSS EVNTINFO H0000 0 13 loss in dB Query response for all information for event 2 EVNTINFO 2 ALL EVNTINFO H0000 2 947 0 13 30 5 0 354E 00 4 360 1 68 4 59 The individual fields of the response from left to right are interpre
327. iations in loss measurements Using the expansion window and working with high density data are explained in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 13 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Vertical SIZE knob Horizontal SIZE knob Vertical POSITION knob Horizontal POSITION knob In overview expand and contract the expansion window vertically In expanded view the vertical SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself vertically When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the vertical SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor In overview expand and contract the expansion window horizontally In expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself horizontally This does not affect measurements unless you expand into or out of high density data When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor Move the active waveform up and down on the display It is possible to move the waveform off the display When dual trace mode is on the vertical POSITION knob operates only on the active waveform Move the waveform right and left on the display In both overview and expand
328. ic link return loss measurement is made using the current distance cursor locations Link Return Loss mode is a variation of Two Point mode If you turn off return loss manual adjustments made in Link Return Loss mode are retained and displayed in Two Point mode If you restart automatic two point measurements or if you make further manual adjustments in Two Point mode these changes are retained when you re enter Link Return Loss mode Measurements you make in any other mode do not affect manual link return loss measurements and vice versa TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 31 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Front Panel Controls Link Return Loss Mode Event Table Softkey Link Return Loss Softkey Event Return Loss Softkey Exit Return Loss Softkey Mass Storage Softkey Change Settings Softkey CURSOR knob When in Link Return Loss Mode use the front panel controls to perform the following functions Exit the acquisition screen and display the event table for the fiber under test Pressing and holding the Event Table softkey for two seconds turns event markers on and off without exiting the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 5 Event Marking for instructions on using event tables Restart link return loss measurements using the current distance cursor locations You can manually adjust a link return loss measurement using the vertical and slope LOSS knobs as described for these controls An
329. ielded cables be used Table 8 9 shows the recommended wiring for a cable used to connect FiberMaster to a host computer that is configured as Data Terminal Equipment and has a 25 pin RS 232 connector DB 25 In this case a standard RS 232 straight cable with all 25 pins wired can be used Table 8 9 FiberMaster to DTE Wiring DTE Host DCE FiberMaster DB 25 DB 25 Line Pin Pin Line PG 1 Diosa MEE AE Ade 2 TD RD 3 RD RTS Ad 4 RTS CTS D natns iiu 5 CTS DSR pm 6 DSR SG VERE SEU 7 SG DTR 20 DTR 8 28 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 10 shows the recommended wiring for a cable used to connect FiberMaster to a modem DCE that has a 25 pin RS 232 connector DB 25 In this case the transmit and receive lines as well as the flow control lines must be swapped since both devices are DCE Table 8 10 FiberMaster to DCE Wiring DCE Modem DCE FiberMaster DB 25 DB 25 Line Pin Pin Line PG 1 TD p RE 3 RD RD osea oin TE 2 TD RTS Bey ihe et tetas 5 CTS CTS ot des esa ded 4 RTS DSR GRO ORE 20 DTR SG Aes Aes 7 5 DTR VIUERE EET TEN 6 DSR Table 8 11 shows the recommended wiring for a cable used to connect FiberMaster to an IBM PC AT compatible COM port that has a DB 9 connector Table 8 11 FiberMaster to DTE Wir
330. iles Response Syntax DIRSET lt list gt DIRWFM lt list gt Response Data lt list gt lt SRD gt and consists of a quoted string that lists name creation date and size in bytes of each file of the type requested Example s Query DIRW Response FIBER1 WFM 8 22 89 17096 lt NL gt FIBO10 WFM 8 21 89 20732 lt NL gt FIBOCT9 WFM 10 9 88 23534 lt NL gt NL indicates an ASCII newline within the lt SRD gt response Discussion DIRSET returns a list of files with SET extensions If a settings file has a different extension it is not reported DIRWFM returns a list of files with WFM extensions If a waveform file has a different extension it is not reported Use the DIRECTORY query in these cases The TYPEFILE query can be used to determine whether a particular file is a waveform or settings file DRIVEBAT Check status of RAM battery if present Remote only Query Syntax DRIVEBAT lt drive gt Query Data drive lt CPD gt and specifies which device FIXED Internal RAM Response Syntax DRIVEBAT status Response Data status lt NR1 gt 0 if battery is OK 1 if battery is low TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 135 Chapter 8 Remote Control DRIVESELECT Return currently selected mass storage device For instruments with both internal RAM and a floppy disk drive Remote only Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data FETCHID DRIVESELECT DRIVESELECT drive
331. in Press the HELP button to exit the help screen Figure 3 2 Sample Help Screen 3 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Setting up the System FiberMaster s operating parameters and measurement settings are controlled through a system of menus accessed by pressing the Change Settings softkey from the acquisition screen These menus and their functions are as follows Waveform Settings menu the Waveform Settings menu displays a series of pop up selection windows used to set values for operating parameters FiberMaster uses these settings for waveform acquisition and making measurements They include for example the maximum range pulse width number of averages slope calculation and other settings Operator Settings menu allows you to enter a fiber identification string notes and operator identification This information prints with the waveform when you press the HARD COPY button and is saved in mass storage with the waveform or settings file System Settings menu the System Settings menu displays a series of pop up selection windows used to set several input output characteristics such as RS232 and GPIB settings and the hardcopy device In addition this menu allows you to set the language used the system time and date and display intensity and color User Defaults menu use this menu to set power on defaults for the instrument parameters that accept user de
332. in this chapter Turn the CURSOR knob to increase and decrease the refractive index in increments of the least significant digit ten thousandths You can also use the optional keyboard to enter the refractive index As you type in digits from the keyboard they are shifted to the left 3 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started A change to the refractive index affects the distance scale and measurements The new refractive index setting takes effect immediately rescaling the distance measurements as you adjust the refractive index value Calibrating the Refractive Index If you do not know the refractive index of the fiber under test you can calibrate the index using a known length of fiber or a known distance to a fiber feature To do this on the acquisition screen place the active distance cursor at the end of the fiber or on the feature Enter the Waveform Settings menu and display the Refractive Index window Adjust the refractive index As the index changes the distance measurement is rescaled When the distance measurement matches the known distance to the fiber feature the refractive index setting is correct TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 17 Chapter 3 Getting Started Slope Calculation NOTE To display the Slope Calculation pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the slope calculation parameter is highlighted on
333. ined in the following pages Table 8 6 summarizes the status registers and their corresponding commands and queries Table 8 6 GPIB Status Register Summary Write Clear Read Register Queue with with with Device Event Status Enable Register DESER DESE DESE DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR none CLS ESR ESR Standard Event Status Enable Register SESER ESE ESE ESE Status Byte Register STB none CLS STB Serial Poll Service Request Enable Register SRER SRE SRE SRE Device Event Status Enable Register The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER is an eight bit register with bit definitions corresponding to the IEEE 488 2 defined Standard Event Status Register SESR The purpose of the DESER is to enable the reporting of events in the SESR and the Event Queue Refer to the descriptions of the Standard Event Status Register and the Status Byte Register in the following pages When an event enabled by the DESER occurs the corresponding bit in the SESR is set and a code and corresponding message explaining the event are stored in the Event Queue Event codes and their meanings are listed in the section GPIB Event Codes and Messages later in this chapter The DESER defaults to an ASCII value of 255 all bits on meaning that all types of events will be logged in the SESR and Event Queue To disable the logging of selected event types set the value of the register to the appropriate bit mask by using th
334. ing DTE PC DCE FiberMaster DB 9 DB 25 Line Pin Pin Line RD av rate et tn eta ee E ELLO 3 RD TD ditas Leder 2 TD DTR POR EUER Mn REC pt 20 DTR SG ee TUE Ta 7 SG DSR RP EE PEN 6 DSR RTS dA n ET A 4 RTS CTS Tyr E PEE Ire 5 CTS TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 29 Chapter 8 Remote Control Modem Configuration FiberMaster can be controlled remotely by a PC using a telephone line and a modem as illustrated in figure 8 4 The term controller modem describes the modem connected to the controller and the term remote modem describes a stand alone modem connected to FiberMaster When configuring a remote controlled FiberMaster this way be aware of the following m FiberMaster does not use software error correction so both controller and remote modems should support a compatible mode of error correction such as V 42 or MNP 2 The modem connected FiberMaster must have an auto answer capability since the controller originates the connection used for remote control FiberMaster does not originate the connection or have the ability to configure a modem Table 8 12 shows settings used with two Hayes Accura modems to establish a connection between a controller PC and a FiberMaster Each modem was configured by connecting a terminal and entering the configuration commands for that modem These settings were used for a 9600 baud V 42 LAPM connection over a dial up line The PC originated
335. ing Off Change Avgs 20 480 214 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 1310SM Settings File LSJU78A WFM Figure 4 15 User Adjusted Splice Loss Measurement 4 28 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Link Return Loss Mode When FiberMaster is first turned on the softkeys allow entry into Two Point and Splice Loss modes Two additional return loss measurement modes are available via the Return Loss softkey When you press Return Loss softkey the Two Point and Splice Loss softkeys are replaced by the Link Return Loss and Event Return Loss softkeys Enter Link Return Loss mode from Two Point mode simply by pressing the Return Loss softkey From Preview and Splice Loss modes enter Link Return Loss mode by pressing the Return Loss softkey then the Link Return Loss softkey Use Link Return Loss mode to measure the transmission energy lost due to the total light reflected by the link Scattering Coefficient The scattering coefficient is a parameter on the Waveform Settings menu that represents the amount of backscatter reflected by a particular fiber and is used in return loss calculations in Link Return Loss mode The scattering coefficient is a characteristic of the fiber under test and can vary from fiber to fiber Before performing link return loss measurements check that the scattering coefficient is set to the correct value for the fiber being tested The scattering
336. ing list indicates how or if each of the remaining messages are emulated under the RS 232 interface Attention Indicates on the 488 1 interface that the DIO lines contain a multiline interface message rather than a data byte No equivalent under RS 232 Not emulated 8 52 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control DAB Data byte FiberMaster RS 232 remote control supports seven and eight bit data bytes depending on the RS 232 settings for data byte length DAC Data accepted Part of IEEE 3 wire handshake No RS 232 hardware equivalent although the RS 232 remote control interface supports XON XOFF CTS RTS and DTR DSR flow control as described in the RS 232 System Overview section DAV Data valid Part of IEEE 3 wire handshake No RS 232 hardware equivalent although the RS 232 remote control interface supports XON XOFF CTS RTS and DTR DSR flow control as described in the RS 232 System Overview section DCL Device clear Emulated by sending an RS 232 BREAK to the TFP2A END End of message Emulated by requiring that all program messages from host to TFP2A to be terminated by ASCII newline character 0A hex The TFP2A terminates all response messages sent to the host with the ASCII newline character GTL Go to local Emulated by sending the LOCAL command which causes the TFP2A to enter the LOCS state from any other remote or local state LLO Local lockout Emulated by sending the REMLO
337. ing type parameter allows you to specify Auto or Manual masking The Auto settings cause the system to calculate masks automatically When the masking type is set to Auto the Place Manual Masks screen is not accessible The Manual settings prevent the system from automatically setting masks but do not delete any existing masks Existing masks can be moved removed or resized manually High Density Averages 1024 Next Time 00 01 34 Place Manual Masks Mask New Mask Remove Mask Change Settings Mask Active distance cursor 28 Inactive distance cursor 16 meters Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Makmum Range 50 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Manual AccuMask Exit Avqs 1 024 17 1 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB Source Acquisition Figure 6 7 Place Manual Masks Screen 6 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Entering the Place Manual Masks Screen Enter the Place Manual Masks screen from the acquisition screen as follows 1 2 3 4 Press the Change Settings softkey to enter the Waveform Settings screen Press the Next Param softkey until the Masking Type pop up window displays Set the masking type to one of the two manual selections The Place Masks softkey displays when the masking type is set to manual Press
338. instrument does not respond to interface messages or device dependent commands sent by the controller The power on GPIB status setting is online and the address is the factory default of 7 or the last user selected address You can operate FiberMaster using the front panel controls as described in chapters 2 through 7 or remotely using a remote controller In addition to these local and remote states the controller can place the instrument in a local lockout condition at any time This combination yields four possible operating states 2 Local State LOCS FiberMaster responds to front panel control and to remote messages that do not affect instrument settings data memory or start device operations 2 Local with Lockout State LWLS This state is transitional as the instrument always enters RWLS from LWLS when it receives its listen address for example before receiving a program message 1 Remote State REMS In REMS the controller can change instrument settings and start acquisitions and other device operations In this state a Return to Local Softkey displays allowing the operator to return the instrument to local control 21 Remote with Lockout State RWLS RWLS is similar to REMS except the Return to Local softkey does not display TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 7 Chapter 8 Remote Control Remote Local State Transitions FiberMaster enters LOCS when the REN line is released in any other local or remote
339. intensity than normal density data It resides in its own memory and does not overwrite normal density data NOTE On the acquisition screen the time shown for the maximum number of averages selected is for normal density data only A high density acquisition takes approximately three to five times longer After acquiring high density data you can return to normal density by turning the horizontal SIZE knob counterclockwise past the point that produced the high density prompt You can then redisplay the previously acquired high density data by expanding the waveform to fewer than 100 samples again Since the high density data has already been acquired the prompt does not display Instead the high density data appears automatically when the waveform is expanded to fewer than 100 data points High Density Data Measurements You can see high density data as a dashed zone of the waveform on the overview display If the high density data spans at least half the expansion window when you expand on this area the high density data is displayed and used in all measurement calculations When high density data is being viewed or used in measurements the message High Density appears in the upper left corner of the display If high density is not being viewed the message Normal Density displays 6 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Parameter Settings and High Density Data Acquisition You cannot change
340. ion window the window moves with the cursor If the active distance cursor is moved within the expansion window the window does not move Return the location of one of the distance cursors Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion CURSOR lt curs gt curs lt CPD gt and specifies the cursor position to return Possible values are ACTIVE INACTIVE CURSOR lt dist gt dist lt NR2 gt and gives the distance to the cursor in distance units kilometers or kilofeet The inactive cursor is not visible if the instrument is in Splice Loss or Event Return Loss mode however its position is returned in response to this query 8 94 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Expansion Commands and Queries EXPAND Set the expansion to on expanded or off overview Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s WINCURSOR EXPAND lt option gt option DNPD lt CPD gt and turns waveform expansion off overview or on expanded Possible values are 0 OFF 1 ON EXPAND 1 EXPAND OFF Set the expansion window dimensions The expansion window is positioned so that it is centered around the intersection of the active distance cursor and the waveform Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s WINCURSOR e lt width gt lt height gt width lt DNPD gt and specifies the width of the ex
341. ion range 2254 Measurement start error distance 2 not in acquisition range 2255 Measurement start error neither distance in acquisition range Invalid distance s specified for two point measurement 2260 Return loss inaccurate clipped reflection s or data out of calibration range Generated by the EVNTRTNLOSS and LINKRTNLOSS queries if the loss value reported in the query response is not accurate due to clipping of the waveform 2271 Cursor positioning error distance out of range An attempt was made to move the cursor outside the distance range shown in overview mode 2272 Window sizing error width too large An attempt was made to change the width of the expansion window to more than the distance range shown in overview TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 165 Chapter 8 Remote Control 2273 Window sizing error width too small An attempt was made to change the width of the expansion window to include fewer than 100 data points 2274 Window sizing error height too large An attempt was made to change the height of the expansion window to exceed the amplitude range shown in overview 2275 Window sizing error height too small An attempt was made to change the height of the expansion window to less than 1 dB 2276 Window locating error distance out of range An attempt was made to center the expansion window at a location outside the distance range shown in overview 2277 Window locating erro
342. ion screen is updated during remote control to show any setting changes measurement mode changed new acquisitions cursor movement and expansion window changes that occur as a result of remote commands Menu screens are not displayed Remote to Local Transition When the instrument returns to local from remote operation the following occurs All front panel controls and softkeys are enabled The REMOTE indicator on the front panel is turned off The acquisition data and instrument settings displayed during remote control remain on the screen after the transition to local Instrument settings and acquired waveform data are not affected Message processing continues in the local state but any commands and queries that affect instrument settings data memory or start device operations are not executed In response to such a command or query an execution error is logged in the Event Queue and an execution error is flagged in the Standard Event Status Register For 8 36 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control more details on error reporting refer to the Status Reporting and Error Handling section later in this chapter Using a GPIB Plotter or Printer Data displayed on FiberMaster s screen can be plotted or printed on an external GPIB plotter or printer when the instrument is under RS 232 remote control The ThinkJet printer and HPGL compatible plotters are supported Refer to chapter 3
343. is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise 4 Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection 1 34 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FM8500 Multimode Optical Module Table 1 18 FM8500 Multimode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 100 ns 10 m 27 0 36 0 13 0 10 5 50 ns 5 m 25 5 36 0 8 5 5 5 20 ns 2 m 23 5 36 0 6 0 3 0 8 ns 80 cm 20 5 36 0 4 5 1 0 3 ns 30 cm 16 5 35 0 3 5 0 5 1 ns 10 cm 14 0 35 0 2 5 0 2 Operating wavelength 850 nm 25 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 5 m to 20 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 0 to 50 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 Ibs 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in
344. ition Screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 2 An expansion window Pressing the EXPAND button on the front panel switches between expanded view and overview In expanded view the area within the expansion window is magnified to fill the display allowing closer examination of the fiber See figure 1 3 Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 6 458 km 4 Normal Density 081 km 40 30 20 10 0 T T Ho 2 Pulse Width 4500 ns 50 m Maximum Range 10 0 km Ags 20 480 21 4 s Ref Idex 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Satter Coefficient 82 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 30 dB Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 dB 6 458 km lt lt 0 081 km 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 r 1 1 as 5 000 5 500 6 000 6 500 7 000 7 500 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Change Max 20 480 21 4 Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 1310SM Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB Source Acquisition Figure 1 3 Acquisition Screen Expansion Overview top and Expanded View bottom TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Waveform and measurement data Distance and loss measurements are displayed on the screen near the wave
345. ive CPD and specified the drive to use for mass storage operations Options are FIXED Optional internal RAM REMOVABLE Floppy disk drive Power On Default FIXED unless media is present in the REMOVABLE drive at power on or internal RAM is not installed FORMAT Format a floppy disk or internal RAM device selected by the last DRIVESELECT command Remote only Command Syntax FORMAT TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 131 Chapter 8 Remote Control LOADCUR LOADREF LOADSET LOADRFS Load waveform or instrument settings from the currently selected device selected by the DRIVESELECT command to memory Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion MSFORMAT LOADCUR filename Load waveform and associated settings into current memory LOADREF filename Load waveform and associated settings into reference memory LOADSET filename Load settings only into current memory LOADRFS lt filename gt Load waveform and settings into reference memory and settings only into current memory lt filename gt lt SPD gt and specifies the file name to be loaded LOADREF FIBER11A LOADSET REF_SET LOADREF FIBER11A WFM LOADSET REF_SET SET If no extension is specified LOADCUR LOADREF AND LOADRFS assume a WFM extension and LOADSET assumes a SET extension Select the data format used for waveform files returned by the FILE and GET WFM queries Remote o
346. ive the response is the masking setting that was used to acquire the reference waveform TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 83 Chapter 8 Remote Control MODINFO Return the serial number part number wavelength and fiber mode of an optics module Query Syntax MODINFO slot Query Data slot lt CPD gt Possible values are UPPER and LOWER specifying the upper and lower module positions in the TFP2A Response Syntax MODINFO lt serial_number gt lt laser1 gt lt laser2 gt Response Data serial number SRD serial number of module lt laser1 gt SRD laser 1 information laser 2 SRD laser 2 information Discussion The query returns a single data field NONE if no plug in is in the specified slot If the module is a single wavelength type two fields are returned serial number and laser type If the module is a dual wavelength type three fields are returned serial number and two laser types Example s MODINFO UPPER query MODINFO NONE response Indicates no module installed in upper slot MODINFO UPPER query MODINFO b040007 FS1300 1310SM response Indicates the optical module in the upper slot of the TFP2A has the serial number B040007 part number FS1300 and one singlemode wavelength of 1310 nm MODINFO LOWER query MODINFO b010008 FL1315 1310SM FL1315 1550SM response Indicates the optical module in the lower slot of the TFP2A has the serial
347. language selection when the prompt appears the language is not changed and the instrument is not restarted TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 35 Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE If you change the language to a language that you cannot read you can go to the Language pop up window from the start up screen simply by pressing the following keys Softkey 6 bottom softkey Softkey 1 top softkey Softkey 1 The Language menu displays Turn the cursor knob to select another language Softkey 6 Softkey 2 second softkey from top This sequence causes the instrument to quick start using the new language 3 36 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Display Intensity To display the Intensity pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the intensity parameter is highlighted on the menu Waveform Operator Settings Settings SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 00 42 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 19 Display Intensity Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Inten
348. lculation 4 9 Two Point Mode LSA Slope Calculation 4 10 Automatic Two Point Measurement Positioning the First Distance Cursor odes desee 4 16 Automatic Two Point Measurement Positioning the Second Distance Cursor 4 17 User Adjusted Two Point Measurement Adjusting the Active Loss CUrSOF eese sie 4 18 User Adjusted Two Point Measurement Adjusting the Loss Cursor in Expanded View eere 4 19 User Adjusted Two Point Measurement 4 19 Automatic Fiber Loss Measurement Placing the CUPS e ETE E 4 20 Automatic Fiber Loss Measurement Placing the Second 62 1 4 10 gum ETE 4 21 Splice Loss 4 22 Automatic Splice Loss 4 27 User Adjusted Splice Loss Measurement 4 28 Link Return Loss Mode 4 30 Automatic Link Return Loss Measurement Placing the First Cursor at the Start of the Link 4 35 Automatic Link Return Loss Measurement Placing the Second Cursor at the End of the Link 4 36 User Adjusted Link Return Loss Measurement
349. le and manually moving deleting and adding event markers on the acquisition screen The locations of the event markers determine where measurements are calculated for inclusion in the event table Up to 50 event markers can be placed either automatically by the instrument or manually by the user An additional event notes screen allows you to read and record up to 79 characters of notes for each event marked This function can be used for mapping the fiber under test TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 1 Chapter 5 Event Marking Overview Automatic event marking scans the waveform for events starting at the front panel When you turn on event marking mode a triangular marker is displayed under each event detected along with an additional field of measurement information shown above the parameter settings This field displays measurement information about the current marker A marker is current when the active distance cursor is located on that marker Normal Density Averages 20480 Event Time 00 00 31 Table 6 448 km 4 028 km Two Point 30 Splice Loss 20 Return Loss 10 0 Mass Storage 4 Event 2 Dist 6 458 km Spl Loss 145 dB Event Ret Loss 26 8 dB Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Max Avgs 20 480 214s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 1310SM Settings Ref In
350. lection 1 32 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FL1500 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 16 FL1500 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 20 us 2000 m 37 0 46 5 2375 2100 10 us 1000 m 35 0 46 0 1270 1050 4000 ns 400 m 33 0 46 0 670 440 2000 ns 200 m 30 5 45 0 395 220 1000 ns 100 m 29 0 45 0 280 120 500 ns 50 m 27 0 44 5 150 60 200 ns 20 m 25 0 44 5 195 35 100 ns 10 m 23 0 44 0 170 25 Operating wavelength 1550 nm 20 nm Masking not applicable Full screen display range 50 m to 320 km Laser safety Class 1 21 CFR 1040 Temperature 10 to 55 C operating 40 to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs lt 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm 1 Dynamic range specifications are based on 262 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 496 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the
351. llowing functions Exit the acquisition screen and display the event table for the fiber under test Pressing and holding the Event Table softkey for two seconds turns event markers on and off without exiting the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 5 Event Marking for instructions on using event tables Restart two point measurements using the current distance cursor locations You can manually adjust a two point measurement using the vertical and slope Loss knobs as described for these controls Any manual adjustments made in Two Point mode are retained until you press the Two Point softkey again If you exit Two Point mode after making manual adjustments the adjustments are retained and displayed when you re enter Two Point mode unless you make changes in the related return loss mode Link Return Loss see note on previous page In this case press the Two Point softkey again to clear user adjusted measurements and make new two point measurements using the current distance cursor positions From Two Point mode press and hold the Two Point softkey for two seconds to exit Two Point mode and enter Preview mode Exit Two Point mode and enter Splice Loss mode The active distance cursor location is used for splice loss measurements This softkey is available only when return loss is off Pressing Return Loss turns the return loss measurement modes on When return loss is on the Two Point softkey is replaced by the Link Return Loss so
352. lm Prev Event Event Notes R037 002 SE corner of 6th amp Elmi Next Char Delete EIBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcde Char fghijklmnopqrstuvywxyz0123456789 _ amp lt gt Exit pogogan Figure 5 2 Event Table above and Event Notes below TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 3 Chapter 5 Event Marking Two Waveform Setting parameters affect event marking The Event Threshold has a factory default of 0 20 dB This means that when event marking is on all automatically marked events with splice losses of 0 20 dB or greater are displayed on the acquisition screen and included in the event table You can change this threshold on the Waveform Settings menu and you can select a different power on default on the User Defaults menu All manually placed event markers are displayed regardless of the event threshold setting both on the acquisition screen and in the event table The Event Marking parameter allows you to select either automatic or manual event marking The factory default setting is Auto which causes events to be automatically located for each acquisition You can change this setting to Manual on the Waveform Settings menu When the manual setting is selected the Place Event Markers screen is accessible from the Waveform Settings menu This screen lets you add delete and move event markers The markers you add on this screen are not changed with a new ac
353. loss and event return loss measurements can be adjusted manually if necessary Turning the CURSOR knob causes each event to be highlighted in succession TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 7 Chapter 5 Event Marking NOTE Loss measurements on the event table may vary slightly from the same automatic measurements made on the acquisition screen For splice loss and event return loss measurements measurements on the event table are made by fitting lines to the data between the current event and the adjacent events while measurements on the acquisition screen use the data within the expansion window For two point loss measurements event table measurements fit lines using all data points between events while acquisition screen measurements are calculated using the two points where the distance cursors intersect the waveform Two point distance measurements on the event table should correspond with those seen on the acquisition screen if the distance cursors are positioned precisely on the events on the acquisition screen 5 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking NOTE NOTE On the Event Table screen the softkeys perform the following functions Event Notes display notes for the marked events From the Event Notes screen you can press another softkey that allows you to enter and edit the notes Next Page and Prev Page if there are more events on the fiber than fit on one page use the Next P
354. lt 15 6 dB Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc LSA Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 25 0km Scatter Coefficient 803 Masking Auto AccuMask Avgs 2 048 329 s Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 1310SM Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB__File FIGSE WFM Change Settings Figure 5 13 Event Marking and Masked Grouped Events A nonreflective event or a section of backscatter that has been manually masked is marked as a nonreflective event to avoid the waveform signature produced by the mask when calculating splice loss measurements for any adjacent events TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 21 Chapter 5 Event Marking There are two cases when automatic return loss measurements are not made for masked events 1 When waveform reconstruction produces a nonreflective gain just before the reflection Normal Density Averages 2048 Time 00 00 16 300 400 3 T 600 EH BE Event 2 Dist 393 m Sp Loss 0 09 dB Event Ret Loss Maximum Range 25 0 km Max Avqs 2 048 32 9 s Ref Index 1 4680 Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc LSA Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 00 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Auto AccuMask Module F51315 13108M File FIGSB WEM Event Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage
355. ly be used with direct connections since many modems have reserved uses for these signals When DTR DSR flow control is selected and the controller drops the DTR signal FiberMaster does not transmit data to the controller until DTR is reasserted FiberMaster drops the DSR signal when its input buffer reaches the high water mark It reasserts DSR when its input buffer drops to the low water mark 8 34 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Communications Common Commands and Queries Under RS 232 remote control FiberMaster recognizes a subset of the common commands and queries defined in IEEE 488 2 Each common command is identified by an asterisk The commands implemented in FiberMaster include the following for descriptions of these commands refer to the Commands and Queries section in this chapter IDN LRN RST CLS ESE SRE ESE ESR SRE STB OPC WAI OPC TST Device Dependent Messages and Program Messages Device dependent messages transfer information directly between FiberMaster and the controller They include commands that cause an action to take place in the instrument queries requesting information from the instrument command and query data elements and query responses Some commands and queries start device operations such as acquisitions measurements and disk drive operations Other commands perform interface related functions such as setting status register
356. m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Settings Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 k File 15 7078 Figure 4 8 User Adjusted Two Point Measurement Adjusting the Active Loss Cursor Press CURSOR SELECT to switch active cursors 4 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 7 Usethe vertical and slope Loss knobs to adjust the second loss cursor to the slope of the waveform as shown below in expanded view Normal Density Averages 20480 User Adjusted Measurement Time 00 00 31 6 453 km 9 281 km gt gt gt 24 22 20 345 dB 18 Mass 16 Storage T T T T 5 800 5 000 6 200 6 400 6 600 6 800 7 000 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F 1315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LSJU78 WEM Change Settings Figure 4 9 User Adjusted Two Point Measurement Adjusting the Loss Cursor in Expanded View 8 The user adjusted two point measurement is shown in overview below Two point distance and loss between the distance cursors are shown on the acquisition screen near the waveform In this example the two
357. m Transfer Commands and Queries 8 123 Mass Storage Commands sss 8 132 Mass Storage 8 137 Hardcopy Commands and Queries sss 8 141 Display Related Commands and Query 8 146 viii TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Table of Contents Identification Query sess essent nnne nnn 8 149 Learn Settings Queries 8 150 Reset and Stop Commands sse 8 152 Status and Error Reporting Commands sees 8 153 Status and Error Reporting Queries 8 154 Device Synchronization Commands and Query 8 156 Selfl st QUENCES Mi cud erar en dio ta enda fedes 8 157 GPIB Programming 8 158 RS 232 Programming Example 2 eise e esee es eset nni tn nain nana nnn 8 161 Remote Control Event Codes and 8 164 Queue Stats Codes r oue EE 8 164 COMMANG in titanate 8 164 Execution Errors ni er lo e pee 8 166 Internal Emors e add e o d 8 172 System Evenls 2 detener ern de ev epe rodea eed e 8 172 Execution 5
358. m the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the maximum averages parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Settings Settings Settings Defaults Remote Next Menu 40 Maximum Averages Next Param 2 ay Sages Tum the CURSOR knob to 21 45 change the highlighted number Je su Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Exit Module F31315 13105M File LSJU76 WEM Figure 3 5 Maximum Averages Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Maximum Averages window to set the number of sampling acquisitions the instrument averages before stopping an acquisition A sampling acquisition is the acquisition of one set of data points on the waveform and is the same as the waveform data that would be acquired if you set the number of averages to 1 Higher averages produce better signal to noise but take longer to complete an acquisition Lower averages result in faster acquisitions but typically include more noise The approximate length of time required for the number of averages you select is also displayed on the menu The time for a certain number of averages will vary depending on the pulse width maximum range and masking type settings The characteristics of the fiber under test also affect the time it takes
359. marker is removed this softkey changes to Add Marker until you either add a marker or move the cursor to another marker Add Marker appears only when the cursor is not located on an existing marker see figure 5 8 add a marker at the current cursor position and renumber the markers After the marker is added the softkey changes to Remove Marker Move Marker appears only when the cursor is located on an existing marker see figure 5 7 attach the marker to the distance cursor so the marker moves with the cursor when you turn the CURSOR knob If you move the marker past other markers the markers are renumbered to reflect their new order After the marker is attached to the cursor this softkey changes to Leave Marker Leave Marker appears only after pressing Move Marker to attach a marker to the distance cursor see figure 5 9 detaches the marker from the distance cursor to place it at its new location After pressing Leave Marker the softkey changes back to Move Marker You can turn the CURSOR knob to move the distance cursor and the marker stays in its new location Pressing any other softkey when Leave Marker is active drops the marker before performing the function of that softkey TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 15 Chapter 5 Event Marking Auto Mark Events replace all markers with automatically located markers Markers are located and measurements calculated as if the event marking parameter were set to Auto and a
360. measurement modes are not available and the instrument automatically enters Two Point mode 4 34 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Link Return Loss Measurements Examples Use Link Return Loss mode to measure the return loss of a fiber link The return loss of the link is expressed in dB and gives the ratio of the total light entering the link to the total light reflected by the link 1 Turn the CURSOR knob to place the active distance cursor on the first event in the link As you move the left distance cursor the loss cursor follows the backscatter level and is fit to the slope of the waveform data under the loss cursor Averages 1024 Time 00 00 05 Link Retum Loss 28 6 dB 5 001 km Event Table 3 000 km Link Return Loss Event Return Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Max Avqs 1 024 5 3 s Dual Trace Off Module F3 1315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LINK 100 WEM Change Settings Figure 4 17 Automatic Link Return Loss Measurement Placing the First Cursor at the Start of the Link Press the EXPAND button to expand the view of the event if necessary for precise cursor placement If both cursors are not on the screen in expanded view you may want
361. ment automatically enters Two Point mode TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 43 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Event Return Loss Measurements Examples NOTE Use Event Return Loss mode to measure the return loss of any reflective fiber feature for example a connector The return loss of the feature is expressed in dB and gives the ratio of the light entering the connector to the light reflected by it 1 Turn the CURSOR knob to move the distance cursor to the leading edge of the event to be measured Use the expand function if necessary for precise cursor placement 2 An automatic event return loss measurement is made and the return loss is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen The example below shows in expanded view an automatic event return loss measurement made at the location of a connector in the cable The automatic measurement is made by fitting the left loss cursor to the backscatter before the reflection and the right loss cursor to the top of the reflection Averages 1024 Time 00 00 05 Event Retum Loss 28 9 dB 3 000 10 71 dB Gain Event Return Loss T T T T 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Auto Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Max Avgs 1 024 5 3 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 1310SM Settings Ref Index 1 4680 E
362. ments in Splice Loss mode these changes are retained when you re enter Event Return Loss mode Measurements you make in any other mode do not affect manual event return loss measurements and vice versa Event Return Loss and Event Marking In Event Return Loss mode when event marking is turned on and you move the distance cursor anywhere onto an event marker or an event the cursor automatically snaps to the location of the event You can then move the cursor on the event If you then press the Event Return Loss softkey the cursor snaps onto the event again 4 40 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Front Panel Controls Event Return Loss Mode Event Table Softkey Link Return Loss softkey Event Return Loss Softkey Exit Return Loss Softkey Mass Storage Softkey Change Settings Softkey CURSOR knob When in Event Return Loss mode use the front panel controls to perform the following functions Make manual adjustments using the CURSOR SELECT vertical LOSS and slope Loss knobs as described below for each of these controls Exit the acquisition screen and display the event table for the fiber under test Pressing and holding the Event Table softkey for two seconds turns event markers on and off without exiting the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 5 Event Marking for instructions on using event tables Exit Event Return Loss mode and enter Link Return Loss mo
363. minator NL END to the device at bus address addr RECEIVE addr response Read response message from device at bus address addr The text of the response is placed in the variable response excluding the response message terminator lt NL gt lt END gt READ STATUS BYTE addr status Serial poll device at bus address and place contents of device s Status Byte Register in variable status WAIT SRQ Optionally exchange messages with other devices on the bus while waiting for a Service request The example is as follows SEND 7 HEADER OFF Disable response headers SEND 7 AVERAGE 1024 REFINDEX 1 4560 FIBERID ALPHA D Set number of averages and refractive index for the fiber to be tested and store fiber ID SEND 7 MODSELECT UPPER MM850 Select 850 nm multimode laser from module in upper front panel slot SEND 7 PULSELIST 20 0 Determine pulse widths available when a maximum range of 20 0 km is used with the currently selected module RECEIVE 7 response Sample response 1 0 3 0 8 0 20 0 50 0 Response data elements are available pulse widths in nanoseconds SEND 7 PULSRNG 8 20 Set pulse width to 8 ns and maximum range to 20 km SEND 7 DENSITYLIST Request available sampling densities for currently selected module and with the current pulse width and maximum range settings TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 155 Chapter 8 Remote Control RECEIVE 7 response Sample response 0 00020 0 00005 Respo
364. mmand and query descriptions the only occurrence of white space in a response message is a single ASCII space between a response header and an immediately following data element The data element of the response message can be sent any of the following formats lt CRD gt Character Response Data Defined the same as the CPD format except that any alpha characters in a lt CRD gt element are always sent in upper case and abbreviations are not used lt NR1 gt NR1 Numeric Response Data Specifies an optionally signed integer ASCII format such as 775 or 3 lt integer gt NR2 NR2 Numeric Response Data Specifies an optionally signed whole number with a fraction ASCII format as follows lt integer gt lt integer gt for example 77 1 77 0 0 99 32 0 An lt NR2 gt element contains both a whole number and a fraction Numbers such as 77 23 and 77 are not returned lt NR3 gt NR3 Numeric Response Data Specifies an lt NR2 gt element followed by an exponent ASCII format There is no white space between the NR2 element and the exponent and the exponent is in the form E lt integer gt Exponent examples are E 07 and E415 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 57 Chapter 8 Remote Control SRD String Response Data Specifies a quoted string using as the quote character Embedded quotes are returned in pairs lt Definite Len
365. n Do not use abrasive cleaners 3 Clean the monitor screen with a lint free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol Optical Fiber Cleaning As a rule clean any fiber before connecting it to FiberMaster s front panel or at any time you think it may be contaminated Clean the connector using electronics grade isopropyl alcohol on a lint free swab then blow dry with clean canned air If you know the connector is clean blowing with air should be sufficient CAUTION Never use any abrasive material to clean the fiber Damage to the fiber results in deteriorated performance Cleaning and Changing the Front Panel Connector Newer FiberMaster optical modules have cleanable universal front panel connectors while older modules do not The universal connector system is identified by the nomenclature FREE and LOCK printed on the adapter plate inside the door of the optical connector assembly Clean both types of connectors before connecting a fiber and when changing connector adapters on the universal connectors Clean FiberMaster s old style front panel connector with electronics grade isopropyl alcohol and a small lint free swab Insert the end of the swab into the connector roll it gently then blow dry using canned air Clean or change the universal connector system following the steps below The tools you will need are Flat blade screwdriver Lint free swab Pipe cleaner Electronics grade isopropyl alcohol Optical grade canned air
366. n the controller and the instrument operating in talk only mode Prevent this contention by putting the controller on standby 488 1 Controller Standby State so it releases the ATN line GPIB Hardcopy under Remote Control When using a GPIB plotter or printer under remote control configure the device as a talker listener To start a hardcopy the controller application program should go through the following steps 1 Sendthe HCTYPE command to select the output data format 2 Sendthe GPLTSCREEN or GPLTTEXT query as appropriate followed by a program message terminator Refer to the Commands and Queries section of this chapter for descriptions of these queries TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 9 Chapter 8 Remote Control 3 Sendthe listen address of the plotter or printer 4 Sendthe talk address of the instrument 5 When the instrument asserts the END line indicating that all data was sent to the plotter unaddress the plotter or printer You may need to send the UNL interface command before step 2 if there are other devices on the bus that should not receive the hardcopy data 8 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Status Reporting and Error Handling The GPIB controller has access to five FiberMaster status and status enable registers These registers control status and error reporting for all device events as illustrated in figure 8 3 The functions of each register are expla
367. na 1 12 Conventions Used in this Manual sse 1 13 Change and History Information esses 1 13 Unpacking and Preparation for Use eeeeeenen ennt 1 14 Preparation for Use essen eene nitent 1 14 Repacking for Shipment sisse 1 20 R 1 21 Electrical 1 21 Operational Characteristics 1 24 Physical Characteristics assesses 1 24 Environmental Characteristics sessi 1 25 FS1300 Singlemode Optical Module 1 27 FS1500 Singlemode Optical Module sss 1 28 FS1315 Singlemode Optical Module sss 1 29 FG1300 Singlemode Optical Module 1 30 FG1315 Singlemode Optical Module sss 1 31 FL1300 Singlemode Optical 1 32 FL1500 Singlemode Optical 1 33 FL1315 Singlemode Optical Module sss 1 34 FM8500 Multimode Optical Module see 1 35 FM1300 Multimode Optical Module seen 1 36 FM8513 Multimode Optical Module
368. nd Two Point modes enter Event Return Loss mode by pressing the Return Loss softkey then the Event Return Loss softkey Use Event Return Loss to measure the transmission loss due to light reflected by a particular fiber feature such as a connector or splice Scattering Coefficient The scattering coefficient is a parameter on the Waveform Settings menu that represents the amount of backscatter reflected by a particular fiber and is used in return loss calculations in Event Return Loss mode The scattering coefficient is a characteristic of the fiber under test and can vary from fiber to fiber Before performing event return loss measurements check that the scattering coefficient is set to the correct value for the fiber being tested The scattering coefficient for a particular fiber can usually be obtained from the fiber manufacturer If you do not know the correct value however it is recommended that you use the factory default values which depend on the laser source For more information on the scattering coefficient parameter and how to set it refer to chapter 3 Getting Started 4 38 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Automatic Event Return Loss Measurements In Event Return Loss mode there is one distance cursor There are two loss cursors matched to the waveform on either side of the distance cursor When you enter Event Return Loss mode the active distance cursor is in the sam
369. nd off does not affect measurements in the current measurement mode 5 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking The Event Table The Event Table screen contains measurement information for all events marked on the acquisition screen including L distance from the front panel to the event splice loss at the event return loss at the event if it is a reflective event fiber loss between the event and the preceding event two point distance between the event and the preceding event two point loss between the event and the preceding event cumulative link loss to the event from the first marked event C O O C O O Event Table Event Notes Splice Event Fiber Two Point Two Point Link Loss Distance Loss km dB Eventi Distance Enter Current Figure 5 4 The Event Table The distance splice loss return loss and two point distance and loss measurements correspond to measurements on the acquisition screen The fiber loss is the loss per kilometer for the fiber between events starting after the previous event and up to the current event The link loss is the cumulative total of the two point loss measurements Two point loss includes both the splice loss of the previous event as well as the fiber loss between events Two point loss divided by two point distance therefore does not equal the fiber loss The event table is automatically compiled for all marked events The splice
370. ndow oss cursors Figure 4 4 Two Point Mode Two Point Slope Calculation TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 Loss 0 333 dB km 6 453 km Two Point Splice Loss 20 10 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc LSA Event Marking Auto Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 4 5 Two Point Mode LSA Slope Calculation The loss cursors are located on the distance cursors positioned at the intersection of each distance cursor and the waveform The loss cursors move horizontally as the distance cursors are moved and move vertically automatically with the slope of the waveform The two point distance is the distance between the distance cursors Two point distance is shown graphically as a dashed line between the two distance cursors The two point loss is the difference between the decibel level of the waveform at the right loss cursor and the decibel level at the left cursor regardless of which distance cursor is active The loss is shown graphically as a dashed portion of the active distance cursor The numeric loss and distance values are displayed near the dashed lines The loss per distance unit or slope of
371. nes FiberMaster is configured as Data Communication Equipment DCE Table 8 8 shows the subset of RS 232 signal lines interface circuits that are pertinent to the remote control of FiberMaster Line TD RD RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD Table 8 8 RS 232 Signal Lines Name Protective Ground Signal Ground Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Terminal Ready Data Set Ready Data Carrier Detect Explanation Connected to equipment chassis Common ground reference for all other lines except Protective ground Controller transmits data to FiberMaster on this line FiberMaster transmits data to controller on this line Indicates controller is ready to exchange data when RTS CTS flow control enabled Indicates FiberMaster is ready to exchange data when RTS CTS flow control enabled Indicates controller ready to exchange data when DTR DSR flow control enabled Indicates FiberMaster is ready to exchange data when DTR DSR flow control enabled Continuously asserted by FiberMaster after power on The minimum set of required lines for remote control are the ground circuits TD and RD However this does not allow the use of hardware flow control or hardware handshaking It is recommended that both RTS and CTS or both DTR and DSR be used to allow for hardware flow control If modems are to be used the RTS and CTS lines should be used for hardware flow control NOTES FiberMaster always asserts
372. new acquisition started This allows you to reset markers without having to reacquire data When you press this softkey manual markers are replaced and event notes are erased Change Settings return to the Event Marking parameter screen on the Waveform Settings menu Exit exit the menu system and return to the acquisition screen Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 7 591 km 4 028 km 1 4 Events Dist Spl Loss Event Ret Loss Pulse Width 500 ns 50 Maximum Range 10 0 km Max Avgs 20 480 21 4 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 30 dB Event Marking Manual Masking Off Module F 1315 13105M File LSJU78 WEM Figure 5 8 The Place Event Markers Screen Cursor off Event Marker Normal Density Averages 20480 Next Time 00 00 31 Place Event Markers Marker 6 999 km 4 028 km 40 Remove Marker 30 Leave Marker 20 Auto Mark 10 Events Change T T t T T T Settings 0 2 4 B 8 Event 2 6 399 km Spl Loss 2 42 dB Event Ret Loss Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Manual Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Max 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 5 9 The Pl
373. nformation about the active waveform See CURVE query Note that each of the items returned by the WFMPRE query can be obtained individually using the WFID NR PT XINCR PT OFF XZERO YMULT YZERO and YOFF queries Remote only Query Syntax WFMPRE Response Syntax WFMPRE WFID lt fiberid gt NR_PT lt points gt XINCR xincr PT OFF lt ptoff gt XZERO xzero YMULT lt ymult gt YZERO lt yzero gt YOFF lt yoff gt Response Data lt fiberid gt SRD fiber ID as set by FIBERID command points lt NR1 gt number of points in waveform lt xincr gt lt NR2 gt distance between points in kilometers or kilofeet units selected by the UNITS command lt ptoff gt lt NR1 gt point offset for waveform always 0 lt xzero gt lt NR2 gt x coordinate of first point on waveform in kilometers or kilofeet units selected by the UNITS command lt ymult gt lt NR2 gt scale factor for y values conversion from CURVE query data point value to dBs lt yzero gt NR2 y value zero value always 0 0 yoff i lt 2 gt y value offset value always 0 0 The x coordinate of the nth point on the waveform returned by CURVE is XZero lt xincr gt n lt ptoff gt where n 0 1 2 The y coordinate of the nth point on the waveform is lt yzero gt lt ymult gt y lt yoff gt where y is the nth value returned by the CURVE query and n 0 1 2
374. ng from the opposite distance cursor to the edge of the display to aid in aligning the cursors with the waveform Loss cursor positions then maintain the same two point loss or gain when you move the active distance cursor the amplitude of the point where the loss cursor intersects the distance cursor remains constant as the distance cursor moves The loss per distance unit is recalculated at each new distance cursor position Manual adjustments are retained until you restart automatic two point measurements by pressing the Two Point softkey An automatic two point measurement is made using the current distance cursor locations Link Return Loss mode is a variation of Two Point mode If you turn on return loss manual adjustments made in Two Point mode are retained and displayed in Link Return Loss mode If you restart automatic link return loss measurements or if you make further manual adjustments in Link Return Loss mode these changes are retained when you re enter Two Point mode Measurements you make in any other mode do not affect manual two point measurements and vice versa TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 11 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Front Panel Controls Two Point Mode Event Table Softkey Two Point Softkey Splice Loss Softkey Return Loss Softkey Mass Storage Softkey Change Settings Softkey CURSOR knob When in Two Point Mode use the front panel controls to perform the fo
375. ng remote control to show any setting changes measurement mode changed new acquisitions cursor movement and expansion window changes that occur as a result of GPIB commands Menu screens are not displayed Remote to Local Transition When the instrument returns to local from remote operation the following occurs All front panel controls and softkeys are enabled The REMOTE indicator on the front panel is turned off The acquisition data and instrument settings displayed during remote control remain on the screen after the transition to local Instrument settings and acquired waveform data are not affected GPIB remote message processing continues in the local state but any commands and queries that affect instrument settings data memory or start device operations 8 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control are not executed In response to such a command or query an execution error is logged in the Event Queue and an execution error is flagged in the Standard Event Status Register If previously enabled by the host the instrument asserts the SRQ line For more details on error reporting refer to the Status Reporting and Error Hanaling section later in this chapter Using a GPIB Plotter or Printer Data displayed on FiberMaster s screen can be plotted or printed on an external GPIB plotter or printer both when the instrument is under local and remote control The ThinkJet printer an
376. nge selection If you change the maximum range and the current pulse width is unavailable for the new range the closest available pulse width setting is automatically selected Change the maximum range setting by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this Spacing between data points changes for the longest maximum range settings When the maximum range is set to 160 km or less data points are spaced up to 10 meters apart For maximum ranges of 200 km and above the spacing between data points is 20 meters The selection of a new maximum range requires a new acquisition in order to take effect When you press the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkey to exit the Maximum Range parameter the maximum range setting at the bottom of the screen is highlighted to indicate that the current setting does not match acquisition data When you exit the menu system the following message displays Press START STOP to acquire new data Press START STOP to start an acquisition using the new maximum range The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired because the maximum range setting now corresponds to the displayed waveform data You can press START STOP to start a new acquisition without exiting the menu system TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 13 Chapter 3 Getting Started Maximum Averages To display the Maximum Averages pop up window fro
377. nguage English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 13 02 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection Keyboard Translation Next Param Prev Param Spanish Portuguese Figure 3 26 Keyboard Translation Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Keyboard Translation window to select the type of keyboard to be used with your instrument The factory default setting is USA but you can select another language as the power on default using the User Defaults menu To select the keyboard translation turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have an optional keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new keyboard translation setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started File Format To display the File Format pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the file format parameter is highlighted
378. nly Command Syntax Command Data Discussion Factory Default MSFORMAT lt msformat gt lt msformat gt lt CPD gt and specifies the format to be used TFP2 TFP2 native format CFF Common file format MSFORMAT does not affect the interpretation of files sent to the instrument with the FILNORM FILHIGH or PUT_WFM commands Either TFP2 or CFF format files can be sent with these commands and FiberMaster automatically determines the format of the data received Settings files returned by the FILE and GET_SET queries are always returned in TFP2 format TFP2 8 132 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control SAVECUR SAVEREF SAVESET Save waveform and instrument settings to the mass storage device selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion SAVECUR filename Save current waveform and associated settings SAVEREF lt filename gt Save reference waveform and associated settings SAVESET lt filename gt Save current settings filename SPD and specifies the file name to be saved SAVEC FIBER221 SAVES REF SET SAVEC FIBER221 WFM SAVES REF SET SET If no extension is specified SAVECUR and SAVEREF assume a WFM extension and SAVESET assumes a SET extension The system FIBERID and the current value of the FIBERNOTES and OPERATOR strings as well as the current date and time from
379. normal resolution pulse width when none is available for a given pulse width i e RANGELIST 10 FiberMaster returns the set of ranges compatible with the high resolution pulse width i e as if you had sent the query RANGELIST 10 Return a list of densities available for averaged acquisitions made with the currently selected module pulse width and range Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Example s DENSITYLIST DENSITYLIST normal density gt lt hd1 gt normal density lt NR2 gt lt 1 gt lt NR2 gt Response data consists of one or two lt NR2 gt elements giving available acquisition sample densities in kilometers or kilofeet per sample point as determined by the UNITS command setting The first element is the normal density The second element if any is the high density acquisition sample density DEN query DENSITYLIST 1 0 0 1 response 8 88 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Serial Port Settings Commands and Queries NOTE FiberMaster commands that change instrument settings do not save the new settings as power on defaults To save instrument settings use the SET or LRN query These queries both generate response data in the form of resendable GPIB commands that you can use to set the instrument back to its current configuration Serial port setup commands Set up serial port parameters Hemote only GPIB only Command Syntax
380. nse data elements are sampling intervals in kilometers 0 00020 is the normal density sampling interval 0 00005 is the high density sampling interval SEND 7 SRE 16 Enable a service request when data becomes available in the output queue SEND 7 ACQUIRE 5 0 START HD1 OPC Run a high density acquisition at 5 0 km WAIT SRQ Wait for a service request from FiberMaster when response data becomes available Optionally exchange messages with other devices in the meantime READ STATUS BYTE 7 status Status byte read from device at address 7 is 80 decimal indicating that the RQS bit 64 decimal and the MAV bit 16 decimal are both set RECEIVE 7 response Response 1 SEND SRE 0 Disable FiberMaster service requests SEND 7 ENCDG BIN WFMPRE Request binary waveform encoding for the CURVE query response and size and scaling information for the active waveform RECEIVE 7 response Sample response WFID ALPHA D NR PT 16000 XINCR 0 00005 PT OFF 0 XZERO 5 0 YMULT 0 001562 YZERO 0 0 YOFF 0 0 indicating a waveform ID of ALPHA D the waveform contains 16 000 points the sample interval is 0 00005 kilometers x coordinate for the nth point on the waveform is 5 0 km n 0 00005 kilometers n 0 1 15999 the y coordinate for the nth point can be multiplied by 0 001562 to obtain a dB value SEND 7 CURVE Return data for the active waveform RECEIVE 7 response Sample response 532001 lt wfm_y_data gt lt c
381. nsion window does not change location with reference to the cursor and the waveform However as soon as you turn the CURSOR knob the window moves to center around the intersection of the cursor and the waveform again TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 5 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions CURSOR SELECT Button In Preview Two Point and Link Return Loss modes in both overview and expanded view the CURSOR SELECT button switches the active distance cursor and moves the expansion window so it is centered around the intersection of the waveform and new active cursor If the inactive cursor is off the screen when you press CURSOR SELECT the view switches to show both cursors on the screen if possible If the cursors are not close enough to each other to display both the view is centered around the new active cursor If both points where the waveform intersects the two distance cursors can be contained within the height of the expansion window the vertical position of the window is adjusted to do so even if both distance cursors are not visible on the screen If the intersect points between the waveform and the cursors are separated vertically by more than the height of the expansion window the window centers around the new active distance cursor and the waveform In Splice Loss and Event Return Loss modes the function of the CURSOR SELECT button does not affect the expansion window 6 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Ch
382. nsity Averages 5120 Event Time 00 04 11 Table 1 4 594 Press START STOP Two ip extend Point the acquisition Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage T T T 0 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 Pulse Width 10 ns 1 m HR Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 5 120 3 8 min Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 00 dB Source Acquisition Figure 6 4 Cursor Past Acquisition Range and Resulting Prompt When you press START STOP a new acquisition starts centered around the active distance cursor Normal Density Averages 5120 Event Time 00 04 13 Table 4 594 km 0 000 km Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage T T T 0 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 Pulse Width 10 ns 1 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Max Avas 5 120 Dual Trace Off Module FS1315 1310SM Settings Ref index 1 4680 Event Threshold 000 dB Source Acquisition Figure 6 5 Extended Acquisition If you know the location of a fiber feature that is not included within the current acquisition range you can move the cursor past the end of the waveform directly to the location of the event When you press START STOP new data is acquired with the acquisition
383. nstrument returns to remote control again the previously programmed softkeys are redisplayed and re enabled Refer to the Commands and Queries section in this chapter for full descriptions of the SOFTKEY GSTATUS and MESSAGE commands The use of programmable softkeys is not available in RWLS remote with local lockout state Error and Event Detection Summary The power on setting of the DESER to 255 causes all errors and events detected by FiberMaster to set a bit in the SESR and generate an entry in the Event Queue Errors are summarized on bits 2 through 5 of the SESR The SESR is read and cleared using the ESR query Further detail about errors summarized the SESR can be obtained by sending the EVENT or EVMSG query after sending the ESR query You can program FiberMaster to request service whenever an error or event is detected by setting the appropriate bits in the DESER and SESER and setting the event summary bit ESB in the SRER 8 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control For example to cause FiberMaster to request service when any type of error occurs command execution device dependent or query error but not when other types of events occur send the program message ESE 60 SRE 32 The ESE command sets the CME EXE DDE and QYE bits in the SESER 60 32 16 8 4 enabling the corresponding errors to be summarized in the ESB bit of the STB The SRE command enables a
384. nt codes and messages 8 164 8 173 event marker commands and queries 8 111 8 113 event marking and event table commands and queries 8 106 8 110 execution errors 8 166 8 171 execution warnings 8 173 expansion commands and queries 8 98 8 100 file transfer 8 123 8 131 GPIB addressing 8 4 clear status registers 8 26 command errors 8 19 communications 8 5 8 10 controller instrument synchronization 8 23 Device Event Status Enable Register DE SER 8 11 device clear messages 8 26 device dependent messages 8 7 event code and message formats 8 20 event code categories 8 19 Event Queue 8 15 execution errors 8 19 execution warnings 8 20 IEEE 488 1 8 1 8 3 IEEE 488 1 interface messages 8 5 IEEE 488 2 8 1 8 3 IEEE 488 2 common commands 8 6 input buffer 8 16 Index 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index interface functions 8 3 internal errors 8 19 internal warnings 8 20 message exchange protocol 8 22 Output Queue 8 16 plotter 8 9 power on initialization 8 25 printer 8 9 program messages 8 7 programmable softkeys 8 17 programming example 8 158 8 160 remote local state transitions 8 8 reset 8 26 Return to Local softkey 8 17 Service Request Enable Register SRER 8 16 signallines 8 2 Standard Event Status Enable Register SESER 8 15 standard event status register SESR 8 14 Status Byte Register STB 8 15 synchronization 8 23 system configuration 8 1 system events 8 20 GPIB system 8 1 8 26 GPIB only
385. nt table when you press the Enter Current Meas softkey Manually placed event markers are displayed regardless of the event threshold Exit to Event exit the Event Table screen and return to the acquisition screen with the active distance cursor located at the currently highlighted event Exit exit the Event Table screen and return to the acquisition screen with the active distance cursor located where it was when you entered the Event Table screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 9 Chapter 5 Event Marking Reverting to Automatic Measurements After entering manually adjusted measurements into the event table there may be occasions when you want to restore the original value For an individual measurement you can do this as follows 1 Onthe acquisition screen place the distance cursor on the event and perform the automatic measurement To perform an automatic measurement after manual adjustments have been made make sure you are in the appropriate measurement mode Splice Loss or Event Return Loss then press the Splice Loss or Event Return Loss softkey again 2 Press the Event Table softkey to go to the Event Table screen 3 Press the Enter Current Meas softkey to enter the automatic measurement into the event table The automatic measurement replaces the previous value with an asterisk to indicate that it was entered into the event table manually To re enter all automatic measurements for a particular event you c
386. nto or out of high density data When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor Move the active waveform up and down on the display It is possible to move the waveform off the display When dual trace mode is on the vertical POSITION knob operates only on the active waveform 4 42 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Horizontal Move the waveform right and left on the display In both overview and expanded POSITION view horizontal movement is limited to half the maximum range in either direction knob When dual trace mode is on the horizontal POSITION knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously WFM SELECT Pick whether the current waveform or the reference waveform is active The active button waveform is the only one on which you can make measurements and is displayed at a brighter intensity than the inactive waveform In single trace mode the active waveform is the only one displayed The indicator next to the WFM SELECT button lights to show which waveform is active When dual trace is on and both the current and reference waveforms are displayed the dB scale is that of the active waveform The difference between the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is displayed at the top of the vertical scale To align
387. o place masks manually TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 27 Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE The Place Manual Masks screen is available only if one of the two manual settings is selected on the Masking Type window The Off setting turns off the masking function so no masking is done Resetting the masking type parameter to off and starting a new acquisition clears all masks whether they were set automatically or manually You can also choose between AccuMask and QuickMask masking types either of which can be set manually or automatically High Density Averages 1024 Time 00 01 34 Mass Dead zone Storage T E T 500 550 600 Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 50 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Avas 1 024 108 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File MSK_O WEM Figure 3 13 Unmasked Reflection An example of an unmasked reflection is shown in figure 3 13 masking type set to off The optics hardware requires a recovery time following the reflection resulting in tail following the reflection before the backscatter level is re established Using QuickMask tail is eliminated by masking the reflection QuickMask offers higher averaging speeds however a loss of data before the reflection makes it more difficult to locate the event pre
388. oftkey A description of the test displays along with test results from the last time the test was run Selecting and Clearing Tests to Run On the Run Diagnostics menu use the distance CURSOR knob to select which tests to run As the knob is turned each test listed on the menu is highlighted To select the highlighted test press the Select Test softkey The test is then indicated as Selected in the Status column on the menu To clear a selected test turn the CURSOR knob until the test is highlighted Press the Select Test softkey again The selection is cleared Setting Options for the Selected Tests A second diagnostics menu lets you choose the number of iterations to perform of the selected tests and whether to print the results of the tests on the internal printer Press the Next Menu softkey to display the Set Options menu Run Diagnostics Set Options Diagnostics Parameter Iteration Count Param Use CURSOR Knob to change the settin Figure D 2 Set Options Menu D 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix D Diagnostics Menus Upon entry to the Set Options menu the Iteration Count parameter is highlighted Turn the CURSOR knob to increase or decrease the number of iterations from O to 20 A setting for infinite iterations is also available by turning the CURSOR knob counterclockwise past 0 To set the printer dump parameter press the Next Param softkey to highlight the parameter T
389. ommand PULSRNG 2000 100 If you select a normal resolution pulse width when is none is available for a given pulse width i e PULSRNG 10 4 FiberMaster sets the pulse width to the same width but at the high resolution setting i e as if you had sent the command PULSRNG 10 4 The new pulse width and range take effect immediately and are used for the next acquisition The command is executed even if the reference waveform is currently selected 8 82 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Module Dependent Settings Queries MASKSET Determine whether automatic masking is enabled for the currently selected module NOTE Although manual masking is not selectable under remote control this query may return a response to indicate that manual masking is still in effect having been enabled under local control Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Discussion MASKSET MASKSET masktype masktype lt CRD gt and specifies the current automatic masking setting Possible responses are OFF Masking disabled QUICK QuickMask masking enabled ACCU AccuMask masking enabled MANACCU Manual masking still in effect MANQUICK from local control Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for descriptions of the various masking types The MASKSET query returns the masking setting that will be used for the next acquisition if the current waveform is active If the reference waveform is act
390. op up window for the next parameter on the System Settings menu For example after selecting the display intensity press this softkey to display the Sound pop up selection window The highlighting bar on the System Settings menu moves to indicate the current parameter Prev Param display the pop up window for the previous parameter on the menu Exit return to the acquisition screen The Next Menu Next Param and Prev Param softkeys repeat when held down When you first enter the System Settings screen after powering on the instrument the intensity parameter is the first pop up selection window displayed If you exit the menu system then re enter the System Settings menu before turning off the instrument the last pop up selection window viewed before exiting the menus is redisplayed The settings you can define using the System Settings menu are Language Display intensity Display color Sound System time System date Date format Units File format Keyboard translation Hardcopy device GPIB status GPIB address RS232 baud rate RS232 parity RS232 stop bits RS232 data bits RS232 flow control 3 34 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Language The Language selection window is the first pop up window displayed when you first enter the System Settings menu after power on If the Language window is not displayed upon entering
391. or Non hex digit in ASCII encoding ASCII waveform encoding ENCDG ASCII is in effect and one of the commands FILNORM FILHIGH PUT WFM or PUT SET was received that had a character other than a hexadecimal digit in the data portion of the command data argument 8 166 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control 2510 Waveform file settings error Data header count doesn t match byte count The number of data bytes including the checksum byte received in the FILNORM FILHIGH or FILSET command does not match the data count encoded in the command argument header 2511 Waveform file settings error Checksum error The checksum received as part of the data argument of a FILNORM FILHIGH or FILSET command does not match that computed by FiberMaster Either the checksum sent to FiberMaster was incorrectly computed or a transmission error has occurred 2601 Event marking error Requested operation not available in automatic event marking mode 2602 Event marking error Event or marker number out of range The event or marker number supplied to a command or query is not in the range of 1 through the current number of events in the event table 2603 Event marking error Events notes too long An attempt was made to store event notes that exceeded 79 characters in length 2604 Event marking error Marker distance not in acquisition range An attempt was made to add or delete an event marker at a distance t
392. or edit existing notes Entering and editing notes is described on the following page Exit to Event Exit the Event Notes screen and return to the acquisition screen with the active distance cursor located at the currently highlighted event Exit Exit the Event Notes screen and return to the acquisition screen with the active distance cursor located where it was when you entered the Event Table screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 5 11 Chapter 5 Event Marking Entering and Editing Event Notes From the Event Table screen press the Event Notes softkey then the Edit Notes softkey to go to a screen that allows you to enter and edit notes for each marked event on the fiber Event Table Event Notes Event Tum the CURSOR knob to Evont Noles select characters Next SE corner of 5th amp Elm Event 2 037 002 SE corner of 6th amp Elm SE corner of 7th amp Elm SE corner of Sth amp Elm Prev Event RO37 002 SE corner of 6th amp Elmi Next Char Delete AIBCDEFGHIJIKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcde fghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz01234567894 _ 1 AR 1 lt gt Exit Figure 5 6 Editing Event Notes The current event is highlighted and any existing notes for that event appear in the Event Notes window for editing You can enter up to 79 characters of annotation for each event Use either a keyboard to type in the information or enter the notes using a combination of softkeys
393. or identification string The RS 232 port is disabled as the remote control port whenever any of the following occurs 1 Instrument power is cycled 2 An XMODEM transfer is initiated from the Remote menu 3 A hardcopy operation to an RS 232 printer or plotter is started In each of these cases the port select sequence must be reissued to re enable the RS 232 port for remote control Input Buffer FiberMaster has an input buffer used to store incoming commands and queries It has a capacity of 2048 bytes If flow control is selected FiberMaster requests the controller to stop transmitting data when the number of characters in the buffer reaches 1536 refer to the section on flow control below This threshold is referred to as the high water mark When the number of characters in the input buffer subsequently drops to below 512 characters FiberMaster requests the controller to resume transmitting data This threshold is referred to as the low water mark Data Bit Settings FiberMaster and controller data bit settings should both be set to eight bits per character if binary data transfers are to be used Flow Control Flow control should always be enabled when using RS 232 remote control If not data can be lost especially during data transfers between the controller and FiberMaster RTS CTS is the recommended method of flow control FiberMaster supports bidirectional flow control during remote control In other words
394. orms are displayed on the same distance scale The horizontal SIZE and POSITION knobs operate simultaneously on both waveforms to maintain distance alignment The vertical SIZE knob operates on both waveforms to maintain equal vertical expansion To separate the waveforms vertically however the vertical POSITION knob controls only the active waveform The dB scale displayed is that of the active waveform The difference between the scales of the active and inactive waveforms is shown at the top of the vertical scale You can align the two vertical scales by pressing and holding the WFM SELECT button The inactive waveform moves to the same scale as the active waveform and the difference in the scales displays as 0 dB Changing Instrument Settings The waveform parameter area at the bottom of the acquisition screen shows the settings of the instrument when the active waveform was acquired For the reference waveform these settings are static For the current waveform you can change these settings which reflect the current state of the instrument You can change waveform settings for the current waveform at any time Any setting change that affects how the waveform data is acquired pulse width maximum range or masking type causes a prompt to display instructing you to press START STOP to acquire new data The changed settings are highlighted to show that they do not correspond to the waveform data currently displayed When new data is acquire
395. ort The baud rate is used for both serial plotter and printer hardcopy and XModem data transfers The factory default baud rate is 9600 bits per second You can seta different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter Change the baud rate by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new baud rate takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 51 Chapter 3 Getting Started RS232 Parity To display the RS232 Parity pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the RS232 parity parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Tum the CURSOR knob to Sound On change the selection Time 18 22 53 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Remote RS232 Parity Units Metric None Keyboard USA Even File Format TFP2 Odd HARD COPY Hard Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 32 RS232 Parity Pop Up Selection Window System
396. ory are erased MODULE _ Select the next available laser Changing the laser source requires a new acquisition SELECT When you press the MODULE SELECT button a message displays instructing you to button press START STOP to acquire new data using the new laser In addition any waveform parameters that change when you change laser sources are highlighted to show that these parameters no longer match the displayed waveform data The highlighting is cleared when new data is acquired START STOP Start a new acquisition Any manually adjusted measurements are retained until you button press the Two Point softkey to restart measurements If an acquisition is already in progress pressing the START STOP button stops the acquisition Pressing and holding the START STOP button starts a real time acquisition TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 15 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Two Point Measurements Examples Use Two Point mode to make two point end to end distance and loss measurements and to measure fiber loss loss per distance unit Two Point End to End Measurements To measure distance and loss between any two points on a fiber follow the steps described below In this example the slope calculation setting used was two point the recommended setting for end to end measurements 1 Turn the CURSOR knob to place the active distance cursor on the leading edge of the first event As you move the distance cursor the loss curso
397. ose the optional high speed internal thermal printer or use FiberMaster with either an IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus GPIB external plotter or printer or an RS232 external plotter or printer One press of a button on the instrument s front panel provides a 15 second hard copy of the displayed waveform and instrument settings on the internal printer Remote Control Capability 1 The FiberMaster can be operated under the remote control of an instrument controller or a computer with a GPIB interface using an IEEE 488 general purpose interface bus or via the RS 232 serial interface Additional Features An easy to use menu system simplifies setting instrument measurement parameters You can upload and download waveform and settings data using the RS232 interface and XModem protocol LY The 7 inch diagonal high resolution color or monochrome CRT provides a comprehensive on screen readout of waveform and measurement data and instrument settings Online help displays context sensitive operator assistance at the press of a button 1 Rugged portable construction is also lightweight under 35 pounds 15 kilograms TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction General Waveform Analysis Figure 1 1 shows an optical fiber waveform acquisition typical of the data you might see on the FiberMaster CRT The horizontal axis shows the distance from FiberMaster s front panel connector to
398. other property damage A WARNING flag identifies a potential for personal injury or property damage A DANGER flag identifies an immediate hazard to personal safety or property Symbols that may be marked on the equipment indicate the following DANGER High Voltage J ATTENTION refer to manual a Protective ground earth terminal This product is designed to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 250 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between the supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation Power Source Grounding the Instrument The instrument is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to the product input or output terminals TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual XVii User Safety Summary Danger Arising from Loss of Ground If you lose the protective ground connection all accessible conductive parts including knobs and controls that appear to be insulating can render an electric shock Use the Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product Use only a power cord in good condition Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel Use the Proper Fuse To avoid fire hazard use only a fuse of the correct type voltage rating and curr
399. otocol in exchanging messages with the instrument Refer to the section Message Exchange Protocol earlier in this chapter 440 488 2 query UNTERMINATED error after indefinite response The controller has sent IDN GPLTSCREEN or GPLTTEXT but it is not the only or last query in the program message Refer to the descriptions of query response argument formats in the Command and Queries section of this chapter 4031 User request Softkey 1 actuation 4032 User request Softkey 2 actuation 4033 User request Softkey 3 actuation 4034 User request Softkey 4 actuation 4035 User request Softkey 5 actuation One of the programmable softkeys 1 through 5 was programmed using the SOFTKEY command and has been pressed by the operator 8 168 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Execution Warnings Execution warning codes are in the range from 500 to 599 and set the EXE bit in the Standard Event Status Register 501 WFM command warning no waveform data stored Zero data points are returned for the waveform requested 502 WFM command warning averages adjusted to nearest multiple of 256 The AVERAGES command was sent with an argument not equal to a positive multiple of 256 The requested setting is being adjusted as indicated Internal Warnings Internal warning codes are in the range from 600 to 699 and set the DDE bit in the Standard Event Status Register 610 Internal printe
400. ou direct access to the Place Event Markers screen where you can add move and delete event markers manually The Manual setting prevents the system from automatically locating events but does not delete any existing markers The markers indicate where measurements are recalculated for the event table with each new acquisition If the new splice loss TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 25 Chapter 3 Getting Started measurement at an existing marker is less than the current event threshold setting the marker is deleted from the acquisition screen and the event table but not from the Place Event Markers screen When event marking is set to Manual and a new acquisition does not extend to all event marker locations the event table indicates there is no data for those markers outside the acquisition range Instructions on placing manual event markers are given in chapter 5 Event Marking 3 26 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Masking Type To display the Masking Type pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the masking type parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu This parameter is available only if the currently selected wavelength supports masking FS series 1310 nm SM and 1550 nm SM Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu Masking Type Next Param Auto
401. ou now have a set of event markers saved on disk for use in building event tables for each fiber in the cable Recall event markers and use them for subsequent data acquisition 1 Press the Mass Storage softkey to enter the mass storage system and reload the settings file saved in step 5 above 2 Press the Change Settings softkey to go to the Waveform Settings menu and change the event marking parameter to Manual 3 Connect the second fiber from the cable to FiberMaster s front panel Press START STOP to start a new acquisition The original event markers are used for measurements and an event table is compiled for the second fiber 4 Press HARD COPY to print the waveform 5 Press the Event Table softkey to go to the Event Table screen Enter new notes about the second fiber 6 Press HARD COPY to print the event table and notes for the second fiber 7 Repeat steps through 6 for each fiber in the cable until each fiber is documented 5 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Operational Details of Automatic Event Marking The following paragraphs describe how automatic event marking handles certain special cases Front Panel Reflections Automatic event marking treats the front panel reflection as a normal reflective event and makes a return loss measurement on the reflection Nonreflective Gains Nonreflective gains caused by mismatched fibers are treated in the same way as reflec
402. ould not Serial controller register reset value D2 00020 Serial controller loop back error bad data received TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual F 5 Appendix F Error Codes Table F 5 Phase 2 Error Codes cont Error Code Description D2 00040 Serial controller does not transmit character D2 00080 Serial controller counter does not count down D2 00100 Floppy controller register read error D2 00200 Real time clock time updates not OK D2 00400 GPIB controller soft reset command failed fatal D2 00800 Printer controller register write read failed D2 01000 Floppy controller drive reset interrupt D2 02000 Serial controller loop back error timeout D2 04000 Serial controller counter error no interrupts fatal D2 08000 NV memory checksum error D2 10000 NV memory read write error fatal F 6 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Index A AC power 1 14 1 24 AC DC power 1 15 2 12 accessories optional A 2 standard 1 AccuMask 3 28 3 29 ACQUIRE 8 94 acquisition screen 1 8 1 11 acquisition sampling 3 10 3 14 active waveform 1 10 2 10 3 22 4 5 4 6 4 14 4 15 4 26 4 34 4 42 4 43 6 11 6 12 6 13 8 114 8 115 8 117 8 119 8 127 ADDMARKER 8 111 align waveforms 4 6 4 15 4 26 4 34 4 43 6 12 AVERAGES 8 75 averages 3 14 AVERAGES 8 79 AVETIME 8 88 backscatter 1 4 3 20 4 30 4 39 batch copy 7 18 BATCHCOPY 8 132 batteries 1 41 BAUDRATE 8 91 BAUDRATE 8
403. p Up Selection Window System Settings 3 40 Figure 3 23 System Date Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 41 Figure 3 24 Date Format Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 42 Figure 3 25 Units Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu eee esie innen 3 43 Figure 3 26 Keyboard Translation Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 44 Figure 3 27 File Format Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu esee eese ee 3 45 Figure 3 28 Hardcopy Device Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu esee esee nein enne tn nnn nn 3 47 Figure 3 29 GPIB Status Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu eese esie eiie enne nnn nn nana 3 49 Figure 3 30 GPIB Address Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 50 Figure 3 31 RS232 Baud Rate Pop Up Selection Window System Settings 3 51 Figure 3 32 RS232 Parity Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu eere esee eiie nnne 3 52 Figure 3 33 RS232 Stop
404. pansion window in distance units kilometers or kilofeet height lt DNPD gt and specifies the height of the expansion window in decibels WINC 2 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 95 Chapter 8 Remote Control WINDISTANCE Set the expansion window dimensions and center distance The expansion window is centered vertically at the amplitude of the waveform at the given center distance Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion WINDOW WINDISTANCE lt width gt lt height gt lt dist gt width lt DNPD gt and specifies the width of the expansion window in distance units kilometers or kilofeet height lt DNPD gt and specifies the height of the expansion window in decibels dist lt DNPD gt and specifies the center distance for the expansion window which need not specify the location of a data point on the waveform in distance units WINDIST 1 5 15 3 625 If the expansion window is moved off the active distance cursor the cursor moves with the expansion window Set the dimensions center distance and amplitude of the expansion window Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion WINDOW lt width gt lt height gt lt dist gt lt amp gt width lt DNPD gt and specifies the width of the expansion window in distance units kilometers or kilofeet lt height gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the
405. ped from the factory If you change your instrument s configuration however you may need to remove or install these covers as shown in figure 1 7 m Option port cover Disk drive cover Figure 1 7 Front Panel Option Covers 1 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Loading Paper into the Internal Printer To load paper into the internal thermal printer follow these steps 1 2 3 4 e 7 Slide the printer cover back Lift out the old paper roll and remove the black disks from either end Insert the disks into the ends of the new paper roll Place the new roll into the printer with the end of the paper coming out from under the roll towards the front of the instrument Push the paper tension lever down and hold it down for step 6 Feed the paper into the slot in the paper guide until it comes out in front of the aluminum paper guide See figure 1 8 The arrows indicate the direction in which to feed the paper Release the tension lever When the printer is in use slide the printer cover closed until it reaches the stops provided for the paper opening Use the serrated edge of the cover as a guide to tear the paper off After printing tear off any remaining paper and slide the cover completely closed over the printer 2 Paper tension lever NI Figure 1 8 Loading Paper into the Internal Printer TFP2A FiberMaster User
406. ponse Data test result lt NR1 gt Possible values are 0 self tests passed 1 At least one self test failed Discussion Instrument settings and stored data are not affected by the selftest sequence Detailed selftest results can be obtained by sending the TSTRESULT query after sending TST TST clears the results stored during the execution of any previous TST query The TST query takes approximately two and one half minutes to execute The selftest includes tests of any installed mass storage drive Before sending the TST query make sure that each drive contains correctly formatted non write protected media If RS 232 remote control is active the TST query does not run tests of FiberMaster s RS 232 interface CAUTION Do not use media containing any data files A failure of the tests could result in the corruption and or loss of any or all data TSTRESULT Obtain detailed results from last TST query Remote only Query Syntax TSTRESULT Response Syntax TSTRESULT results Response Data results lt SRD gt and describes the results from the last TST selftests 8 154 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control GPIB Programming Example A hypothetical controller language is used in the following GPIB programming example It includes the following statements SEND addr program message Send program message enclosed in quotes plus a program message ter
407. ppears informing you to press START STOP to reacquire normal density data using the new masking parameters When you reacquire normal density data the high density data is discarded When a new acquisition is started and high density data is not being viewed any existing high density data is erased from current memory Storing High Density Data When you copy a waveform from current acquisition memory to reference memory by pressing the STORE button any associated high density data is copied along with the overview data and parameter settings The Save menu in the mass storage system accommodates saving and recalling high density data When you want to save a waveform that has high density data associated with it a prompt displays asking if you want to include the high density data in the save function Any waveform that is saved with high density data is automatically recalled with that data TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 6 11 Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Dual Trace Mode Dual trace mode displays two waveforms on the screen at once You can turn dual trace mode on or off using the Waveform Settings menu Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for details on setting instrument parameters When dual trace mode is on one waveform is displayed from current memory and a second is displayed from reference memory When dual trace mode is off only the active waveform displays Making Measurements In dual trace mode
408. printer x and y are required arguments but their values are ignored The text string is printed at the current paper position printer plotter commands NL END printer plotter commands is the sequence of printer or plotter commands needed to draw the text string on the printer or plotter The HCTYPE command specifies the type of data to be returned by this query A response header is never sent for this query GPLTTEXT must be sent as the last or only query in a program message because it asserts the END line after the data is sent For more information on sending data to a GPIB hardcopy device refer to the section Using a GPIB Plotter or Printer in this chapter The response for this query is not a 488 2 compatible response data format HCTYPE Return the format of data output to the GPIB port Remote only Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data HCTYPE HCTYPE lt hctype gt hctype lt CRD gt Values are PLOTTER HPGL data THINKJET EPSON and POSTSCRIPT 8 142 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Display Related Commands and Query GSTATUS Enable or disable the display of GPIB interface status information on the instrument screen Status information is shown only when the instrument is under remote control Hemote only Command Syntax GSTATUS lt option gt Command Data option lt CPD gt lt DNPD gt Possible values are O
409. pulse widths regardless of the range desired Response Syntax PULSELIST 0 0 PULSELIST lt pulsewidth gt lt pulsewidth gt The first response implies the specified range is not available The second response returns a list of one or more NR2 elements each of which is an available pulse width in nanoseconds Example s PULSELIST 20 0 100 0 200 0 500 0 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 87 Chapter 8 Remote Control RANGELIST Determine available maximum ranges for the currently selected module and specified pulse width Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Example s Discussion DENSITYLIST RANGELIST pulse width pulse width DNPD and specifies the desired pulse width use a value of 0 to return all available ranges regardless of the pulse width desired RANGELIST 0 0 or RANGELIST lt range gt lt range gt The first response indicates the specified pulse width is not available The second response returns a list of one or more lt NR2 gt elements each of which is an available range in units selected by the UNITS command kilometers or kilofeet RANGELIST 0 5 1 0 2 0 5 0 10 0 If you specify a high resolution pulse width when none is available for a given pulse width i e RANGELIST 2000 FiberMaster returns the set of ranges compatible with the normal resolution pulse width i e as if you had sent the command RANGELIST 2000 If you specify a
410. puter and the FiberMaster These devices can be connected directly or over a telephone line as shown in figure 8 4 RS 232 cable PC TFP2A Telephone lin PC with internal modem ideal Remote Controller modem modem RS 232 cable TFP2A Figure 8 4 RS 232 Direct Connection and Connection over Telephone Line Multidrop configurations or addressing schemes are not supported Half duplex and synchronous RS 232 links are not supported Similar to the GPIB interface FiberMaster functions as a talker and listener it does not have controller capability For example it cannot control another FiberMaster or configure a modem An RS 232 terminal can be used to configure a modem before the modem is connected to FiberMaster as shown in figure 8 4 Operation of the TFP2A under RS 232 remote control cannot be mixed with XModem file transfers or GPIB remote control You must cycle power to the instrument press POWER once to turn the TFP2A off then press POWER again to turn it on and reinitialize the instrument under the following conditions 1 After using XModem if RS 232 remote control is desired or if hard copy to an RS 232 printer is desired 2 After using RS 232 remote control if GPIB remote control is desired 3 After using GPIB remote control if RS 232 remote control is desired 8 26 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Signal Li
411. py disk drive Humidity operating Mainframe With internal printer Without floppy disk drive Altitude maximum Operating Non operating Operating 5 to 50 C Non operating 40 to 60 C Operating 5 to 40 C Non operating 20 to 60 C Operating 10 to 55 C Non operating 40 to 70 C 8 to 75 4 596 0 noncondensing 35 to 75 5 0 noncondensing 5 to 90 4 596 0 noncondensing 15 000 ft 4 6 km 50 000 ft 15 2 km Tek 062 2847 00 Class 3 exceeds MIL T 28800E Sine vibration Operating Disk drive non operating Frequency sweep 10 to 55 Hz Loading 0 5G maximum Frequency sweep 10 to 55 Hz Loading 2 0G maximum Shock maximum Operating 5G Disk drive non operating 30G Bench handling MIL T 28800E Transit drop MIL T 28800E Water resistance Drip proof tested with front cover on Fungus resistance Enclosure and electronics are fungus inert by design TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 25 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 9 Environmental Characteristics cont Electromagnetic EC Council Directive 89 336 EEC compatibility Emissions EN 50081 1 Radiated emissions FCC Part 15 Subpart J Class A EN55022 Class B Mains Current Harmonics IEC 1000 3 2 Conducted emissions FCC Part 15 Subpart J Class A EN55022 Class B EN60555 2 Magnetic emissions Vfg 243 Class B Immunity EN 50082 1 IEC 1000 4
412. quisition as long as the event marking parameter is set to Manual Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for information on the event threshold and event marking parameters and how to set them This section describes FiberMaster s event marking features how to locate events automatically and manually edit the event table and add event notes 5 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Turning on Event Marking When FiberMaster is turned on and a waveform is acquired the instrument defaults to Preview mode with event markers turned off To view the event markers in Preview mode or any other current measurement mode press and hold the Event Table softkey for two seconds The event marking parameter defaults to Auto All events that meet or exceed the event threshold are automatically marked with a triangle and numbered consecutively from left to right Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 Loss 1 231 dB km 6 458 km 9 287 km T 0 2 T 4 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Maximum Range 10 0 km Max Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Ref Index 1 4680 Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 30 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Module F51315 13105M File LSJU76 WEM Normal Density Event 2 Dist 6 458 km Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 Loss 1 231 dB km
413. r amplitude out of range An attempt was made to center the expansion window at an amplitude outside the range from 30 to 50 dB 2302 Waveform setting error attempt to change reference waveform settings An attempt was made to change settings while the reference waveform was active 2401 Display command error attempt to program softkeys in RWLS An attempt to enable events from the front panel softkeys was made during local lockout 2402 Display command error attempt to program softkey 4 or 5 when GPIB status shown An attempt was made to program softkey 4 or 5 when they were disabled by the display of GPIB status indicators 2501 Waveform settings file error Bad file data version Indicates that an unrecognized waveform or file settings version number was received 2504 Waveform settings file error Miscellaneous data error Indicates a possible transmission error or application program error related to reading data from a waveform or settings file 2505 Waveform settings file error All data wasn t received Indicates that not all data needed to store the waveform and or settings on the instrument was received Data was lost during transmission or the application program did not send the complete data for the waveform or settings 2508 Waveform file settings error Invalid data header format A FILNORM FILHIGH or FILSET command was received that had an incorrect header format 2509 Waveform file settings err
414. r Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Real Time Acquisition In real time acquisition data is acquired as fast as possible and new acquisitions are continually displayed on the screen The acquisition rate varies for different wavelength maximum range and pulse width settings The data is averaged minimally so changes appear on the display almost immediately Real time acquisition is useful for adjusting fiber connections and making splices To start a real time acquisition press and hold the START STOP button for two seconds When you put the instrument into real time mode the maximum averages and masking type settings may no longer apply to the acquisition The settings displayed at the bottom of the acquisition screen for these parameters change to indicate the actual values used for real time mode When you stop real time mode the settings revert to their previous values The masking types allowed during a real time acquisition are Off Auto QuickMask and Manual QuickMask If AccuMask is on the masking type parameter switches to the appropriate QuickMask setting auto or manual for the duration of real time mode During a real time acquisition the elapsed time displayed at the top of the acquisition screen changes to read Time z Real Time and the acquisition active indicator displays at the lower left of the waveform area The only measurements possible in real time mode are two point measurements When you st
415. r error Generic internal printer failure 611 Internal printer error printer busy Attempt to print while the printer is still completing the last print request 612 Internal printer error paper error The internal printer has a paper jam or is out of paper 613 Internal printer error head disengaged Internal printer s head is disengaged 620 RS232 error Generic serial port error 621 RS232 error parity error Invalid parity in character received by serial port 622 RS232 error framing error Invalid character framing in character received by serial port 623 RS232 error overrun error Receiver buffer overrun detected by serial port 624 RS232 error transmitter timeout A timeout has occurred as a result of attempting to transmit a character from the serial port 631 GPIB error no acceptor on bus An attempt was made to place data on the GPIB when no acceptor was detected Both the NDAC and NRFD handshake lines were high when the GPIB source handshake became active TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 169 Chapter 8 Remote Control 8 170 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual A Accessories and Options Mainframes Table A 1 Mainframe Options Mainframe Description TFP2A Mainframe with color monitor TFP2AM Mainframe with monochrome monitor 1T Hard case option 1R 19 inch rackmount option L1 French language option L3 German language option L4 Spanish language op
416. r follows the slope of the waveform Normal Density Averages 20480 Time 00 00 31 Loss 1 255 dB km 6 453 km 8 051 km 40 2 01 dB 30 20 10 0 d T T 0 2 4 6 Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module 51315 13105 Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LSJU78 WEM Event Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss Mass Storage Change Settings Figure 4 6 Automatic Two Point Measurement Positioning the First Distance Cursor 2 Press the EXPAND button to expand the view of the event if necessary for precise cursor placement If both cursors are not on the screen in expanded view you may want to press EXPAND again to return to overview before going to the next step 3 Press CURSOR SELECT to switch active cursors 4 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 4 Place the second cursor on the leading edge of the second event expanding the view if necessary An automatic two point measurement is made using the points where the distance and loss cursors intersect the waveform See the example below Two point distance and loss figures are shown near the waveform and loss per unit of distance is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen
417. redrawn to show your choices Curr Wfm amp Settings saves the current waveform and instrument settings Ref Wfm amp Settings saves the reference waveform and settings Curr Settings saves the current instrument settings only Cancel returns to the Save menu without saving any data Waveform files are saved using the currently selected file format TFP2 or CFF The file format is selected on the System Settings menu described in chapter 3 Settings files are saved in TFP2 format only regardless of which format is selected on the System Settings menu The Quick Save function allows you to save waveform files with a minimum of button pressing and text entry Quick Save lets you to save multiple waveform files automatically incrementing the file name and fiber ID For example you can save a waveform into a file called FIBERO1 WFM then use the Quick Save function to save successive waveforms in FIBERO2 WFM FIBEROS3 WFM FIBERO4 WFM etc These file names are automatically provided by the Quick Save function and the save operation is performed by one button press The fiber ID is incremented automatically as well for example FIBERA9 becomes FIBERBO The incrementing is based on both alpha and numeric characters It starts with the last character in the file name and moves left as characters are incremented from 9 to 0 or from Z to A The incrementing stops when a non alphanumeric character is found For example FIBER 01 WFM b
418. ree ee de 8 4 GPIB Communications sessi 8 5 GPIB Status Reporting and Error Handling 8 11 GPIB System Errors Events and Warnings 8 19 GPIB Message Exchange Protocol seen 8 22 GPIB Controller and Instrument Synchronization 8 23 GPIB Device Initialization sessi 8 25 5 2325 51 iuc eI Lan eae oio pe xS cassa 8 27 HS 232 Signal LINCS isi ER REP pH aed 8 28 RS 232 System Setup a sairaana diinya lda taanoa kapada apii nnns 8 29 RS 232 Communications siiis seen 8 36 RS 232 Status Reporting and Error 8 39 RS 232 System Errors Events and 5 8 43 RS 232 Controller and Instrument Synchronization 8 46 RS 232 Device Initialization aee 8 47 Similarities and Differences between GPIB and RS 232 Remote Control eee esee esie eee ea 8 49 Differences between GPIB and RS 232 Remote Control 8 49 RS 232 Emulation of IEEE 488 1 Interface Messages 8 53 Remote Control Data 8 56 Commands and Queries essei esee
419. res from the splice loss measurement such as large reflections Automatic measurements also exclude the splice or event itself Dashed portions of the loss cursors indicate the excluded segments of the waveform In addition you can use the masking function to control the data used when positioning loss cursors in Splice Loss mode The portions of the waveform that are masked are not used in measurement calculations The availability of the masking function depends on the laser source only the FM FS series 1300 nm MM 1310 nm SM and 1550 nm SM modules support masking Manual Splice Loss Measurements NOTE To adjust measurements select the active loss cursor using the CURSOR SELECT button You can adjust the active loss cursor using the vertical and slope Loss knobs Manually adjusted loss cursors extend along the slope of the waveform to the edges of the display to help you make accurate adjustments As you move the distance cursor the loss cursors maintain the same slopes and vertical positions and splice loss is recalculated Manual adjustments are retained until you restart automatic splice loss measurements by pressing the Splice Loss softkey An automatic splice loss measurement is made at the current distance cursor position Event Return Loss mode is a variation of Splice Loss mode If you turn on return loss manual adjustments made in Splice Loss mode are retained and displayed in Event Return Loss mode If you restart automa
420. ress Change Settings then press Next Param or Prev Param until the event marking parameter is highlighted on the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu Event Marking Next Aut Param Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection Pulse Width 500 ns 50 Slope Calc Two Point ven ing Auto IMaximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 1310SM Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 3 11 Event Marking Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Event Marking window to choose whether events on a fiber under test are automatically marked The factory default event marking setting is Auto You can use the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter to choose a different power on default When event marking is set to Auto all events with splice loss measurements that meet or exceed the event threshold are automatically marked and measured on the acquisition screen and the measurements used to compile the event table Event markers are recalculated and redisplayed with each new acquisition The Manual setting allows you to set and adjust the event markers using the Place Event Markers screen When the manual setting is selected an additional softkey displays on the Waveform Settings menu Place Markers This softkey gives y
421. ress START STOP the start up screen is replaced by the acquisition screen TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 1 Chapter 3 Getting Started WARNING CAUTION Quick Start NOTES 9 34 54 System R1 14E Tektronix 771 1995 Date 20 95 FIBERIVIASTER iu m Copyright 1990 1995 Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Please select a module and a pulsewidth and connect a fiber Press START STOP to begin an acquisition The internal printer is installed Optics Modules lt U1 gt lt U2 gt lt L1 gt FL1315 1310SM V8 02 lt 12 gt FL1315 15508SM V8 02 There is a floppy disk drive installed Instrument Settings Pulse Width 2000 ns 200 m Dual Trace Off Maximum Range 100 0 km Event Threshold 0 20 dB Max Avgs 20 480 1 1 min Event Marking Auto Ref Index 1 4680 Filtering On Change Slope Calc Two Point Module FL1315 1310SM Settings Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Source Empty Figure 3 1 FiberMaster Start Up Screen Avoid eye exposure to laser output and open ended fibers by covering the end or directing the output at a non reflective surface The TFP2A FiberMaster has been classified as a Class 1 laser product under the Radiation Control and Health Safety Act of 1968 Keep the optical output connectors and the connector plugs clean at all times Dust and dirt affect the optical output power Cover the connectors when not in use
422. resumes unless you have performed an operation that affects current memory For example if you load a waveform from disk to current memory the previous acquisition data is overwritten If you load a settings file into current memory the previous acquisition does not resume when you exit mass storage You must press the START STOP button to start a new acquisition using the new settings If a real time acquisition is in progress you must stop it before you can enter the mass storage menus A status line displays at the bottom of each mass storage menu to inform you how to perform each function and to show the status of any current operation The Load from Disk menu is always the first menu displayed when you enter mass storage TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 1 Chapter 7 Mass Storage FiberMaster File Types FiberMaster uses data files containing waveform data and associated settings and event markers and files containing instrument settings and event markers only When you create a file by saving waveform or settings data in mass storage a three character suffix is automatically appended to the file name unless you specify the suffix The suffix that is added automatically depends on which type of data the file contains The suffix WFM is added to waveform file names and the suffix SET is added to settings file names Waveform files can be in one of two formats depending on how they were saved The formats are TFP2 and CF
423. rform self tests on ROM RAM and major circuits 3 The start up screen appears The options installed in the instrument are listed on the start up screen The instrument s firmware version is displayed in the upper right hand corner If any power on self tests fail the results are displayed on the screen and a Self Test softkey displays This softkey allows access to a Diagnostics menu that gives more information on the power on test that failed The Diagnostics menu is described in appendix D NOTE If any power on self tests fail the start up screen fails to display or the instrument does not power on contact your Tektronix representative or telephone toll free in the U S and Canada 1 800 TEK WIDE ext 2400 4 Press the MODULE SELECT button to select a laser source if more than one laser source is available on your instrument 5 The instrument s waveform settings are displayed at the bottom of the start up Screen You can change setting values from those displayed by pressing the Change Settings softkey Instructions on configuring your instrument are given in this chapter If you enter the menu system from the start up screen the acquisition screen displays when you exit the menus 6 Connect a fiber to FiberMaster in one of two ways 1 directly using a mating connector plug to match the front panel connector or 2 indirectly via an optical interface cable 7 Start an acquisition by pushing the START STOP button When you p
424. rizontally in overview Shrinking the waveform in expanded view is the same as enlarging the expansion window in overview You can see the effects of these actions on the width of the expansion window when you return to overview If you expand the waveform horizontally such that 100 data points are displayed you may be prompted to push the START STOP button to obtain high density data Refer to the next section in this chapter for a discussion of high density data Distance CURSOR Knob In overview the expansion window is centered around the intersect point between the active distance cursor and the active waveform When you move the distance cursor the window follows along the waveform If you move the distance cursor off the waveform the expansion window stays centered around the distance cursor and the vertical position of the last data point on the waveform In expanded view you can move the distance cursor within the expansion window When you move the cursor past the right or left edge of the display the cursor continues scrolling along the waveform dragging the expansion window with it The waveform appears to move in the opposite direction In some cases you may be able to drag the expansion window off the waveform In expanded view the vertical positions of the waveform and the expansion window are not affected by moving the distance cursor When you return to overview after moving the distance cursor in expanded view the expa
425. rogress or device status LLO Local Lock Out Disables return to local from front panel SPD Serial Poll Disable Exits serial poll state Return to normal talker status SPE Serial Poll Enable Enters serial poll state allows sending status byte The status byte not device dependent data will be sent when the device is addressed to talk Table 8 4 Multiline Addressed Interface Messages Message Description GTL Go to Local Re enables local control of device SDC Selected Device Clear Same actions as DCL if addressed as a listener Table 8 5 Multiline Address Interface Messages Message Description MLA My Listen Address Instrument becomes addressed to listen MTA My Talk Address Instrument becomes addressed to talk OTA Other Talk Address Instrument becomes unaddressed to talk do not put data on the bus UNL Unlisten If instrument is addressed to listen becomes unaddressed UNT Untalk If instrument is addressed to talk becomes unaddressed The following interface messages are ignored by FiberMaster GET IDY MSA TCT PPC PPE PPD PPRn and PPU Common Commands and Queries FiberMaster recognizes a subset of the common commands and queries defined in IEEE 488 2 Each common command is identified by an asterisk The commands implemented in FiberMaster include the following for descriptions of these commands refer to the Commands and Queries section in this chapter IDN LRN RST CLS ESE SRE ESE ESR
426. rument to 1 Clear the Input Buffer and the Output Queue Abort any query response currently being sent Clear the MAV message available bit in the SESR Reset the message exchange protocol state gt RO N device clear does not 1 Change instrument settings or stored waveform data 2 Affect instrument front panel operation or change the remote local state 3 Affect status or status enable registers with the exception of clearing the MAV message available bit in the STB 4 Change the bus address or GPIB status of the instrument 5 Unaddress the instrument to talk or listen Reset The RST command resets all instrument settings to factory defaults and clears any acquired waveforms from data memory and instrument display refer to the description of the RST command in the following section If the RST command is preceded by a device clear message it also aborts any current device operation started by the execution of a command or query with the exception of mass storage operations which are allowed to complete Clear Status Registers The CLS command clears the SESR the STB except for the MAV bit and the Event Queue If the instrument is currently requesting service it releases the SRQ line and clears the RQS bit in the STB TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 25 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 System NOTE The only two devices allowed on the RS 232 link are the controller typically a host com
427. ry area of the Delete menu the lower half of the display lists the contents of the currently active drive Load Save From Disk To Disk Format Delete Copy Next IFILESPECIFICATION Menu Drive Type Removable File Type TFP2 Switch Drives File Name HARRISO01 WFM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Delete Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 44 Removable Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRISO1 WFM HARRISO2 SET HARRISO2 WFM HARRISO3 WFM HARRISO4 WFM HARRISQ5 WFM HARRISO6 WFM HARRISO7 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIDLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKO3 WFM MIDLAK04 WFM Previous Page Select filename w CURSOR knob press Delete softkey Figure 7 9 Delete Menu Dual Drive Instrument Pressing the Switch Drives softkey allows you to view the directory of the other drive The Drive Type field in the file specification area of the screen indicates which drive is active Fixed refers to the internal RAM and Removable refers to the floppy disk drive You can then select the file to delete from the active drive s directory For dual drive instruments if there is a disk in the floppy disk drive when you turn on the instrument that drive is the active drive If there is no floppy disk present the internal RAM is the default drive type Af
428. s The Event Queue has overflowed More than eight events have been written to it since the last ESR query Event 350 does not log an event to the SESR Command Errors NOTE Command error codes are in the range from 100 to 199 and set the CME bit in the Standard Event Status Register 102 Syntax error invalid starting character for token token The parser has started scanning the first or next token in a program message and has determined that its first character is invalid 102 Syntax error unexpected character in token token char A character inconsistent with the definition of a token has been found while scanning a token char is the character causing the error If printable it appears literally in the event message otherwise the ASCII hexadecimal value of the character appears in the format xxH 102 Syntax error unexpected end of message in token token xxH 102 Syntax error unexpected end of message in token token END An end of message has been detected while scanning an incomplete token An ASCII newline within a data element other than string program data or the concurrent assertion of the GPIB EOI line with a data byte in an incomplete token 102 Syntax error unexpected token in message token A token has occurred in a program message in a place that violates IEEE 488 2 device listening format 102 Syntax error token too long last 20 characters of token A token longer than 256 ch
429. s Remote only Command Syntax Discussion STOP RST Set instrument settings to factory and power on defaults with the following exceptions 1 The GPIB address is not changed 2 The output queue is unaffected 3 The Standard Event Status Enable Register and Service Request Enable Register are unaffected If RS 232 remote control is active RS 232 parameters baud rate parity data bits stop bits and flow control are not affected If a real time acquisition is in progress it is stopped The display screen is updated to show an acquisition screen with cursors in power on positions Any previously acquired waveform s are cleared from data memory and from the display If immediately preceded by a device clear message SDC or DCL RST aborts any current device operation with the exception of mass storage operations Stop operation Remote only Command Syntax Discussion STOP Use the STOP command to abort the following types of operations averaged acquisitions measurements hardcopy operations and diagnostic tests To abort one of these operations send a device clear interface message SDC or DCL immediately followed by the STOP command The STOP command also causes the instrument to exit realtime acquisition mode In this case the device clear message is not necessary TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 149 Chapter 8 Remote Control Status and Error Reporting Commands CLS GPI
430. s an internal error For example an internal warning would occur in response to a timeout on a data transfer to an external device such as a plotter or a printer out of paper error Event Code and Message Formats In response to the EVENT and EVMSG queries event codes are formatted as unsigned decimal integers Event messages are returned as string response data up to 256 characters in total length Refer to the EVENT and EVMSG query descriptions in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter Event messages may be in one of nine formats 1 lt message gt message lt specifics gt 2 3 message Header lt header gt 4 lt gt Header header Parameter lt param gt 5 message Header header Parameter 1 lt param1 gt Parameter 2 lt param2 gt message specifics Header lt header gt 7 message specifics Header header Parameter lt param gt 8 message specifics Header header Parameter 1 lt param1 gt Parameter 2 lt param2 gt TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 19 Chapter 8 Remote Control The message elements are defined as follows message a basic description of the error or event specifics further detail about the error or event header the header of the command or query that caused the error and param the text of an invalid parameter or parameters received lt
431. s and allowing controller and instrument synchronization Queries also read instrument settings status and configuration information Device dependent commands and queries are listed in the Commands and Queries section of this chapter A sequence of one or more device dependent commands and queries is called a program message The FiberMaster is programmed by sending it one or more program messages from the controller A program message that contains a query is called a query message For explanations of the formats of commands queries and program messages refer to the Commands and Queries section of this chapter Modes of Operation You can operate FiberMaster using the front panel controls as described in chapters 2 through 7 or remotely using a remote controller In addition to these local and remote states the controller can place the instrument in a local lockout condition at any time This combination yields three possible operating states 2 Local State LOCS FiberMaster responds to front panel control and to remote messages that do not affect instrument settings data memory or start device operations Qj Remote State REMS In REMS the controller can change instrument settings and start acquisitions and other device operations In this state a Return to Local Softkey displays allowing the operator to return the instrument to local control 21 Remote with Lockout State RWLS RWLS is similar to REMS except the Ret
432. s cursor around the point where it touches the active distance cursor In Two Point mode using the two point slope calculation method and Link Return Loss mode the active loss cursor is the one on the active distance cursor selected using the CURSOR SELECT button In Splice Loss and Event Return Loss modes there is one distance cursor and two loss cursors Select the active loss cursor using the CURSOR SELECT button Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for information on selecting the type of slope calculation used in Two Point mode 47 CURSOR SELECT Push this button to select the active cursor You control the active cursor using the cursor control knobs The active cursor is also displayed at higher intensity to differentiate it from the inactive cursor In Preview Two Point and Link Return Loss modes which have two distance cursors the CURSOR SELECT button controls which of two distance cursors is active In Preview Two Point and Link Return Loss modes the CURSOR SELECT button also offers a join cursors function Press and hold the CURSOR SELECT button to move the inactive cursor to the same location as the active cursor In Splice Loss and Event Return Loss modes there is one distance cursor and two loss cursors The CURSOR SELECT button selects which loss cursor is controlled by the LOSS and SLOPE adjustment knobs Pressing and holding the CURSOR SELECT button in Splice Loss and Event Return Loss modes joins the loss
433. s file name FS 90 Permanent disk error FS 280 Access denied FS 281 File not found FS 282 Invalid operation current path FS 283 Different device numbers FS 284 Directory not empty FS 285 Name already exists FS 286 File name already exists FS 287 Invalid label FS 288 Invalid directory path FS 289 File truncation FS 290 No disk to format FS 350 Device error FS 500 Disk removed after customer abort FS 501 Abort after archive disk mount request FS 607 Device abort FS 608 Directory full FS 609 Too many files open F 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix F Error Codes Table F 1 File System Error Codes cont Flash Memory Error Codes The following flash memory errors may occur during the process of loading new Error Code Description FS 745 Disk retry FS 903 Disk change detected FS 906 Mount floppy disk FS 907 Permanent error on device X FS 908 Restore error on file X FS 909 Skip restoring file X FS 910 Timeout error on device X FS 917 Disk change detected software into the TFP2A Table F 2 Flash Memory Error Codes Error Code Description FM 2 FM 3 FM 4 Clear status failed for part s part number list VPP low detected for part s part number list Device timed out on write for part s part number list gt Device timed out on erase for part s part number list FM 5 FM 6 FM 7 Data verify failed for part s part number list Byte write error
434. s to do this The new filtering setting takes effect with the next acquisition The factory default filtering setting is on You can set the power on filtering setting to off using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 31 Chapter 3 Getting Started Entering Operator Settings The Operator Settings menu allows you to enter information that identifies the instrument operator and the fiber This information prints with the waveform when you press the HARD COPY button and is stored with the waveform when it is moved to reference memory or written to mass storage Go to the Operator Settings menu from the acquisition screen by pressing the Change Settings softkey then the Next Menu softkey When you first enter the Operator Settings menu after powering on the instrument Fiber ID is the first pop up window displayed If you exit the menu system then re enter the Operator Settings menu the last pop up window you viewed before exiting the menus is displayed You can enter the following information on the Operator Settings menu Q Fiber ID up to 20 alphanumeric characters identifying the fiber under test Fiber Notes up to 150 characters of fiber notes as optional documentation Operator the operator s name or other identification up to 25 characters The fiber ID notes and operator fields are blank at power on If you load a waveform from mass storage into either
435. s you to magnify any portion or feature on the displayed fiber acquisition FiberMaster s high density acquisition capability offers extended expansion capacity and highly accurate measurements A masking function can be performed automatically or you can set manual masks to eliminate detector saturation caused by large Fresnel reflections improving measurement linearity Automatic and Manual Event Marking The instrument s event marking function automatically locates measures events on the fiber under test that have splice losses above a user specified threshold or you can also mark events manually An event table is compiled displaying the measurements for each marked event You can edit and print out this table plus enter notes and mapping information about each event TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Extended Memory and Storage Capacity FiberMaster offers both a current memory containing the current data acquisition and a reference memory for previously acquired fiber waveform data A dual trace mode makes it possible to display the contents of both current and reference memory simultaneously allowing you to compare a current optical fiber acquisition to historical data 2 Mass storage devices the standard floppy disk drive and optional internal RAM permit unlimited storage of waveform and settings data on both removable and internal media Hardcopy Options 1 You can cho
436. sage displays Press START STOP to acquire new data Press MODULE SELECT to cycle through all installed modules until you reach the desired wavelength Each time you push the button the next available laser source is selected wrapping from the bottom laser to the top The corresponding indicator lights up to show which laser is currently selected After making your selection press the START STOP button A new acquisition is started using the new wavelength The module parameter in the list of settings at the bottom of the acquisition screen shows which laser source is selected The type of module is shown plus the current wavelength For example FS1315 1310SM indicates that the 1310 nm wavelength of a dual wavelength singlemode FS type optical module is currently selected If the active module is different from the one used to acquire the current waveform the module parameter is highlighted until you start a new acquisition The module parameter may include alphabetical characters to indicate the modification level of the module and whether the module has an internal fiber with a non standard core diameter This information is appended to the wavelength Lower case letters indicate the modification level of the module and upper case letters stand for a non standard core diameter For example FS1315 1310SM standard module with standard core diameter FS1315 1310SMaA modified module with non standard core diameter FS
437. screen by specifying the location of the marker Measurements for other events in the table are updated if they are affected by the deletion Remote only Command Syntax DELMARKDIST lt distance gt Command Data distance lt DNPD gt and specifies the location of the marker in distance units kilometers or kilofeet DELMARKNUM Delete an event marker from the Place Event Markers screen by specifying the number of the marker Measurements for other events in the table are updated if they are affected by the deletion Remote only Command Syntax DELMARKNUM lt markernum gt Command Data lt markernum gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the marker number of the event as shown on the Place Event Markers screen Discussion The value of lt markernum gt must be between 1 and the number of events reported in the NUMMARKERS query response 8 108 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control SHOWMARKERS Set the instrument to show or not show the event markers on the display Remote only Command Syntax SHOWMARKERS lt option gt Command Data lt option gt lt DPND gt lt CPD gt and specifies that event markers are off or on Possible values are 0 OFF 1 ON Example s SHOWMARKERS 1 SHOWMARKERS OFF MARKERDIST Return the distance from the front panel to a marker on the Place Event Markers screen Query Syntax MARKERDIST lt markernum gt Query Data lt markernum gt lt DN
438. se width to improve resolution 5 20 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Effects of Masking If one or more reflections in a group of events is masked the splice loss is calculated by combining the loss from all events in the group This is done to exclude any event like signatures that may be produced from waveform reconstruction Figure 5 12 below shows two unmasked reflections individually marked and measured After masking only the first reflection is marked and the combined splice loss is measured as shown in figure 5 13 Normal Density Averages 2048 Event Time 00 00 10 Table Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss A Mass T T T Storage 0 100 200 300 x 22 T 100 Event 1 Dist 0 5 Loss 0 92 dB Event Ret Loss lt 14 8 dB Pulse Width 200 ns 20 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto h Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Change Settings Max Avqs 2 048 8 7 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13108M Ref Index 14776 Event Threshold 0 00 dB File FIG4B WEM Figure 5 12 Event Marking and Unmasked Grouped Events Normal Density Averages 2048 Event Time 00 00 16 Table 0 38 36 Two Point 34 32 Splice a Loss 28 1 63 dB Return Loss 24 22 Mass T T T T Storage 100 0 100 200 300 T Event 1 Dist 0 m 5 Loss 1 59 dB Event Ret Loss
439. second has the hex value 55 and the last byte has the hex value B7 The checksum has the hex value A2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 125 Chapter 8 Remote Control GET WFM GET SET binary encoding Upload a waveform or settings file from the TFP2A to the controller Files are read from current or reference memory depending on which waveform is active Hemote only GPIB only Query Syntax Response Syntax Discussion Example s GET WFM GET SET 0 lt file_data gt lt NL gt lt END gt SET 0 lt file_data gt lt NL gt lt END gt 0 is the header for the IEEE 488 2 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data element It indicates that all data up to but not including the lt NL gt lt END gt is binary waveform file data in TFP2A format 0 and the terminating NL newline character are not parts of the data and should not be stored in the destination file by the controller lt NL gt lt END gt indicates that the waveform file data is followed by an ASCII newline character 0A hex sent with the GPIB EOI line asserted concurrently There is no white space between 0 and file data and between file data and the NL newline character The FILE query can also be used to upload a waveform or settings file from the TFP2A The difference between the FILE query and the GET WFM and GET SET queries is that the FILE query response has a header containing a
440. selects a new letter for the character in the fiber ID being edited The Delete Char softkey deletes the character under the cursor If the cursor is on the next available character position which is blank the character to the left of the cursor is deleted To insert characters to the left of the cursor press Delete Char to move backwards then re enter the character string If you have a keyboard you can type the information Refer to appendix B Keyboard Definitions for a list of key sequences that duplicate front panel controls in the menu system The keyboard also offers more editing functions than those available via front panel controls The new character string takes effect when you exit the field by pressing Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 33 Chapter 3 Getting Started Selecting System Settings The System Settings menu allows you to define general operating characteristics of your instrument such as communications parameters display intensity and system date and time Go into the System Settings menu from the acquisition screen by pressing the Change Settings softkey then press the Next Menu softkey twice Notice that the softkeys are redefined in the menu system The following softkeys appear on the System Settings menu Next Menu go to the next menu From the System Settings menu pressing this Softkey displays the User Defaults menu Next Param display the p
441. sequence guard time 1 50 second units Disable modem test timer DTR change detect time 1 100 second units Disable inactivity timer TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 31 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 12 Hayes Accura Modem Settings for FiberMaster Remote Control cont Modem Setting Controller Remote 536 007 Attempt MNP protocol if V 42 negotiation fails 537 000 B Desired DCE line speed O use highest line speed not exceeding that of last AT command issued 38 020 ii Delay seconds between hang up command and disconnect 43 009 E DCE speed of last carrier established 929600 bps 46 002 B Error control protocol selection 2 LAPM with compression 548 007 Enable feature negotiation between modems 563 000 7 Leased line carrier level adjustment 582 007 Break signalling technique 7 destructive 586 004 S86 000 Cause of last connection failure 95 000 j Error control negotiation message options S97 030 E V 32 automode V 22 probe timing 1 10 second units 108 001 V 32 signal quality requirement 1 low quality 109 062 V 32bis carrier speed selector 110 002 V 32bis and auto rate re negotiation selected Port Select Sequence At power on Fibermaster is enabled by default for GPIB IEEE 488 remote control In order to enable RS 232 remote control send the following sequence of ASCII characters to FiberMaster s RS 232 port REQCTRL lt NL gt NL is the ASCII newline
442. shold Event marking type and event markers Masking type and masks Units Fiber notes Operator Measurement mode Wavelength Distance and loss cursor positions and which are active User adjustments to loss cursors Slope calculation Splice loss Expansion window size and position Acquisition sample density Number of samples per pulse Distance at first data point Distance between data points Number of data points in waveform Waveform data points including high density data Actual number of averages used for acquisition Elapsed acquisition time Time and date the START STOP button was pressed to start the acquisition TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual C 1 Appendix C FiberMaster Data Format Settings only files contain the following Pulse width Maximum range Slope calculation method Refractive index Scattering coefficient Fiber ID Maximum averages Dual trace setting Event threshold Event marking type and event markers Masking type and masks Units Fiber notes Operator Wavelength Notes 1 When data is sent to FiberMaster via XModem it is stored in reference memory 2 When a waveform file is loaded from disk you can choose to load it into current or reference memory Settings only files are loaded into current memory 3 These data formats above do not apply
443. singlemode module 1 28 operational characteristics 1 24 physical characteristics 1 24 Splice Loss mode 4 22 4 28 Index 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Splice Loss softkey in Preview mode 4 4 in Splice Loss mode 4 24 in Two Point mode 4 12 SPLICELOSS 8 104 SPLTSCREEN 8 143 SPLTTEXT 8 143 SRE 8 153 SRE 8 155 Start Batch Copy softkey 7 18 START STOP button 2 5 in Event Return Loss mode 4 43 in Link Return Loss mode 4 34 in Preview mode 4 6 in Splice Loss mode 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 15 start up screen 3 1 3 2 startup screen E 1 start up quick 3 2 STB 8 155 STOP 8 152 Stop Batch Copy softkey 7 18 STORE 8 114 STORE button 2 11 in Event Return Loss mode 4 43 in Link Return Loss mode 4 34 in Preview mode 4 6 in Splice Loss mode 4 26 in Two Point mode 4 15 Switch Drives softkey onthe Copy menu 7 17 onthe Delete menu 7 16 on the Load From Disk menu 7 4 on the Save To Disk menu 7 8 System Settings menu 3 34 3 55 date 3 41 date format 3 42 display color 3 38 display intensity 3 37 file format 3 45 GPIB address 3 50 GPIB status 3 49 hardcopy device 3 47 keyboard translation 3 44 language 3 35 3 36 RS232 baud rate 3 51 RS232 data bits 3 54 RS232 flow control 3 55 RS232 parity 3 52 RS232 stop bits 3 53 sound 3 39 time 3 40 units 3 43 T tail 3 28 5 20 TFP2 1 1 3 45 7 7 TFP2AM 1 1 1 2 1 1 8 78 time 3 40 7 10 TIME 8 81 TRACE 8 78 TRACE 8 81
444. sition of the loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear in the top left corner of the screen Rotate the active loss cursor Use this control to align the loss cursor with the slope of the waveform This adjustment does not affect the event return loss value Any manual adjustment to the position of the loss cursor causes the message User Adjusted Measurement to appear in the top left corner of the screen Switch between overview and expanded view Unless expanded view includes high density data there is no difference in measurement values except that expanded view measurements may be at higher resolution With high density data slight variations in event return loss measurements may occur Using the expansion window and working with high density data are explained in more detail in chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions In overview expand and contract the expansion window vertically In expanded view the vertical SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself vertically When dual trace mode is on in expanded view the vertical SIZE knob operates on both waveforms simultaneously Each waveform expands and contracts around the point where it intersects the active distance cursor In overview expand and contract the expansion window horizontally In expanded view the horizontal SIZE knob expands and contracts the waveform itself horizontally This does not affect distance measurements unless you expand i
445. sity window to control the display intensity for easiest viewing The High setting is suited for viewing the display under bright light the Medium is for normal external lighting and the Low setting is for darker viewing conditions The factory default intensity setting is Medium You can choose a different power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter To set the intensity turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The setting is effective immediately allowing you to see the new intensity level on the screen before leaving the intensity parameter TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 37 Chapter 3 Getting Started Display Color color monitors only To display the Display Color pop up window from the acquisition screen press Change Settings then Next Menu twice to reach the System Settings menu Then press Next Param or Prev Param until the color parameter is highlighted Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Language English Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 18 02 05 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 20 Display Color Pop Up S
446. sk check is complete this prompt appears Insert Disk 1 Remove disk 2 from the drive and insert disk 1 The firmware on disk 1 is copied to the instrument After the file is copied the following prompt appears Insert Disk 2 Remove disk 1 from the drive and insert disk 2 The firmware on disk 2 is copied to the instrument When the load procedure is complete the flash ROM is checked and the instrument starts The start up screen displays Remove disk 2 from the disk drive and store the firmware disk set in a safe place Do not interrupt the load process If you stop the load process before it is complete firmware can be partially copied to flash ROM This can cause the instrument to function improperly or not at all If this happens restart the load process from the beginning If the load process causes errors and does not complete as expected contact your local Tek representative for assistance or in the U S and Canada call 1 800 835 9433 Error messages that might occur while loading firmware are displayed on the instrument s screen These messages appear on the screen in English only For languages other than English check appendix f Error Codes in your local language version of this manual for translated error codes TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual E 3 Appendix E Firmware Features E 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual F Error Codes This appendix lists file system error codes that may appear on the TF
447. splayed and the parameter is set to Manual Use this screen to add delete and move event markers manually When the event marking parameter is set to Auto the Place Event Markers screen is not accessible When you start a new acquisition the manual setting prevents the system from automatically locating events and does not delete any existing markers All manually placed event markers are displayed regardless of the event threshold setting both on the acquisition screen and in the event table Normal Density Averages 20480 Next Time 00 00 31 Place Event Markers 6 453 km Remove Marker Move Marker Change Settings 4 028 km 4 Event 2 Dist 6 458 km Spl Loss 1 45 dB Event Ret Loss 26 8 dB Pulse Width 500 ns 50 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Markinq Manual Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Avqs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13108M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJLI78 WFM Exit Figure 5 7 The Place Event Markers Screen Cursor on Event Marker When event marking is set to Manual and a new acquisition does not extend to all event marker locations the event table indicates there is no data for those markers outside the acquisition range 5 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Entering the Place Event Markers Screen NOTE Enter th
448. ssage previously posted on the display using MESSAGE In this case the msg type is ignored The message is erased when the instrument returns to local control and is redisplayed upon returning to remote control 8 144 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control SOFTKEY Program a softkey to generate a user request event URQ in the Standard Event Status Register and Event Queue if enabled by the Device Event Status Register Available only in REMS remote state without local lockout Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Discussion GSTATUS SOFTKEY lt keynum gt lt text gt lt keynum gt DNPD and specifies which key to program The topmost softkey is Return to Local and is not programmable The remaining softkeys are programmable and specified as 1 through 5 If display status has been enabled using the GSTATUS command softkeys 4 and 5 are not available for programming lt text gt SPD and specifies the text to display on softkey lt keynum gt A null string or a string containing only ASCII blanks 20 hex disables generation of the URQ event for that softkey and erases the text on the softkey When softkey n has been programmed and is then pressed the user request event 4030 n is generated in the Event Queue For example pressing softkey 1 would generate this Event Queue entry 4031 User request Softkey 1 actuation The controller can
449. ster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Status and Error Reporting Queries DESE Return Device Event Status Enable Register settings Query Syntax DESE Response Syntax DESE lt mask gt Response Data masks lt NR1 gt and equals the current value of the Device Event Status Enable Register ESE Return the current contents of the Standard Event Status Enable Register Query Syntax ESE Response Syntax lt mask gt Response Data masks lt NR1 gt and equals the current value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register in the range 0 to 255 ESR Read and clear the Standard Event Status Register and enable entries in the Event Queue to be read and removed by the EVENT and EVMSG queries Query Syntax ESR Response Syntax lt mask gt Response Data lt mask gt lt NR1 gt and equals the value of the Standard Event Status Register Possible responses are in the range from 0 to 255 inclusive EVENT Read and remove a single code from the Event Queue associated with the results of the last read of the Standard Event Status Register ESR Query Syntax EVENT Response Syntax EVENT lt eventcode gt Response Data eventcode lt NR1 gt and specifies the event code TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 151 Chapter 8 Remote Control EVMSG Read and remove a single code and message pair from the Event Queue associated with the results of the last read of the S
450. stic industry standard 212A when dialing at 1200 bps Command echo off Medium speaker volume Speaker off Negotiation of handshake options when modem speeds differ Result codes enabled Result codes displayed as words CONNECT code reports DTE speed Provide basic call progress result codes and connect speed Disable long space extended break signal disconnect Connect as answering modem when auto answering Assume presence of carrier detect signal When amp 5 in effect DCD on at all times Guard tones disabled Auxiliary relay never closed appropriate for RJ 11 phone jack Enable RTS CTS flow control with DTE Select dial up line operation use amp L1 for leased line Enable error correction protocol DSR circuit always on Grant remote digital loopback requests Enable Trellis coding for V 32 connections Select stored profile 0 at power on 000 disable auto answer 001 auto answer after 1 ring Ring count register Use plus sign as escape sequence character ASCII value of carriage return character ASCII value of newline character ASCII value of backspace character Delay seconds between going offhook and dialing Max wait seconds between connection and carrier detect Delay seconds due to comma dial modifier Carrier detect response time 1 10 second units Delay seconds between lost carrier and hang up Duration and spacing of tones in multi frequency tone dialing msec Escape
451. surement mode for the instrument The display and cursors are updated to indicate the selected mode Does not initiate a measurement or cause any measurement data to be stored Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s MEASMODE lt mode gt mode lt CPD gt and specifies the measurement mode for the instrument to enter Possible values are PREVIEW TWOPOINT SPLICELOSS LINKRTNLOSS EVNTRTNLOSS MEASMODE LINK puts the instrument into Link Return Loss mode and updates the display After setting the measurement mode with MEASMODE you can use the CURSOR command to position the cursor s and the MEASURE query to perform a measurement at the current cursor locations For example the message MEASMODE SPL CURSOR ACT 5 MEASURE puts the instrument in Splice Loss mode moves the active distance cursor to 5 kilometers and performs a splice loss measurement and returns the measurement value The response format in this case is the same as for the SPLICELOSS query 8 98 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control EVNTRTNLOSS Enter Event Return Loss mode and return event return loss data for the active waveform Remote only Query Syntax Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion EVNTRTNLOSS lt distance gt distance DNPD and specifies the point on the fiber at which to make the event return loss measurement distance need not spe
452. surement modes scattering coefficient parameter 4 00 Event Marking event threshold and event marking parameters units parameter moved from Waveform Settings to System Settings menu GPIB expansion window commands batch copy mass storage function support for foreign language help 8 00 Module parameter information expanded support for FL series optical modules and non standard core diameter modules 2 km pulse width quick load and quick save mass storage functions GPIB commands EVNTAUTOMARK and IPRNEVENTS maximum averages default changed to 20 480 9 00 RS 232 remote control mass storage filename extensions ASCII versions of PUT SET PUT WFM GET SET and GET WMF remote control commands and queries FILHIGH FILNORM FILSET remote control commands DIRECTORY and TYPEFILE remote control queries Final TFP2 release 1 00 Initial TFP2A release Language and file format parameters added to the System Settings menu and to remote control instruction set MSFORMAT and MSFORMAT Firmware upgrade via floppy disk Quick start Extended long range for FL modules 1 20 Software filtering parameter for FL modules Upgrading Firmware The TFP2A FiberMaster is shipped with firmware installed You can upgrade your instrument s firmware when necessary via floppy disk Contact your local Tek representative or in the U S and Canada call 1 800 TEK WIDE ext 2400 for information about TFP2A firmware releases To install th
453. t 80 3 Masking Off Change Avgs 20 480 214 s Dual Trace Off Module F51315 13105M Settings Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB File LSJU78 WEM Figure 4 1 Preview Mode Overview top and Expanded View bottom TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 3 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Front Panel Controls Preview Mode Event Table Softkey Two Point Softkey Splice Loss Softkey Link Return Loss Softkey Event Return Loss Softkey Return Loss Softkey Exit Return Loss Softkey When in Preview mode use the front panel controls to perform the following functions Exit the acquisition screen and display the event table for the fiber under test Pressing and holding the Event Table softkey for two seconds turns event markers on and off without exiting the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 5 Event Marking for instructions on using event tables This softkey is available in Preview mode when return loss is off refer to the description of the Exit Return Loss softkey below Press the Two Point softkey to exit Preview mode and enter Two Point mode The existing cursor positions are used for two point measurements From Two Point mode press and hold the Two Point softkey for two seconds to exit Two Point mode and enter Preview mode This softkey is available in Preview mode when return loss is off refer to the description ofthe Exit Return Loss softkey below Press
454. t Off Off On Off Normal power up init complete F 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix F Error Codes The following is a list of additional possible error conditions that can be reported during phase 1 power on diagnostics Table F 4 Phase 1 Error Codes Error Code Description D1 0001 D1 0002 Front panel button bus error test failed LED bus error test failed D1 0004 D1 0008 D1 0010 LED error test failed Simple core RAM test failed Simple core RAM test failed vector area D1 0020 D1 0040 D1 0080 Shared RAM test failed Not an error Indicates display interface untested Display interface error D1 0100 D1 0200 D1 0400 Extended RAM test error Extended RAM test refresh error Extended RAM test moving inversion error D1 0800 D1 1000 D1 2000 FPU bus error test failed DUART bus error test failed Parallel interface bus error test failed D1 4000 D1 8000 System status register bus error test failed Bus error occurred for reasons unknown The following is a list of possible error conditions that can be reported during phase 2 power on diagnostics Table F 5 Phase 2 Error Codes Error Code Description D2 00001 D2 00002 Front panel controller register pattern test failed Printer controller registers reset value D2 00004 D2 00008 D2 00010 Printer controller does not count down Printer controller counts down when it sh
455. t info gt 8 104 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Query Data Response Syntax Response Data Discussion lt eventnum gt lt DNPD gt and specifies either the number of the event within the event table or 0 to return information for all events This corresponds to a row number in the event table as it is displayed under local operation of the instrument info CPD and specifies the type of information to return about the event Possible values are DISTANCE return the distance at the event in kilometers or kilofeet SPLICELOSS return the splice loss in dB RETURNLOSS return the event return loss in dB FIBERLOSS return the fiber loss as measured from the previous event in the table in dB km or dB kft TWOPTDIST return the distance as measured from the previous event in the table in km or kft TWOPTLOSS return the two point loss as measured from the previous event in the table in dB LINKLOSS return the link loss as measured from event 1 in dB ALL return all of the above EVNTINFO lt bitmask gt lt data gt lt bitmask gt lt HNRD gt For all types of lt info gt except ALL and FIBERLOSS lt data gt i lt NR2 gt For ALL lt data gt lt distance gt lt spliceloss gt lt returnloss gt lt fiberloss gt lt twoptdist gt lt twoptloss gt lt linkloss gt where all fields in the response are in lt NR2 gt format except for lt fiberloss gt w
456. t panel lockout and returning the instrument to local control Multiline messages fall into three categories Universal messages affect all devices on the bus and include DCL SPE SPD Addressed messages affect all devices on the bus that are addressed to listen and include GTL and SDC 1 Addresses address a device to talk or to listen unaddress all devices to talk or unaddress all devices to listen They include MTA MLA OTA UNT UNL The IEEE 488 1 interface messages are listed in the following tables Table 8 2 Uniline Interface Messages Message Description Attention Notifies the instrument that a data byte sent concurrently is an interface message END End Notifies the instrument or controller that a data byte sent concurrently is the last byte of a message IFC Interface Clear Resets interface functions by unaddressing the instrument to talk or listen and disabling serial poll REN Remote Enable Enables remote programming of instrument settings and controls if the instrument is addressed as a listener while REN is true SRQ Service Request Instrument request for service from the controller TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 5 Chapter 8 Remote Control Table 8 3 Multiline Universal Interface Messages Message Description DCL Device Clear Places the instrument s remote message handler into an idle state ready to receive a new command or query Does not affect any operation in p
457. tance CURSOR knob to select other files in the directory When the cursor is stationary file data is read from the disk and the file specification fields are updated for the highlighted file If the directory is longer than one page use the Next Page and Previous Page Softkeys to scan through the files or scroll through the directory using the distance CURSOR knob Load Save From Disk To Disk Format perete Next FILE SPECIFICATION Menu Drive Type Removable File Type TFP2 File Name HARRISO1 WFM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 4M Removable Floppy READ WRITE HARRISO1 SET HARRISU1 WFM HARRISOZ SET HARRISUZ WFM HARRISO03 WFM HARRISO4 WFM HARRISOS WFM HARRISO6 WFM HARRISO7 WFM MIDLAKO1 WFM MIDLAKO2 WFM MIDLAKO3 WFM MIDLAKO4 WFM ife Previous Page Select filename w CURSOR knob press Load softkey Figure 7 1 Load from Disk Menu Single Drive Instrument TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 3 Chapter 7 Mass Storage If your instrument has both internal RAM and a floppy disk drive an additional softkey on this menu allows you to select which drive to use for the load operation figure 7 2 The directory lists the contents of the currently active drive
458. tandard Event Status Register ESR Query Syntax EVMSG Response Syntax EVMSG lt eventcode gt lt eventmsg gt Response Data lt eventcode gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the event code lt eventmsg gt lt SRD gt and specifies the event message SRE Return the contents of the Service Request Enable Register Query Syntax SRE Response Syntax lt mask gt Response Data masks lt NR1 gt and equals the current value of the Service Request Enable Register STB Read the status byte and Master Summary Status bit MSS is reported on bit 6 Query Syntax STB Response Syntax lt statusbyte gt Response Data lt statusbyte gt lt NR1 gt and specifies the current value of the status byte 8 152 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Device Synchronization Commands and Query Cause the instrument generate the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register and log event 402 in the Event Queue if enabled in the DESER Command Syntax Functions as a Provided for 488 2 compatibility Command Syntax WAI Place a 1 in the instrument s Output Queue Query Syntax OPC Response Syntax 1 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 153 Chapter 8 Remote Control Selftest Queries TST Perform instrument self tests Remote only Query Syntax TST Response Syntax test result Res
459. ted as follows DISTANCE 2 947 km SPLICELOSS 0 13 dB RETURNLOSS 30 5 dB FIBERLOSS 0 354 dB km TWOPTDIST 4 360 km TWOPTLOSS 1 68 dB LINKLOSS 4 59 dB Query response for event return loss for event 3 EVNTINFO 3 RETURNLOSS EVNTINFO H0000 32 4 Query response for event return loss for event 4 EVNTINFO 4 RETURNLOSS EVNTINFO H0003 0 0 This indicates that event 4 is a non reflective event and return loss does not apply Use an lt eventnums gt of 0 to return all information for all events in the table For example to return the distance of all events 8 106 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control EVNTMARKING EVENTINFO 0 DISTANCE EVENTINFO H0000 0 00 H0000 2 947 H0000 3 45 H0000 6 324 H0000 10 735 Note that the bitmask is returned with each distance value To return the entire event table all information fields for all events EVENTINFO 0 ALL EVNTINFO H0008 0 0 1 0 31 5 0 354E 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 H0000 2 947 0 13 30 5 0 354E 00 4 360 1 68 4 59 lt event 3 info gt lt event 4 info gt H0000 10 735 5 5 33 5 0 354E 00 1 0 0 354 10 7 Determine whether automatic or manual event marking has been selected for the active waveform Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data EVNTNOTES EVNTMARKING EVNTMARKING marking type marking type lt CRD gt Possible values are AUTOMATIC MANUAL Retrieve notes for a particular event from the ev
460. tem NOTE If you are using a keyboard to enter data on FiberMaster s configuration menus refer to appendix B Keyboard Definitions for a list of the key sequences that duplicate front panel controls For the parameters that require character entry the keyboard offers additional editing functions not available via the front panel controls 3 8 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Selecting Waveform Settings Press the Change Settings softkey to enter the configuration menus The Waveform Settings menu screen appears showing the first pop up selection window Pulse Width Notice that the softkeys are redefined These keys let you move around within the menu system as follows Next Menu go to the next menu For example when working on the Waveform Settings menu pressing the Next Menu softkey displays the Operator Settings menu Next Param go to the next pop up selection window For example after setting the pulse width press this softkey to display the Maximum Range pop up window The highlighted bar on the Waveform Settings menu moves to indicate the current parameter Prev Param go back to the previous parameter s pop up selection window Exit return to the acquisition screen The Next Menu Next Param and Prev Param softkeys repeat when held down When you first enter the menu system after powering on the instrument the Pulse Width parameter on the Waveform Settings menu is the first pop up s
461. ter power on each time you enter the mass storage menus the active drive type is the one last used After you have selected the file to delete press the Delete softkey A message displays to confirm the deletion and two softkeys are provided Yes and No Pressing Yes deletes the file and returns to the Delete menu Pressing No returns to the Delete menu without deleting the file Exiting the Delete Menu Press the Next Menu softkey to go to the Load from Disk menu single drive instruments or the Copy menu dual drive instruments Press Exit to return to the acquisition screen 7 16 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Copy The Copy menu is available only if your instrument is configured with internal RAM in addition to a floppy disk drive The Copy menu allows you to copy files from the active drive to the inactive drive From the acquisition screen display the Copy menu by pressing the Mass Storage softkey then the Next Menu softkey four times Load Save From Disk To Disk FILE SPECIFICATION Drive Type Removable Format Delete File Type TFP2 Switch Drives File HARRISO1 WFNM 14 21 44 06 07 94 25 kbytes Notes PRIMARY LINE TO PILOT BUTTE INN BENT CONDUIT AT NEWPORT JUNCTION HOUSE BUT NO PROBLEMS OBSERVED Fiber ID DESCHUTES JUNC 25 Operator AUSTIN HILL Volume fibermaster 1305k 88 left 1 44 Removable Floppy READ
462. ters The external plotters produce only waveform plots If you select a plotter as the hardcopy device and press the HARD COPY button when any display other than an acquisition screen is current a beep sounds and the plotter does not produce a plot Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for instructions on selecting the hardcopy device 5 10 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 5 Event Marking Event Notes From the Event Table screen press the Event Notes softkey to display notes or mapping information for each marked event If no notes have been entered yet the Screen is blank with the event numbers listed in the left hand column Event Table Event Notes SE corner of 5th amp Elm 7 002 SE corner of 6th amp Elm SE comer of 7th amp Elm SE comer of Sth amp Elm Figure 5 5 Event Notes The softkeys on the Event Notes screen work as follows Event Table return to the Event Table screen The same event highlighted on the Event Notes screen is highlighted on the event table On the Event Table screen the top softkey becomes Event Notes so you can press this softkey to switch between the Event Table and Event Notes screens Next Page and Prev Page if there are more notes than fit on one page use the Next Page and Prev Page softkeys to scan through the notes or scroll through them using the CURSOR knob Edit Notes go to a second Event Notes screen where you can enter new notes
463. ters between two devices Greater distances can be achieved depending on the baud rate cable quality and ambient conditions The use of modems allows for locating the controller 8 48 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control and FiberMaster at greater distances from one another by using the telephone lines for communication Port Selection The GPIB interface goes online after power on when the start up screen appears and becomes ready to receive commands from a controller In contrast a special sequence of characters called a port select sequence must be received by FiberMaster s RS 232 interface in order for RS 232 control to be enabled Remote Local Changes The method of making transitions between various remote and local states local remote remote with local lockout differs between the GPIB and RS 232 interfaces The GPIB interface uses dedicated interface messages as defined in IEEE 488 1 RS 232 remote control uses ASCII commands LOCAL REMOTE and REMLOCK to achieve remote local state changes Message Exchange Protocol Query Errors GPIB uses a half duplex protocol for exchanging messages between devices 488 2 message exchange protocol Since RS 232 remote control is supported only in full duplex configuration 488 2 message exchange protocol does not apply Status Reporting The GPIB SRQ message is not emulated under FiberMaster RS 232 remote control Compare figures 8 3 GPIB and 8 5
464. the Splice Loss softkey to exit Preview mode and enter Splice Loss mode The existing active distance cursor location is used for splice loss calculations To return to Preview mode press and hold the Splice Loss softkey for two seconds This softkey is available in Preview mode when return loss is on refer to the description of the Return Loss softkey below Press the Link Return Loss softkey to exit Preview mode and enter Link Return Loss mode The existing cursor positions are used for link return loss measurements To return to Preview mode press and hold the Link Return Loss softkey for two seconds This softkey is available in Preview mode when return loss is on refer to the description of the Return Loss softkey below Press the Event Return Loss Softkey to exit Preview mode and enter Event Return Loss mode The existing active distance cursor position is used for event return loss measurements To return to Preview mode press and hold the Event Return Loss softkey for two seconds This softkey is available only when return loss is off Pressing Return Loss turns the return loss measurement modes on When return loss is on the Two Point softkey is replaced by the Link Return Loss softkey and the Splice Loss softkey is replaced by the Event Return Loss softkey The Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Exit Return Loss softkey Pressing Exit Return Loss turns off the return loss modes the softkeys revert to Two Point and Splice Loss
465. the Waveform Settings menu Waveform Operator System User Remote Settings Settings Settings Defaults Next Menu Next Param 40 Slope Calculation wo Point Tum the CURSOR knob to change the selection pong Pulse Width 500 ns 50 Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 10 0 km Scatter Coefficient 82 3 Masking Off Exit Avgs 20 480 21 4 s Dual Trace Off Module F31315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LSJU78 WFM Figure 3 7 Slope Calculation Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Slope Calculation window to select the type of slope loss per distance unit calculation done in Two Point Mode The Two Point slope setting calculates the average slope using the two point loss and two point distance values The LSA setting fits a straight line to the data between two distance cursors using the least squares average LSA algorithm Use the LSA slope calculation method for measuring fiber loss on featureless sections of backscatter and the two point method for most other two point measurements Change the slope calculation by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new slope calculation takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys If the instrument was in Two Point mode
466. the current waveform and associated instrument settings into a disk file You can also save instrument settings only From the acquisition screen display the Save to Disk menu by pressing the Mass Storage softkey then press the Next Menu softkey once All save functions save data as unformatted binary data only The data is saved in MS DOS compatible files You can select one of two file formats to use when waveforms are saved to disk The formats are TFP2 and CFF common file format TFP2 format is the one used by previous versions of the FiberMaster OTDR It allows TFP2A waveforms to be backward compatible with the TFP2 CFF is the common file format used by the TFP2A and other newer Tektronix OTDR related products produced in 1995 and after CFF waveform files can be loaded viewed and measured using the TFP2A or other Tektronix OTDR related products that read and write CFF data regardless of which instrument was used to acquire the data Select the file format on the System Settings menu All subsequent mass storage save operations will use the selected file format The currently selected file format which will be used for the next save operation is displayed below the drive type when you enter the Save to Disk menu If you want to change the file format before saving the waveform exit the mass storage system and press the Change Settings softkey to go to the menu system Refer to chapter 3 Getting Started for instructions on how
467. the menu press Next Param or Prev Param until the Language parameter is highlighted on the menu Waveform Operator User Settings Settings Defaults SYSTEM Intensity Medium Color Color Sound On Time 17 52 40 Date 6 16 1993 Wednesday Date Format M D Y Units Metric Keyboard USA File Format TFP2 HARD COPY Hard Copy Internal Printer GPIB Status Online Address 7 RS232 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 0 Data Bits 8 Flow Control XON XOFF Figure 3 18 Language Pop Up Selection Window System Settings Menu Use the Language window to select the new language used by the instrument When you change languages in most cases the acquisition screen help screens menus and softkey labels appear in the new language To change the language turn the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new language setting takes effect when you exit the parameter by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys A prompt appears to confirm the change to the new language Changing to a new language requires the instrument to be restarted When you confirm the new language selection the instrument automatically restarts using a quick start no diagnostics are performed The start up screen reappears in the selected language The new language is saved as the power on default If you cancel the new
468. the next parameter on the Operator Settings menu For example after entering the fiber ID press this softkey to save the new fiber ID and display the Fiber Notes pop up window The highlighting bar on the menu moves to indicate the current parameter Prev Param save the current parameter and display the pop up window for the previous parameter on the Operator Settings menu Next Char used for character entry as described below Delete Char used to correct characters as described below Exit save the current operator settings parameter and return to the acquisition Screen All the softkeys except for Exit repeat when held down Enter data in each field as described for the fiber ID 1 When you select the field to enter or edit the cursor is on the next available character position To enter a character turn the CURSOR knob until the desired character is highlighted in the character set shown The letter under the cursor in the fiber ID changes to correspond with the highlighted letter in the character set 2 Press the Next Char softkey to accept the selected letter The cursor advances to the next available character Press the CURSOR SELECT button to move the character selecting cursor to the fiber ID You can then turn the CURSOR knob to go directly to the character in the fiber ID that you wish to edit Pressing CURSOR SELECT again moves the character selecting cursor back to the character set and turning the CURSOR knob
469. the realtime clock calendar are saved with the waveform If the root file name is longer than eight characters only the first eight are used TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 133 Chapter 8 Remote Control Mass Storage Queries DIRECTORY Obtain a list of file names stored on the device selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Query Syntax Response Syntax Response Data Example s Discussion DIRECTORY DIRECTORY lt list gt lt list gt SRD and consists of a quoted string that lists name creation date and size in bytes of each file on the current drive Query DIRECTORY Response TRACE DAT 8 22 93 2345 lt NL gt TEST C 4 01 94 7362 lt NL gt TEST OBJ 8 21 93 97681 lt NL gt FIBERO7 SET 4 02 94 1294 lt NL gt LINK WFM 7 19 94 32984 lt NL gt NL indicates an ASCII newline within the lt SRD gt response DIRECTORY returns a list of all file names stored on the selected device including FiberMaster waveform files WFM extension FiberMaster settings files SET extension and non FiberMaster files The TYPEFILE query can be used to determine whether a particular file is a waveform or settings file 8 134 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control DIRSET DIRWFM Obtain a list of file names stored on the device selected by the DRIVESELECT command Remote only Query Syntax DIRSET for settings files DIRWFM for waveform f
470. the right hand point of the mask then move the active cursor to the left hand point When you move the active cursor left the inactive cursor stays stationary and you can adjust the mask size Move a mask to the left in the same way selecting the right hand distance cursor as the active cursor 6 18 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Adding a Mask Press Next Mask to position the distance cursors at the nearest existing mask Press the Add Mask softkey The new mask is added next to the existing one on the right side unless the existing mask is at the end of the waveform then the new mask is added to the left If you are working in overview the new mask is one twentieth the width of the waveform If you are in expanded view the new mask is one pulsewidth wide Move the new mask to another location and resize it using the distance CURSOR knob Adjusting Mask Width 1 Removing a Mask Adjust mask width by pressing Next Mask to place the distance cursors on the mask to be adjusted Use the distance CURSOR knob to move the active distance cursor to the desired position The mask point at the inactive distance cursor remains stationary as you move the active cursor To adjust the opposite side of the mask press the CURSOR SELECT button to select the other distance cursor Remove a mask by selecting the mask using the Next Mask softkey then pressing the Remove Mask softkey
471. tic event return loss measurements or if you make further manual adjustments in Event Return Loss mode these changes are retained when you re enter Splice Loss mode Measurements you make in any other mode do not affect manual splice loss measurements and vice versa Splice Loss and Event Marking In Splice Loss mode when event marking is turned on and you move the distance cursor anywhere onto an event marker or an event the cursor automatically snaps to the location of the event You can then move the cursor on the event If you then press the Splice Loss softkey the cursor snaps onto the event again TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 23 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements Front Panel Controls Splice Loss Mode Event Table Softkey Two Point Softkey Splice Loss Softkey Return Loss Softkey Mass Storage Softkey Change Settings Softkey When in Splice Loss mode use the front panel controls to perform the following functions Make manual adjustments to splice loss measurements using the CURSOR SELECT vertical Loss and slope Loss knobs as described below for each of these controls Exit the acquisition screen and display the event table for the fiber under test Pressing and holding the Event Table softkey for two seconds turns event markers on and off without exiting the acquisition screen Refer to chapter 5 Event Marking for instructions on using event tables Exit Splice Loss mode and
472. till required If it is omitted the PUT WFM and PUT SET commands generate an error PUT SET PUT WFM ASCII encoding NOTE This form of the PUT SET and PUT WFM commands is intended for RS 232 remote control applications when eight bit binary data cannot be handled Download a waveform or settings file that is in TFP2A mass storage format from the controller to the instrument Waveform files are loaded into current or reference memory depending on which waveform is active Settings files are always loaded into current memory Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Discussion Example s PUT SET lt filename gt 0 lt data gt lt NL gt PUT WFM lt filename gt 0 lt data gt lt NL gt filename SPD a quoted string enclosing the filename to be stored in the TFP2A s source parameter 0 is the header for the IEEE 488 2 Arbitrary Block Program data element and indicates that all the data up to but not including the NL is waveform or settings data Do not include white space between 0 and data and between data and the NL newline character Each eight bit byte of waveform data in data is encoded as two hexadecimal digits For example the data sent to FiberMaster when an actual waveform data byte has value 2E hex is the digit 2 32 hex followed by the digit E 45 hex The most significant digit 32 hex is sent first The commands WFMSEL REF PUT WFM test wfm Z0FEA7 2C NL
473. tion 1S Mainframe with FMTAP Accessories Table A 2 Standard Accessories Description Part Number Quantity Power cord standard 161 0104 00 1 User manual 070 9189 xx 1 Quick reference card 063 2292 xx 1 Soft case 016 1037 01 1 Front panel cover 200 3566 00 1 Option port cover 333 3572 00 1 Plug in spacer 386 5950 00 1 Alcohol packs App note 006 8134 00 1 Rackmount instruction sheet 063 1691 xx 1 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Appendix A Accessories and Options Table A 3 Optional Accessories Nomenclature Part or Option Number Jumpers all combinations Keyboard adapter cable Keyboard External plotter RS 232C cable GPIB cable 2 meter Hard shell transit case Module level service manual FiberMaster Trace Analysis Pkg FiberMaster utilities disk TOP130 LED source 850 1300 nm w ST connector TOP140 laser source 1310 nm w FC connector TOP150 laser source 1550 nm w FC connector TOP200 optical power meter 850 1300 1550 nm w ST connector TOP300 visual fault finder 635 nm w FC connector TOP160 laser source 1310 1550 nm w FC connector French User Manual German User Manual Spanish User Manual French Quick Reference Card German Quick Reference Card Spanish Quick Reference Card 174 2356 01 118 7637 00 HC100 or HC100 Option 03 012 1384 00 012 0991 00 016 1036 00 070 9188 xx FMTAP 063 1493 xx 2T 3T 4T 5T er 7T 070 9428 XX 070 9429 XX 070 9430 XX 0
474. tion USA File Format TFP2 Hard Copy Device Internal Printer Internal Printer Restore All R5232 Baud Rate 9600 9600 R5232 Parity None None Restore RS232 Stop Bits 1 0 1 0 Factory RS232 Data Bits 8 8 RS232 Flow Control XON XOFF XON XOFF Exit Turn the CURSOR KNOE to scroll down for next page Figure 3 37 User Defaults Menu Page 2 The softkeys perform the following functions Next Menu go to the Remote menu Save Param save the current setting of the highlighted parameter as the power on default Save All save the current settings of all the parameters listed on the User Defaults menu as power on defaults Note that this saves the current settings of the five module dependent settings pulse width maximum range refractive index scattering coefficient and masking type as defaults for the active laser source and saves the active laser source as the power on default Restore All restore settings for all the parameters listed to their current power on default values Restore Factory restore settings for all parameters listed to their factory defaults TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 57 Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE The module dependent settings for each laser source in the instrument are reset when Restore All and Restore Factory are pressed not just the settings for the currently selected module These settings include the pulse width maximum range refractive index scatt
475. tions SPLTSCREEN and SPLTTEXT are unavailable Binary Data Since the GPIB bus is a parallel interface with eight dedicated data lines no special provision must be made for handling eight bit binary data However for the serial RS 232 interface the number of data bits must be set to 8 on both the FiberMaster and the controller The method of flow control used should be either RTS CTS or DTR DSR and not XON XOFF Command Set A small number of commands and queries in the TFP2A command set are designated GPIB only or RS 232 only meaning that they are only valid under the interface specified These commands are indicated as such both on the tables listing the commands and in the command descriptions 8 50 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Differences in Command Execution All FiberMaster remote control commands that are allowed from both GPIB and RS 232 interfaces with the following exceptions have the same effect regardless of the interface on with they are received The exceptions are listed below RST reset command Under GPIB remote control FiberMaster RS 232 parameters are reset to factory defaults Under RS 232 remote control these parameters are not changed TST selftest query Under GPIB remote control FiberMaster includes a test of the RS 232 interface as part of the execution of the TST query Under RS 232 remote control this test is not run ESE event sta
476. tive events and are marked as events Both splice loss and return loss measurements are made on nonreflective gains Event Markers and High Density Data When high density data is acquired the measurements at any markers located within the high density data are remeasured using the high density data although the locations of the markers the distance measurement on the event table are determined using normal density data The event table indicates which markers fall within high density data Grouped Events In certain cases two or more events may be closer together than the resolving power of the event marking method can measure accurately Events may not be separated by measurable backscatter or by just a few data samples In these cases for FM FS and FG series optical modules FiberMaster marks the first event in the group and then any reflections that occur after the first event Normal Density Averages 1024 Event Time 00 00 08 Table 1 305 km Two Point Splice Loss Return Loss A A 2 4 Mass Storage 1 200 T 1 600 2 000 fo oo Event 3 Dist 1 305 km Spl Loss 1 78 dB Event Ret Loss 33 5 dB Maximum Range 50 0 km Max Avgs 1 024 7 5 s Ref Index 1 4680 Pulse Width 2000 ns 200 m Slope Calc Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace Off Event Threshold 0 00 dB Event Marking Auto Masking Off Module F 1315 131
477. to 70 C non operating Humidity Up to 90 relative humidity 5 0 Weight 4 4 lbs lt 2 kg Dimensions 1 75 in 4 5 cm by 5 5 in 14 0 cm by 17 5 in 44 5 cm Dynamic range specifications are based on 32 000 averages Actual averaging times depend on instrument settings For 3 Sigma values subtract 2 4 dB from SNR 1 values Dynamic range SNR 1 is the one way difference between the extrapolated backscatter level at the start of the fiber and the RMS noise level 3 Dynamic range end detection is the one way difference between the top of a 4 Fresnel reflection at the start of the fiber and the 3 Sigma 99 5 level of the noise 4 Dead zone loss measurement is the minimum distance after any reflective event on the display to measure loss to within 0 5 dB of backscatter 5 Dead zone event two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection 1 28 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FS1315 Singlemode Optical Module Table 1 12 FS1315 Singlemode Optical Module Dynamic Range Dead Zone Pulse End Loss Width SNR 1 dB Detect dB Meas m Event m 10 us 1000 m 29 5 26 5 38 0 36 0 1080 1050 4000 ns 400 m 27 5 24 5 38 0 36 0 480 420 2000 ns 200 m 23 5 20 5 38 0 36 0 240 220 1000 ns 100 m 22 0 19 0 38 0
478. to acquire and process the waveform data The maximum number of averages possible is 16 777 216 The minimum is 256 The factory default number of averages is 20 480 You can change the power on default using the User Defaults menu described later in this chapter 3 14 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started NOTE The time shown is for normal density data a high density acquisition would take approximately three to five times longer Select the number of averages using the CURSOR knob Turning the knob clockwise increases the number in minimum increments of 256 Turning the knob counterclockwise decreases the number If you have the optional keyboard you can use the cursor keys to do this The new setting is saved when you exit the Maximum Averages window by pressing one of the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkeys If the number of averages for an acquisition in progress is greater than the new setting the acquisition stops Otherwise acquisition continues until the new maximum number of averages is reached If no acquisition is in progress the new setting takes effect with the next acquisition On the acquisition screen the actual number of averages and the elapsed acquisition time are shown at the top of the screen These numbers are saved with the waveform when it is written to reference memory or mass storage TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 3 15 Chapter 3 Getting Started
479. to press EXPAND again to return to overview before going to the next step Press CURSOR SELECT to switch active cursors TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 35 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 4 Place the second cursor at the link s end reflection expanding the view if necessary The fiber segment used for the measurement is shaded as shown in these examples An automatic link return loss measurement is made The length of the link being measured is displayed near the waveform and the link return loss is shown in the upper right hand corner of the screen In this example the return loss of the fiber link shown is 27 1 dB Normal Density Averages 1024 Event Time 00 00 05 Link Retum Loss 27 1 dB Table 10 393 km 3 000 km Link Return Loss Exit Return Loss Mass Storage Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Two Point Event Marking Auto Maximum Range 25 0 km Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Masking Off Avqs 1 024 5 3 s Dual Trace Off Module F 1315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 30 dB File LINK 100 WEM Change Settings Figure 4 18 Automatic Link Return Loss Measurement Placing the Second Cursor at the End of the Link 4 36 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 5 To make manual adjustments to automatic measurements press CURSOR SELECT to activate
480. to select the file format to be used for saving waveform files When settings only are saved the TFP2 file format is used regardless of the File Format selection on the System Settings menu File Specifications When you enter the Save to Disk menu the file specification area of the screen shows the active drive the file format that will be used for saving waveforms TFP2 or CFF and the file name of the currently selected file Select the drive type dual drive instruments only and enter the file name for the current save operation as follows TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 7 7 Chapter 7 Mass Storage Select the Drive If your instrument is equipped with both a fixed internal RAM drive and a floppy disk drive you can select which drive to use for the save operation Select the drive by pressing the Switch Drives softkey to display the directory of the other drive see figure 7 4 The current drive is indicated in the drive type field in the file specification area of the display Fixed refers to the internal RAM Removable refers to the front panel floppy disk drive This device is then used for the next save operation Load Save From Disk Disk Format Delete Copy Next FILE SPECIFICATIO Menu P Tum the CURSOR knob to pick a character in the list Press CURSOR SELECT to choose which character to edit Switch Drives Save EIBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ ra wes 0123456789 G2 95 amp
481. ttings Menu The scattering coefficient represents the amount of backscatter reflected by a particular fiber Use the scattering coefficient to account for differences between fibers for more accurate return loss measurements The scattering coefficient is a characteristic of the fiber under test and similar to the refractive index can vary from fiber to fiber It is a negative number indicating the dB level of the backscattered light relative to the light entering the fiber The scattering coefficient setting applies only to return loss measurements and has no effect on measurements in any of the other modes The scattering coefficient is based on a pulse width of 1 nanosecond and is automatically adjusted to correspond to the pulse width used in acquiring the waveform being measured Use the Scattering Coefficient window to specify the scattering coefficient of the fiber under test You can set this number to any value from 100 to 40 dB inclusive Turn the CURSOR knob to increase and decrease the scattering coefficient in increments of the least significant digit one tenth dB You can also use the optional keyboard to 3 20 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started enter the scattering coefficient As you type in digits from the keyboard they are shifted to the left The scattering coefficient for a particular fiber can usually be obtained from the fiber manufacturer If you do not know the scattering coe
482. ttings gt Response Data lt instrument settings gt concatenated settings commands separated by semicolons Discussion Response is a directly resendable set of GPIB commands separated by semicolons which sets the instrument to its current settings Settings include MODSELECT Select module AVERAGES Select number of averages used for acquisition BAUDRATE Set serial port baud rate CALCSLOPE Select slope calculation method ENCDG Specify ASCII or binary waveform encoding EVNTMARKING Select automatic or manual event marking EVNTTHRESH Set event marking threshold FIBERID Specify fiber ID string FIBERNOTES Specify fiber notes string FLOW Set RS232 method of flow control HCTYPE Select hardcopy data format HEADER Enable disable headers MASKSET Select masking option NCHARBITS Specify serial port bits per character NSTOPBITS Specify serial port number of stop bits OPERATOR Specify operator string PARITY Specify serial port parity PULSRNG Select pulse width and range settings REFINDEX Set refractive index TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 147 Chapter 8 Remote Control SCATTERCOEFF Set scattering coefficient SHOWMARKER Enable disable display of event markers TRACE Select double or single trace display UNITS Select distance measurement units WFMSELECT Select active waveform 8 148 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Reset and Stop Commands RST Reset instrument setting
483. tus enable SRE service request enable Under GPIB remote control these commands enable certain events to generate a service request Service requests are not emulated under RS 232 remote control so these commands function as no ops STB status byte query The GPIB interface conforms to IEEE 488 2 requirements for the implementation of this query Under RS 232 remote control the MAV message available bit in the status byte is always 0 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 51 Chapter 8 Remote Control RS 232 Emulation of IEEE 488 1 Interface Messages The 488 1 interface messages that are recognized or generated by FiberMaster under GPIB remote control are listed below ACG Addressed command group Attention DAB Data byte DAC Data accepted DAV Data valid DCL Device clear END End of message GTL Go to local LAG Listen address group LLO Local lockout MLA My listen address MTA My talk address NUL Null byte OTA Other talk address PCG Primary address group REN Remote enable RFD Ready for data RQS Request service SDC Selected device clear SPD Serial poll disable SPE Serial poll enable SRQ Service request TAG Talk address group UCG Universal command group UNL Unlisten UNT Untalk The following are not emulated under the RS 232 interface They are GPIB addressing messages and do not apply to RS 232 point to point communications ACG LAG MLA MTA OTA PCG TAG UCG UNL UNT The follow
484. two point spatial resolution is the minimum distance after any reflection necessary to determine accurately the distance to another event based on a minimum recover of 1 5 dB down from the top of the first reflection TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 1 37 Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection Cleaning and Maintenance FiberMaster s cabinet minimizes dust accumulation inside the instrument Never operate the OTDR without the cabinet installed When storing or transporting the instrument make sure the front cover is on to protect the front panel and display from dust and damage Inspect and clean your FiberMaster OTDR as often as operating conditions require For example under average conditions laboratory use inspect and clean your instrument after every 1000 hours of operation When using FiberMaster extensively in the field inspect and clean it after every 500 hours of operation Dirt acts as a thermal insulator and can cause overheating and component breakdown It also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause instrument failure especially under high humidity conditions External inspection and cleaning procedures are included in this section Internal inspection and cleaning are beyond the scope of the user manual and are included in the FiberMaster Module Level Service Manual Refer to this manual for assembly and disassembly procedures and instructions on inspecting and cleaning the interior of the instrument
485. type parameter on the Waveform Settings menu is set to Off and new data is acquired Masks are replaced under the following circumstances When you change the masking type parameter on the Waveform Settings menu to one of the Auto settings masks are recalculated with each new acquisition When the masking type parameter on the Waveform Settings menu is set to one of the Manual settings masks are replaced when you switch optical modules by the masks last used with the new module For example when you switch from 1300 nm MM to 1310 nm SM the set of masks last used with the singlemode module is recalled Manual masks are not replaced when switching optical modules in the same plug in unit 6 20 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 6 Advanced Operating Functions Exiting the Place Manual Masks Screen Press Change Settings to return to the Waveform Settings screen or Exit to return to the acquisition screen When you set manual masks a new acquisition is required in order to see the effects of the changes When you press the Next Param Prev Param Next Menu or Exit softkey to exit the masking type parameter the masking type setting at the bottom of the screen is highlighted to indicate that the current masking data does not match the acquisition data Press START STOP to acquire new data using the new masking parameters The highlighting is cleared because the masks now correspond to the waveform TFP2A
486. u how to configure and operate FiberMaster in remote mode The instrument can be controlled through the IEEE 488 1 general purpose interface bus GPIB or the RS 232 serial interface The command language used is the same for both physical interfaces The following sections describe the GPIB and RS 232 interfaces and the second half of the chapter includes a list of remote control commands and queries GPIB System The GPIB interface is designed in compliance with IEEE standards 488 1 and 488 2 The bus uses eight data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Information is transferred bit parallel by an asynchronous handshake This allows instruments with different transfer rates to operate together if they conform to the handshake state diagrams and other protocols defined in the IEEE standard You can connect a GPIB system in either a star or linear configuration see figure 8 1 or a combination of the two When designing the system you must observe the following rules 1 No more than 15 devices can be connected to a single GPIB 2 The length of all cable used must be less than or equal to two meters times the number of devices not to exceed a maximum of 20 meters total For example use a maximum cable length of six meters for a system that includes three devices The maximum separation between any two devices in a system is four meters 3252 A B C
487. uery Syntax REMLOCK Response Syntax REMLOCK lt option gt Response Data option lt NR1 gt 0 instrument is not in RWLS 1 instrument is in RWLS TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 71 Chapter 8 Remote Control REMOTE Determines if instrument is in remote control REMS Query Syntax REMOTE Response Syntax REMOTE option Response Data option lt NR1 gt 0 instrument is not in REMS 1 instrument is in REMS 8 72 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Module Independent Settings Commands NOTE Commands that change instrument settings do not save the new settings as power on defaults To save instrument settings use the SET or LRN query These queries both generate response data in the form of resendable commands that you can use to set the instrument back to its current configuration AVERAGES Select the number of sampling acquisitions the instrument averages before stopping an acquisition Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Factory Default Discussion CALCSLOPE AVERAGES lt numavg gt lt numavg gt lt DNPD gt and specifies the number of averages If not a positive multiple of 256 will be set to the nearest positive multiple of 256 AVE 500 adjusted to 512 by the instrument 1024 averages The new number of averages takes effect immediately and is used for the next acquisition The command is executed even if the refer
488. uisition module FS1315 07 1310 nm SM long range acquisition module FL1300 08 1310 1550 nm SM long range acquisition module FL1315 09 1550 nm SM long range acquisition module FL1500 10 1310 nm SM general purpose acquisition module FG1300 11 1310 1550 nm SM general purpose acquisition module FG1315 30 Biconic connector SM 119 4515 00 31 FC PC connector SM 119 4516 00 32 DA PC connector SM 119 4514 00 33 SMA 905 906 connector SM 119 4557 00 34 ST PC connector SM 119 4513 00 35 DIN PC 47256 connector SM 119 4546 00 36 Diamond 3 5 connector SM 119 4558 00 37 Diamond 2 5 connector SM 119 4556 00 38 SC PC connector SM 119 4518 00 39 SMA 2 5 connector SM 119 4517 00 41 FC APC connector SM 119 5115 00 42 SC APC connector SM 119 5116 00 43 E 2000 APC connector SM 119 5164 00 44 ST APC connector SM 119 5888 00 45 DIN APC connector SM 119 5887 00 Use when ordering optics modules separately for a previously purchased mainframe Angle polish connectors options 41 through 45 cannot be interchanged with any of the option 2x or 3x adapters able A 7 Option Accessories Description Part Number Quantity Thermal print paper 006 7682 00 1 Thermal print paper case 006 7682 20 50 Paper holders 386 5947 01 2 3 1 2 diskette 1 44 MB 119 3910 00 1 Power cord option A1 161 0104 06 1 Power cord option A2 161 0104 07 1 Power cord option A3 161 0104 05 1 Power cord option A4 161 0134 00 1 Power cord
489. urn the CURSOR knob to choose either No or Yes This parameter is available only when your instrument is equipped with an internal printer Running the Selected Tests Run the selected tests by pressing the Start Tests softkey on the Run Diagnostics menu or by pressing the START STOP button on the front panel When the tests are complete each selected test is shown as Tested in the Status column on the menu The Test Result column displays either or ERROR If errors were detected use the More Info function to read more information on the test results Exiting the Diagnostics Menus To exit the diagnostics menus and return to the previous display press the Exit softkey TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual D 3 Appendix D Diagnostics Menus D 4 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Firmware Features FiberMaster firmware is periodically updated to add new features and enhancements This user manual applies to the firmware version noted on the title page of the manual but can also be used with all TFP2A TFP2 instruments with any prior firmware version The differences in the user interface consist of the features and enhancements that are added to each successive firmware version You can identify your firmware version on the start up screen The version number appears in the upper right hand corner as shown below Firmware version number 9 34 54 System R1 14E Tektronix 77171995 Ee dun Date 5 20 35
490. urn to Local softkey does not display TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 35 Chapter 8 Remote Control Remote Local State Transitions REMS is entered from LOCS or RWLS when FiberMaster receives the REMOTE command LOCS is entered from REMS or RWLS when FiberMaster receives the LOCAL command LOCS is also entered at power on and when FiberMaster is in REMS and the Return to Local softkey is pressed RWLS is entered from LOCS or REMS when FiberMaster receives the REMLOCK command In all cases the port select sequence REQCTRL lt NL gt must have been sent at some time prior to sending the REMOTE LOCAL or REMLOCK commands Local to Remote Transition When the instrument changes from local to remote operation the following occurs Any currently executing device operation that was initiated from the front panel is aborted with the exception of a mass storage operation When the state change is made the full set of remote commands is now available for execution rather than the limited subset available in the local state The REMOTE indicator on the front panel lights up The instrument remains in the current measurement mode with any previously acquired waveform displayed Instrument settings are not affected Allfront panel controls are disabled The only exception is the softkey that displays only in REMS Return to Local The Return to Local softkey returns the instrument to local control The acquisit
491. ve Product Description NOTE The TEKTRONIX TFP2A FiberMaster Optical Time Domain Reflectometer OTDR is an optical fiber test instrument capable of measuring loss characteristics and displaying faults splices and other fiber events in singlemode and multimode optical fibers FiberMaster applies pulses of light to the fiber under test via the optical output connector As the pulses travel through the fiber some light is reflected back to the instrument These reflections are processed to display a visual representation of the fiber on FiberMaster s cathode ray tube CRT where you can make distance and loss measurements on the fiber under test The CRT display is a time plot read from left to right The trace starts with the outgoing pulse and the time difference is converted to distance in the measurement process When you view a typical fiber display events that are further down the fiber appear to the right later in time Loss is measured on the CRT s vertical scale This manual explains how to use the TFP2A FiberMaster product line which includes mainframe models TFP2A color monitor and TFP2AM monochrome monitor configured with various options Refer to appendix A Accessories and Options In this manual the instrument is referred to generically as FiberMaster or TFP2A to refer to both the TFP2A and TFP2AM models With the exception of a parameter on the System Settings menu used to set the color on color monitors
492. veform horizontally in determine the backscatter level automatic link return The single loss cursor is located at the left hand distance cursor positioned at the Two distance cursors and one loss cursor define link return loss measurements The length of the loss cursor indicates the section of the waveform data used to Return Loss Active Link length distance Inactive distance cursor Loss cursor aligned with backscatter cursor Scattering coefficient Return Event Return Loss Exit Return Loss Event Table 10 393 km 3 MAE s ett 5 dun 8 sett st mm GERMEN AAT N Link Retum Loss 27 1 dB e 5 HRS 9x s RN 00 00 05 Normal Density Off Module F51315 13105M Event Marking Two Point Scatter Coefficient 80 3 Dual Trace 25 0 km Pulse Width 1000 ns 100 m Slope Calc Avqs 1 024 5 3 s Change Settings Maskinq Maximum Range Off Figure 4 16 Link Return Loss Mode TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 4 30 Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements NOTE expanded view The cursor may be automatically limited however to exclude features from the link return loss measurement such as large reflections When the left edge of the expansion window does not extend beyond th
493. vent Threshold 0 20 dB File LINK 100 WFM Figure 4 21 Automatic Event Return Loss Measurement In Event Return Loss mode automatic measurements use the length of the left loss cursor to determine how much waveform data is used in establishing the backscatter level before the reflection The length of the left loss cursor is determined by the width of the expansion window in both overview and expanded view This may cause the automatic loss figures to vary depending on size of the expansion window You can vary the width of the expansion window to control the number of data points used to perform the automatic event return loss measurement 4 44 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 4 Making Optical Fiber Measurements 3 To make manual adjustments to automatic measurements use the slope and vertical Loss knobs to rotate the active loss cursor and move it vertically The active loss cursor is displayed at a brighter intensity When adjusted the cursor elongates automatically extending from the distance cursor to the edge of the display to make it easier to fit to the waveform Press CURSOR SELECT to activate the second loss cursor Adjust the second cursor using the Loss knobs As you adjust the loss cursors the event return loss is recalculated The example below shows a manually adjusted event return loss measurement at the location of a connector Normal Density Averages 1024 User Adjusted Measurement Time 00
494. viation you can add characters For example the STORE command can be abbreviated to STO because STORE is the only command that begins with those three characters However the WFMSELECT and WFMINT commands must be abbreviated to WFMS and WFMI You can abbreviate query headers the same way but the last character of any query header abbreviation must be the ASCII question mark Command and Query Argument Formats The following paragraphs describe conventions used in specifying arguments for GPIB and RS 232 device dependent commands and queries listed in this section These conventions correspond to Device Listening Formats defined in IEEE standard 488 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 55 Chapter 8 Remote Control lt CPD gt Character Program Data Command and query data descriptions specify lt CPD gt elements in upper case letters but FiberMaster also recognizes lower case and mixed upper and lower case A lt CPD gt element starts with any upper or lower case ASCII character and can contain any combination of alphanumeric characters and the ASCII underscore character A CPD element is a non quoted mnemonic or symbol such as REFERENCE XOFF and WFM1A CPD elements for a particular command or query can be abbreviated to the minimum number of characters required to make them unique for that command or query lt DNPD gt Decimal Numeric Program Data defined as follows lt DNPDs gt mantissa
495. waveform data Possible responses are ASCII BINARY HEADER Return header option setting Query Syntax HEADER Response Syntax HEADER option Response Data option lt NR1 gt 0 1 disable or enable query response headers Discussion HDR can be used as a synonym for HEADER TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 119 Chapter 8 Remote Control Waveform Transfer Commands and Queries PUT SET PUT WFM binary encoding Download a waveform or settings file that is in TFP2A mass storage format from the controller to the instrument Waveform files are loaded into current or reference memory depending on which waveform is active Settings files are always loaded into current memory Hemote only GPIB only Command Syntax Command Data Discussion Example s PUT SET lt filename gt 0 lt file_data gt lt NL gt lt END gt WFM filename 40 file data NL END filename SPD a quoted string enclosing the file name to be stored in the TFP2A s source parameter 0 is the header for the IEEE 488 2 Arbitrary Block Program data element and indicates that all the data up to but not including the lt NL gt lt END gt is a binary waveform or settings file data in TFP2A format Do not include white space between 0 and file data and between file data and the NL newline character lt NL gt lt END gt indicates that the waveform file data should be followed by an ASCII
496. waveform is active Possible values are CURRENT REFERENCE Example s WFMSEL C Power On Value CURRENT WFMSELECT Determine whether the current or reference waveform is active Query Syntax WFMSELECT Response Syntax WFMSELECT waveform Response Data waveform CRD and specifies the active waveform Possible responses are CURRENT REFERENCE TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual 8 111 Chapter 8 Remote Control WFMSOURCE Indicate the source of the data for the active waveform Query Syntax WFMSOURCE Response Syntax WFMSOURCE source Response Data source lt CRD gt and specifies the source of the waveform as follows NONE no data is stored for the active waveform i e current memory or reference memory whichever is active is empty ACQUISITION data acquired since power on from an installed optics module MASS STORAGE data loaded from mass storage floppy disk or internal RAM XMODEM data received from RS232 port using XMODEM protocol 8 112 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control Waveform Data Command and Queries WFMINT Select an interval of points on the stored waveform that will be returned by the CURVE query Remote only Command Syntax Command Data Example s Discussion Power On Default WFMINT lt start gt lt end gt start lt DNPD gt and specifies the index of first point in the interval end lt
497. xcluding the newline character 8 54 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 8 Remote Control A program message is defined as prog msg unit gt lt prog msg unit gt The prog msg unit is a command or query defined as header lt data gt lt data gt where the headers is the full or abbreviated command or query name as shown in the descriptions in this section and data is a program data element These elements are described in the following pages For example ACQUIRE 12 5 CENTER 0 1 CURVE is a query message The message UNITS METRIC AVERAGES 256 NL is a terminated program message where NL is the ASCII newline character In addition using GPIB the following messages UNITS METRIC AVERAGES 256 lt NL gt lt END gt UNITS METRIC AVERAGES 2564 lt END gt are terminated program messages where END indicates that the GPIB END line is asserted concurrently with the transmission of the immediately preceding data byte Command and Query Headers Valid command and query headers are given in the command descriptions this section Although they are shown in upper case in this manual command and query headers can be sent in all lower case or mixed upper and lower case without affecting their interpretation by FiberMaster All commands and queries can be abbreviated to a minimum of three characters as long as the abbreviation is unique to that command or query To maintain a unique abbre
498. xit Avgs 20 480 1 1 min Dual Trace Off Module FL1315 13105M Ref Index 1 4680 Event Threshold 0 20 dB Source Empty Figure 3 16 Filtering Pop Up Selection Window Waveform Settings Menu Use the Filtering window to turn software filtering on and off This parameter is available only when an FL type optical module is selected With an FL module selected the filtering parameter replaces the masking type parameter on the Waveform Settings menu and on the list of parameters at the bottom of the acquisition screen On FL modules software filtering decreases noise and improves dynamic range but it can cause a delay in locating automatic event markers for non reflective events For example this delay can cause the event marker for a non reflective splice to be located farther out on a waveform than the marker for a reflective connector at the same physical location Turning software filtering off reduces the delay and increases the distance accuracy of automatic event detection for non reflective events Refer to chapter 5 Event Marking Loading settings from a waveform or settings file does not change the setting of the filtering parameter This parameter must be changed on the Waveform Settings menu 3 30 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started Turn filtering on or off by turning the CURSOR knob to highlight your selection If you have a keyboard you can use the cursor key
499. y FiberMaster listed in appendix c FiberMaster Data Format is retained but all data specific to the instrument that originated the file is discarded The number of waveform and settings files that you can store on mass media varies depending on the type of media you use and the type of data you are storing A typical normal density waveform file can range from 4 or 5 Kbytes to over 30 Kbytes and a waveform that has been stored with high density and masking data can be over 50 Kbytes in size Using a conservative estimate of about 35 Kbytes per file a 1 4 Mbyte floppy disk can store about 40 waveform files 7 2 TFP2A FiberMaster User Manual Chapter 7 Mass Storage Load from Disk Use the Load from Disk menu to load a waveform or instrument settings from a disk file or internal RAM to the instrument If the file is a waveform file you can load the data into current or reference memory You can load settings files into current memory only The Load from Disk menu figure 7 1 is the first one displayed when you enter the mass storage system From any other mass storage menu go to the Load from Disk menu by pressing the Next Menu softkey until the menu displays and is highlighted at the top of the screen Selecting a File to Load The disk s directory is shown on the lower half of the screen The selected file in the directory is highlighted The file specification fields display data for the highlighted file Turn the dis
500. y manual adjustments made in Link Return Loss mode are retained until you press the Link Return Loss softkey again If you exit Link Return Loss mode after making manual adjustments the adjustments are retained and displayed when you re enter Link Return Loss mode unless you make changes in the related Two Point mode see note on the previous page In this case press the Link Return Loss softkey again to clear user adjusted measurements and make new link return loss measurements using the current distance cursor positions Pressing and holding the Link Return Loss softkey for two seconds exits LInk Return Loss mode and enters Preview mode Exit Link Return Loss mode and enter Event Return Loss mode The active distance cursor location is used for event return loss measurements This softkey is available only when return loss is on Pressing Exit Return Loss turns the return loss modes off The Link Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Two Point softkey the Event Return Loss softkey is replaced by the Splice Loss softkey and the instrument enters Two Point mode Exit Return Loss reverts to Return Loss Enter the mass storage menu system allowing you to store waveform and settings data on floppy disk or internal RAM if installed Refer to chapter 7 Mass Storage for details on how to use this system Enter the Waveform Settings menu allowing you to change instrument settings and giving access to additional configuration menus Ref
501. yntax Response Data FILE lt filetype gt filetype lt CPD gt WFM NORMAL Send waveform file with normal density data only WFM HIGH Send waveform file with normal and high density data if any SET Send settings file FILE file data file data lt len gt lt count gt lt data_byte gt lt checksum gt The data is in Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data format len is a single digit 0 9 that specifies the number of bytes in the lt NR1 gt element count count specifies the number of bytes that follow including the checksum lt checksum gt gives the two s complement of the modulo 256 sum of bytes in the response excluding the Binary encoding selected by the ENCDG BINARY command lt data_byte gt corresponds to one eight bit byte of waveform data and lt checksum gt is an eight bit checksum ASCII encoding selected by the ENCDG ASCII command This encoding is designed primarily for RS 232 remote control applications in which binary data cannot be handled In this format each eight bit byte of actual waveform data is encoded as two hexadecimal digits For example the data returned by FiberMaster when an actual waveform data byte has value 2E hex is the digit 2 32 hex followed by the digit E 45 hex The most significant digit 82 hex is sent first In this case each lt data_byte gt is two hex encoded digits and lt checksum gt is two hex encod

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Kenwood Electronics CX-DAB1  WF2415 User Manual 300Mbps Gigabit Wireless-N AP  latest audio /video models., revealed to retailers  Sencor SLE 2909M4 LED TV  Asahi Pentax PZ-10 Instruction Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file